L1000A AC Elevator Drive: Quick Start Guide

L1000A AC Elevator Drive

Quick Start Guide
Type: CIMR-LU A
Models: 200 V Class: 1.5 to 110 kW (2 to 150 HP)
400 V Class: 1.5 to 132 kW (2 to 200 HP)
To properly use the product, read this manual thoroughly and retain for easy reference,
inspection, and maintenance. Ensure that the end user receives this manual.
TM7349 rev 02
© Magnetek Elevator 2012
TM7349_rev_01.book Page 2 Wednesday, December 5, 2012 10:47 AM
Copyright © 2012 MAGNETEK.

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of Magnetek. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information
contained herein. Moreover, because Magnetek is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the
information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in
the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, Magnetek assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions.
Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this
publication.
2 Magnetek L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide

◆ Quick Reference
Drive a Synchronous PM Motor
L1000A can operate synchronous PM motors. Flowchart C: Auto-Tuning for PM Motors on

page 59.
Perform Auto-Tuning
Automatic tuning sets motor parameters. Refer to Types of Auto-Tuning on page 61.
Maintenance Check Using Drive Monitors

Use drive monitors to check fans, capacitors, and other components may require maintenance. Refer to Performance Life Monitors Maintenance
Monitors on page 123.
Fault Display and Troubleshooting

Refer to Troubleshooting on page 110.
Standards Compliance
YEA
Refer to European Standards on page 188 and UL and CSA Standards on page 195. _co
mmo
CSA B44.1 /
ASME A17.5 n
Magnetek L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide 3

This Page Intentionally Blank

Table of Contents
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
i. Preface & General Safety ................................................................................................. 7
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
General Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
1. Receiving ......................................................................................................................... 15
Model Number and Nameplate Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
2. Mechanical Installation ................................................................................................... 17
Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
3. Electrical Installation ...................................................................................................... 21
Standard Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Main Circuit Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Terminal Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Digital Operator and Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Main Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Control I/O Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Connect to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Wiring Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
4. Start-Up Programming & Operation ............................................................................. 47
Using the Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
The Drive and Programming Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Start-Up Flowcharts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
S: Elevator Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Setup Troubleshooting and Possible Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
5. Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 110
Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Alarm Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Operator Programming Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Auto-Tuning Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Copy Function Related Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
6. Periodic Inspection & Maintenance ............................................................................ 120
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Periodic Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Drive Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
7. Option Card Installation ............................................................................................... 127
Prior to Installing the Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Installing the Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Wire Gauges, Tightening Torque, and Crimp Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Terminal Functions of PG-B3 and PG-X3 Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
A. Specifications................................................................................................................ 137
Three-Phase 200 V Class Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Magnetek L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide 5

Table of Contents
Drive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

B. Parameter Table ............................................................................................................ 141
A: Initialization Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
b: Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
C: Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
d: Speed References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
E: Motor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
F: Option Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
H: Multi-Function Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
L: Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
n: Advanced Performance Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
o: Operator Related Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
S: Elevator Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
T: Motor Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
U: Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Defaults and Setting Ranges by Display Unit Selection (o1-03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
C. Standards Compliance ................................................................................................. 188
European Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
UL and CSA Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Safe Disable Input Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
EN81-1 Conform Circuit with one Motor Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Revision History..............................................................................................................208

i Preface & General Safety

◆ Preface
Magnetek manufactures products used as components in a wide variety of industrial systems and equipment. The
selection and application of Magnetek products remain the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer or end user.
Magnetek accepts no responsibility for the way its products are incorporated into the final system design. Under no
circumstances should any Magnetek product be incorporated into any product or design as the exclusive or sole safety
control. Without exception, all controls should be designed to detect faults dynamically and fail safely under all
circumstances. All systems or equipment designed to incorporate a product manufactured by Magnetek must be supplied
to the end user with appropriate warnings and instructions as to the safe use and operation of that part. Any warnings
provided by Magnetek must be promptly provided to the end user. Magnetek offers an express warranty only as to the
quality of its products in conforming to standards and specifications published in the Magnetek manual. NO OTHER
WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IS OFFERED. Magnetek assumes no liability for any personal injury, property
damage, losses, or claims arising from misapplication of its products.
This manual is designed to ensure correct and suitable application of L1000A-Series Drives. Read this manual before
attempting to install, operate, maintain, or inspect a drive and keep it in a safe, convenient location for future reference.
Be sure you understand all precautions and safety information before attempting application.
■ Applicable Documentation
The following manuals are available for L1000A series drives:
L1000A Series AC Drive Quick Start Guide (this book)

DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 ALM
Read this manual first. This guide is packaged together with the product. It contains basic
ESC
F1 F2
LO
RE
information required to install and wire the drive, in addition to an overview of fault diagnostics,
maintenance, and parameter settings. Use the information in this book to prepare the drive for a trial
RESET ENTER
RUN STOP
CIMR-AA2A0021FAA
200V 3Phase 5.5kW/3.7kW
S/N:
WARNING
●
●
Risk of electric shock.
Read manual before installing.
Wait 5 minutes for capacitor
discharge after disconnecting
AVERTISSMENT NPJT31470-1
●
●
Risque de décharge électrique.
Lire le manuel avant l'installation.
Attendre 5 minutes après la coupure
de l'alimentation, pour permettre
run with the application and for basic operation.
power supply. la décharge des condensateurs.
L1000A Series AC Drive Technical Manual

● To conform to requirements, ● Pour répondre aux exigences , s
make sure to ground the supply assurer que le neutre soit relié
neutral for 400V class. à la terre, pour la série 400V.
After opening the manual switch Après avoir déconnécte la protection
YEA_
● ●
between the drive and motor, entre le driver et le moteur, veuillez

please wait 5 minutes before patienter 5 minutes avain d’effectuer
inspecting, performing une opération de montage ou de
maintenance or wiring the drive. câblage du variateur.
Hot surfaces Surfaces Chaudes
●
Top and Side surfaces may ● Dessus et cotés du boitier Peuvent
become hot. Do not touch. devenir chaud. Ne Pas toucher.
危険
けが．感電のおそれがあります。
● ● 据え付け、運転の前には必ず取扱説明書を読むこと。
●
● 通電中および電源遮断後5分以内はフロントカバー
を外さない事。
This manual provides detailed information on parameter settings, drive functions, and MEMOBUS/
●
● 400V級インバータの場合は、電源の中性点が接地
されていることを確認すること。( 対応）
● 保守・点検、配線を行う場合は、出力側開閉器を
●
遮断後5分待って実施してください。
高温注意
common
● インバータ上部、両側面は高温になります。
● 触らないでください。
Modbus specifications. Use this manual to expand drive functionality and to take advantage of
higher performance features.
◆ General Safety
■ Supplemental Safety Information
General Precautions
• The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details. Replace the covers or shields before operating the
drive and run the drive according to the instructions described in this manual.
• Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples only and may not apply to all products to which this
manual is applicable.
• The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation of the manual may be changed without notice to
improve the product and/or the manual.
• When ordering a new copy of the manual due to damage or loss, contact your Magnetek representative or the nearest Magnetek sales office and
provide the manual number shown on the front cover.
• If nameplate becomes worn or damaged, order a replacement from your Magnetek representative or the nearest Magnetek sales office.
WARNING
Read and understand this manual before installing, operating or servicing this drive. The drive must be installed
according to this manual and local codes.
The following conventions are used to indicate safety messages in this manual. Failure to heed these messages could
result in serious or fatal injury or damage to the products or to related equipment and systems.
MAGNETEK L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide 7

DANGER
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! may also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety message.
CAUTION
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION! may also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety message.
NOTICE
Indicates a property damage message.
NOTICE: may also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety message.
■ Safety Messages
DANGER
Heed the safety messages in this manual.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.
The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings
in this manual.
Electrical Shock Hazard

Do not connect or disconnect wiring or service the drive while the power is on.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.
Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power
supply is turned off. After shutting off the power, wait for at least the amount of time specified on the drive before
touching any components.
WARNING
Sudden Movement Hazard
The drive system or elevator may start unexpectedly upon application of power, resulting in death or serious
injury.
• Clear all personnel from the drive, motor, and machine area before applying power.
• Secure covers, couplings, shaft keys, and machine loads before applying power to the drive.
Ensure there are no short circuits between the main circuit terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) or between the
ground and main circuit terminals before restarting the drive.
Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death and will cause damage to equipment.
8 MAGNETEK L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide

WARNING
System may start unexpectedly upon application of power when the Auto-restart function is enabled resulting in
death or serious injury.
Use care when enabling Auto-restart as this function may cause unintended start of the elevator.
Use parameter S1-12 to enable/disable automatic switching of the Motor Contactor Control output signal
during Auto-Tuning.
When using setting S1-12 = 1, ensure that the multi-function output terminals are properly wired and in the correct
state before setting parameter S1-12.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive, serious injury or death.
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not attempt to modify or alter the drive in any way not explained in this manual.
Magnetek is not responsible for damage caused by modification of the product made by the user. Failure to comply
could result in death or serious injury from operation of damaged equipment.
Do not operate equipment with covers removed.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstall
covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual.
When a drive is running a PM motor, voltage continues to be generated at the motor terminals after the drive is
shut off while the motor coasts to stop. Take the precautions described below to prevent shock and injury:
• In applications where the machine can still rotate even though the drive has fully stopped a load, install a switch to
the drive output side to disconnect the motor and the drive.
• Do not allow an external force to rotate the motor beyond the maximum allowable speed or to rotate the motor when
the drive has been shut off.
• Wait for at least the time specified on the warning label after opening the load switch on the output side before
inspecting the drive or performing any maintenance.
• Do not open and close the load switch while the motor is running, as this can damage the drive.
If the motor is coasting, make sure the power to the drive is turned on and the drive output has completely stopped
before closing the load switch.
Do not connect or disconnect wiring to the drive or motor while the power is on.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The
internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish
when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait at least five minutes after all indicators are
OFF and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level.
Do not operate equipment with covers removed.
The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstall
covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual.
Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry or without eye protection.
Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing, and wear eye protection before beginning
work on the drive.

WARNING
Do not change wiring, remove covers, connectors or options cards, or attempt to service the drive with power
applied to the drive.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all power to the drive and check for unsafe
voltages before servicing.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the equipment.
Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with
installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives.
Fire Hazard
Drive Short-Circuit Current Rating
Install adequate branch circuit protection according to applicable local codes and this Installation Manual.
Failure to comply could result in fire and damage to the drive or injury to personnel.
The device is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240
Vac maximum (200 V class) and 480 Vac maximum (400 V class), and 600 Vac maximum (600 V class) when
protected by branch circuit protection devices specified in this manual.
Applications using a braking option should wire a thermal relay so that the output contactor opens when the
thermal relay trips.
Inadequate braking circuit protection could result in death or serious injury by fire from overheating resistors.
Do not use improper combustible materials.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.
Attach the drive to metal or other noncombustible material.
NOTICE
Equipment Hazard
Do not modify the drive circuitry.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive and will void warranty.
Magnetek is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user. This product must not be modified.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive or braking circuit.
Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive, circuit boards, and option
cards.
Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Do not operate damaged equipment.
Failure to comply could result in further damage to the equipment.
Do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts.
Do not lift the drive up while the cover is removed.
This can damage the terminal board and other components.
Do not expose the drive to halogen group disinfectants.
Failure to comply may cause damage to the electrical components in the drive.
Do not pack the drive in wooden materials that have been fumigated or sterilized.
Do not sterilize the entire package after the product is packed.

■ General Application Precautions

Motor Selection
Drive Capacity
The output current should not exceed 150% of the drive rated current. Select a drive that can output enough current when
accelerating a load at 100%.
For specialized motors, make sure that the motor rated current is less than the rated output current for the drive.
Starting Torque
The startup and acceleration characteristics of the motor are restricted to the drive's overload current rating (150% rated
current for 60 s).
The overload rating for the drive determines the starting and accelerating characteristics of the motor. Expect lower
torque than when running from line power. To get more starting torque, use a larger drive or increase both the motor and
drive capacity.
Stopping
Fast Stop
When the drive faults out, a protective circuit is activated and drive output is shut off. This, however, does not stop the
motor immediately. A mechanical brake may be required to stop the motor if Fast Stop deceleration is insufficient.
Mechanical Brake
A mechanical brake is required to prevent the elevator from free falling during a drive fault condition.
Repetitive Starting/Stopping
Elevators and other applications with frequent starts and stops often approach 150% of their rated current values. Heat
stress generated from repetitive high current will shorten the life span of the IGBTs.
Magnetek recommends lowering the carrier frequency, particularly when audible noise is not a concern. It is beneficial to
reduce the load, increase the acceleration and deceleration times, or switch to a larger drive to help keep peak current
levels under 150%. Be sure to check the peak current levels when starting and stopping repeatedly during the initial test
run, and make adjustments accordingly.
Installation
Enclosure Panels
Keep the drive in a clean environment by installing the drive in an enclosure panel or selecting an installation area free of
airborne dust, lint, and oil mist. Be sure to leave the required space between drives to provide for cooling, and take proper
measures so the ambient temperature remains within allowable limits and keep flammable materials away from the drive.
Magnetek offers protective designs for drives that must be used in areas subjected to oil mist and excessive vibration.
Contact Magnetek or your Magnetek representative for details.
Installation Direction
NOTICE: Install the drive upright as specified in the manual. Refer to Mechanical Installation on page 17 for more information on
installation. Failure to comply may damage the drive due to improper cooling.
Settings
DC Injection Braking
NOTICE: Excessive current during DC Injection Braking and excessive duration of DC Injection Braking can cause motor overheating.
Adjust DC Injection parameters to prevent motor overheating.
Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp
Acceleration and deceleration times are affected by the amount of torque generated by the motor, the load torque, and the
inertia moment. Set a longer accel/decel time when Stall Prevention is enabled. The accel/decel times are lengthened for
as long as the Stall Prevention function is in operation. Install one of the available braking options or increase the capacity
of the drive for faster acceleration and deceleration.

General Handling
Selecting a Molded Case Circuit Breaker or Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI)
Select an appropriate GFCI. This drive can cause a residual current with a DC component in the protective earthing
conductor. Where a residual current operated protective or monitoring device is used for protection in case of direct or
indirect contact, always use an GFCI of type B according to IEC 60755.
Select a MCCB (Molded Case Circuit Breaker) with a rated current that is 1.5 to 2 times higher than the rated current of
the drive in order to avoid nuisance trips caused by harmonics in the drive input current.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Install a properly controlled contactor on the input-side of the drive for applications where
power should be removed from the drive during a fault condition. Improper equipment sequencing could result in death or serious
injury.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Shut off the drive with a magnetic contactor (MC) when a fault occurs in any external equipment such as
braking resistors. Failure to comply may cause resistor overheating, fire, and injury to personnel.
NOTICE: To get the full performance life out of the electrolytic capacitors and circuit relays, refrain from switching the drive power
supply off and on more than once every 30 minutes. Frequent use can damage the drive. Use the drive to stop and start the motor.
Inspection and Maintenance

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Capacitors in the drive do not immediately discharge after shutting off the power. Wait for at least
the amount of time specified on the drive before touching any components after shutting off the power. Failure to comply may cause
injury to personnel from electrical shock.
CAUTION! Burn Hazard. Because the heatsink can get very hot during operation, take proper precautions to prevent burns. When
replacing the cooling fan, shut off the power and wait at least 15 minutes to be sure that the heatsink has cooled down. Failure to
comply may cause burn injury to personnel.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. When a drive is running a PM motor, voltage continues to be generated at the motor terminals
after the drive is shut off while the motor coasts to stop. Take the precautions described below to prevent shock and injury:
• In applications where the machine can still rotate after the drive has fully stopped a load, install a load disconnect
switch on the drive output side to disconnect the motor and the drive.
• Do not allow an external force to rotate the motor beyond the maximum allowable speed or to rotate the motor when the
drive is powered off.
• Wait for at least the time specified on the warning label after opening the load switch on the output side before
inspecting the drive or performing any maintenance.
• Do not open and close the load switch while the motor is running.
• If the motor is coasting, make sure the power to the drive is turned on and the drive output has completely stopped
before closing the load switch to reconnect the drive to the motor.
Wiring
Magnetek recommends using ring terminals on all drive models for UL/cUL compliance. Use only the tools
recommended by the terminal manufacturer for crimping.
Transporting the Drive
NOTICE: Never steam clean the drive. During transport, keep the drive from coming into contact with salts, fluorine, bromine, phthalate
ester, and other such harmful chemicals. Failure to comply may damage the drive.

■ Motor Application Precautions

Standard Induction Motors
Insulation Tolerance
NOTICE: Consider motor voltage tolerance levels and motor insulation in applications with an input voltage of over 440 V or particularly
long wiring distances.
NOTICE: Ensure that the motor is suitable for inverter duty and/or the motor service factor is adequate to accommodate the additional
heating with the intended operating conditions. A motor connected to a PWM drive may operate at a higher temperature than a utility-
fed motor and the operating speed range may reduce motor cooling capacity.
High-Speed Operation
NOTICE: Mechanical damage may occur with the motor bearings and dynamic balance of the machine when operating a motor
beyond its rated speed. Operate the motor within specifications to prevent motor damage.
Low-Speed Range
The cooling fan of a standard motor should sufficiently cool the motor at the rated speed. As the self-cooling capability of
such a motor reduces with the speed, applying full torque at low speed will possibly damage the motor. Reduce the load
torque as the motor slows to prevent motor damage from overheat. Use a motor designed specifically for operation with a
drive when 100% continuous torque is needed at low speeds.
Torque Characteristics
Torque characteristics differ compared to operating the motor directly from line power. The user should have a full
understanding of the load torque characteristics for the application.
Vibration and Shock
The drive allows selection of high carrier PWM control and low carrier PWM control. Selecting high carrier PWM can
help reduce motor oscillation.
If resonance occurs, install shock-absorbing rubber mounts around the base of the motor and utilize the Jump frequency
selection to prevent continuous operation in the resonant frequency ranges.
Audible Noise
Noise created during run varies by the carrier frequency setting. When using a high carrier frequency, audible noise from
the motor is comparable to the motor noise generated when running from line power. Operating above the rated r/min,
however, can create unpleasant motor noise.
Precautions for PM Motors
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Improper sequencing of output motor circuits could result in damage to the drive. Do not connect
electromagnetic switches or magnetic contactors to the output motor circuits without proper sequencing. Do not open the main circuit
between the drive and the motor while the PM motor is rotating.
• Contact Magnetek or your Magnetek representative if you plan to use any PM motor not endorsed by Magnetek.
• When using a holding brake, release the brake prior to starting the motor. Failure to set the proper timing can result in
speed loss.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Use the Initial Pole Search Status Signal (H2-= 61) to interlock the brake to ensure the
brake is not released before the Initial Magnetic Pole Search is completed. Failure to comply may cause inadvertent elevator
movement resulting in serious injury.
This safety message is applicable under these conditions:
• When applying a PM motor, with an external brake sequence, and the PG-F3 option is not being used.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. The motor must be at a complete stop before performing any maintenance, inspection, or wiring.
• With a PM motor, drive output must be fully interrupted when the power is shut off and the motor is still rotating.
Failure to comply can result in personal injury from electrical shock.

■ Drive Label Warnings

Always heed the warning information listed in Figure 1 in the position shown in Figure 2.
Figure 1
WARNING
Risk of electric shock.
●
Read manual before installing.
●
Wait 5 minutes for capacitor
discharge after disconnecting
power supply.
●
To conform to requirements,
make sure to ground the supply
neutral for 400V class.
● After opening the manual switch
between the drive and motor,
please wait 5 minutes before
inspecting, performing
maintenance or wiring the drive.
Hot surfaces
●
Top and Side surfaces may
become hot. Do not touch.
Figure 1 Warning Information
Figure 2
YEA_comm
F1 F2
on
LO
ESC
RE
RESET ENTER
RUN STOP
CIMR
200V 3Phase 5.5kW/3.7kW
S/N:
WARNING AVERTISSMENT NPJT31470-1

Risk of electric shock. Risque de décharge électrique.
● Read manual before installing. ● Lire le manuel avant l'installation.
● Wait 5 minutes for capacitor ● Attendre 5 minutes après la coupure
discharge after disconnecting de l'alimentation, pour permettre
power supply. la décharge des condensateurs.
● To conform to requirements, ● Pour répondre aux exigences , s
make sure to ground the supply assurer que le neutre soit relié
neutral for 400V class. à la terre, pour la série 400V.
● After opening the manual switch ● Après avoir déconnécte la protection
between the drive and motor, entre le driver et le moteur, veuillez
please wait 5 minutes before patienter 5 minutes avain d’effectuer
inspecting, performing une opération de montage ou de
Warning Label
maintenance or wiring the drive. câblage du variateur.
Hot surfaces Surfaces Chaudes
●
Top and Side surfaces may ● Dessus et cotés du boitier Peuvent
become hot. Do not touch. devenir chaud. Ne Pas toucher.
危険
けが．感電のおそれがあります。
● ● 据え付け、運転の前には必ず取扱説明書を読むこと。
●
● 通電中および電源遮断後5分以内はフロントカバー
を外さない事。
●
● 400V級インバータの場合は、電源の中性点が接地
されていることを確認すること。( 対応）
● 保守・点検、配線を行う場合は、出力側開閉器を
遮断後5分待って実施してください。
高温注意
● インバータ上部、両側面は高温になります。
● 触らないでください。
Figure 2 Warning Information Position
■ Warranty Information
Restrictions
The drive is not designed or manufactured for use in devices or systems that may directly affect or threaten human lives or
health.
Customers who intend to use the product described in this manual for devices or systems relating to transportation, health
care, space aviation, atomic power, electric power, or in underwater applications must first contact their Magnetek
representatives or the nearest Magnetek sales office.
WARNING! Injury to Personnel. This product has been manufactured under strict quality-control guidelines. However, if this product is
to be installed in any location where failure of this product could involve or result in a life-and-death situation or loss of human life or in
a facility where failure may cause a serious accident or physical injury, safety devices must be installed to minimize the likelihood of any
accident.

1 Receiving
1 Receiving
◆ Model Number and Nameplate Check
Please perform the following tasks after receiving the drive:
• Inspect the drive for damage.
If the drive appears damaged upon receipt, contact the shipper immediately.
• Verify receipt of the correct model by checking the information on the nameplate.
• If you have received the wrong model or the drive does not function properly, contact your supplier.
Description Drive Controller Power Supply Cable Quick Start Guide

for Rescue Operation
YEA_co
Quick Start Guide
mmon
Quantity 1 1 1
■ Nameplate
Figure 3
YEA_common
AC drive model MODEL : CIMR-LU2A0018DAA REV: A

C/C : CIMR-LU2A0018DAA
Receiving
Input specifications INPUT : AC3PH 200-240V 50/60Hz 18.9A
IND.CONT.EQ.
Output specifications OUTPUT : AC3PH 0-240V 0-120Hz 17.5A 7J48 B
MASS : 3.5 kg PRG : 1010 Software version
Lot number O/N :
Serial number S/N :
FILE NO : E131457 IP00

PASS
1
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN
Enclosure type
Figure 3 Nameplate Information

1 Receiving
■ Model Number
CIMR - L U 2 A 0018 D A A
Drive L1000A Customized No. Enclosure Type Design
No.
Series Specifications Revision
A IP00 Order
Region A Standard model
No. IP00 with top
Code D protective cover
U U.S.A.
Environmental
No.
Specification <1>
A Standard
YEA_common No. Voltage Class

2 3-phase, 200-240 Vac
4 3-phase, 380-480 Vac
Refer to Table 1
<1> Drives with these specifications do not guarantee complete protection for the environmental conditions
indicated.
Table 1 Model Number and Specifications
Three-Phase 200 V Three-Phase 400 V
No. Max. Motor Rated Output No. Max. Motor Rated Output
Capacity kW (HP) Current A Capacity kW (HP) Current A
0008 1.5 (2) 8 0005 1.5 (2) 4.8
0011 2.2 (3) 11 0006 2.2 (3) 5.5
0014 3.0 (4) 14 0007 3.0 (4) 7.2
0018 3.7 (5) 17.5 0009 3.7 (5) 9.2
0025 5.5 (7-1/2) 25 0015 5.5 (7-1/2) 14.8
0033 7.5 (10) 33 0018 7.5 (10) 18
0047 11 (15) 47 0024 11 (15) 24
0060 15 (20) 60 0031 15 (20) 31
0075 18.5 (25) 75 0039 18.5 (25) 39
0085 22 (30) 85 0045 22 (30) 45
0115 30 (40) 115 0060 30 (40) 60
0145 37 (50) 145 0075 37 (50) 75
0180 45 (60) 180 0091 45 (60) 91
0215 55 (75) 215 0112 55 (75) 112
0283 75 (100) 283 0150 75 (100) 150
0346 90 (125) 346 0180 90 (125) 180
0415 110 (150) 415 0216 110 (150) 216
– – – 0260 132 (200) 260
Figure 4
Figure 5
Figure 6

2 Mechanical Installation
◆ Mechanical Installation
This section outlines specifications, procedures, and the environment for proper mechanical installation of the drive.
CAUTION! Crush Hazard. Carrying the drive by the front cover may cause the main body of the drive to fall, resulting in minor or
moderate injury. Always hold the case when carrying the drive.
■ Installation Environment
Install the drive in an environment matching the specifications below to help prolong the optimum performance life of the
drive.
Table 2 Installation Environment
Environment Conditions
Installation Area Indoors
IP00 enclosure with top protective cover: -10 to +40°C
IP00 enclosure: -10 to +50°C
Drive reliability improves in environments without wide temperature fluctuations.
Ambient Temperature
When using the drive in an enclosure panel, install a cooling fan or air conditioner in the area to ensure that the air
temperature inside the enclosure does not exceed the specified levels.
Do not allow ice to develop on the drive.
Humidity 95% RH or less and free of condensation
Storage Temperature -20 to 60°C
Install the drive in an area free from:
• oil mist and dust
• metal shavings, oil, water or other foreign materials
• radioactive materials
Surrounding Area • combustible materials (e.g., wood)
• harmful gases and liquids
• excessive vibration
• chlorides
• direct sunlight
Altitude 1000 m or lower, up to 3000 m with derating (Refer to Altitude Derating on page 140)
10 to 20 Hz at 9.8 m/s2
Vibration 20 to 55 Hz at 5.9 m/s2 (2A0008 to 2A0180, 4A0005 to 4A0150) or 2.0 m/s2 (2A0215 to 2A0415, 4A0180 to
4A0260)
Mechanical
Orientation Install the drive vertically to maintain maximum cooling effects.

Installation
NOTICE: Avoid placing drive peripheral devices, transformers, or other electronics near the drive as the noise created can lead to
erroneous operation. If such devices must be used in close proximity to the drive, take proper steps to shield the drive from noise.
NOTICE: Prevent foreign matter such as metal shavings and wire clippings from falling into the drive during installation. Failure to
comply could result in damage to the drive. Place a temporary cover over the top of the drive during installation. Remove the temporary
2
cover before startup, as the cover will reduce ventilation and cause the drive to overheat.

■ Installation Orientation and Spacing

WARNING! Fire Hazard. Provide sufficient cooling when installing the drive inside an enclosed panel or cabinet. Failure to comply
could result in overheating and fire. When drives are placed inside the same enclosure panel, install proper cooling to ensure air
entering the enclosure does not exceed 40°C.
Installation Orientation
Install the drive upright as illustrated in Figure 4 to maintain proper cooling. Refer to Mechanical Installation on
page 17 for details on installing the drive.
Figure 7
OK Not OK Not OK
Figure 4 Correct Installation Orientation

Installation Spacing
Figure 5 shows the installation distance required to maintain sufficient space for airflow and wiring.
Figure 8
Side Clearance Top/Bottom Clearance
A C
YEA_common
B B
C
D D
A
A – 50 mm (1.97 in.) minimum C – 120 mm (4.72 in.) minimum

B – 30 mm (1.18 in.) minimum D – Airflow direction
Figure 5 Correct Installation Spacing

■ Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

IP00 Enclosure Drive with Top Protective Cover
4-d
0.06
W1
W1 4-d
t2
H1
H1
H
H
t1
D1
H2
t1
D
H2
W D1 Max 0.31 W Max 0.31

D
Figure 1 YEA_common Figure 2
Table 3 Dimensions: 200 V Class
Drive Model Dimensions (in) Weight

CIMR-LU2A Figure (lbs)
W H D W1 H1 H2 D1 t1 t2 d
0008 5.5 10.2 5.8 4.8 9.8 0.2 1.5 0.2 – M5 7.1
0011 5.5 10.2 5.8 4.8 9.8 0.2 1.5 0.2 – M5 7.1
0014 5.5 10.2 6.5 4.8 9.8 0.2 2.2 0.2 – M5 7.7
0018 5.5 10.2 6.5 4.8 9.8 0.2 2.2 0.2 – M5 7.7
0025 1 5.5 10.2 6.6 4.8 9.8 0.2 2.2 0.2 – M5 8.8
0033 5.5 10.2 6.6 4.8 9.8 0.2 2.2 0.2 – M5 8.8
0047 7.1 11.8 7.4 6.3 11.2 0.3 3.0 0.2 – M5 12.3
0060 8.7 13.8 7.8 7.6 13.2 0.3 3.1 0.2 – M6 19.2
0075 8.7 13.8 7.8 7.6 13.2 0.3 3.1 0.2 – M6 21.4
Mechanical
Installation
0085 9.8 15.7 10.2 7.7 15.2 0.3 3.9 0.1 0.1 M6 46.3
0115 10.8 17.7 10.2 8.7 17.1 0.3 3.9 0.1 0.1 M6 55.1
2
0145 12.8 21.7 11.1 10.2 21.1 0.3 4.3 0.1 0.1 M6 81.6
0180 12.8 21.7 11.1 10.2 21.1 0.3 4.3 0.1 0.1 M6 83.8
2


Figure
CIMR-LU4A W H D W1 H1 H2 D1 t1 t2 d (lbs)
0005 5.5 10.2 5.8 4.8 9.8 0.2 1.5 0.2 – M5 7.1
0006 5.5 10.2 6.5 4.8 9.8 0.2 2.2 0.2 – M5 7.5
0007 5.5 10.2 6.5 4.8 9.8 0.2 2.2 0.2 – M5 7.7
0009 5.5 10.2 6.5 4.8 9.8 0.2 2.2 0.2 – M5 7.7
0015 1 5.5 10.2 6.6 4.8 9.8 0.2 2.2 0.2 – M5 8.6
0018 5.5 10.2 6.6 4.8 9.8 0.2 2.2 0.2 – M5 8.9
0024 7.1 11.8 6.6 6.3 11.2 0.3 2.2 0.2 – M5 11.9
0031 7.1 11.8 7.4 6.3 11.2 0.3 3.0 0.2 – M5 11.9
0039 8.7 13.8 7.8 7.6 13.2 0.3 3.1 0.2 – M6 18.3
0045 9.8 15.7 10.2 7.7 15.2 0.3 3.9 0.1 0.1 M6 46.3
0060 10.8 17.7 10.2 8.7 17.1 0.3 3.9 0.1 0.1 M6 55.1
0075 12.8 510 10.2 10.2 19.5 0.3 4.1 0.1 0.1 M6 79.4
2
0091 12.8 510 10.2 10.2 19.5 0.3 4.1 0.1 0.1 M6 79.4
0112 12.8 21.7 11.1 10.2 21.1 0.3 4.3 0.1 0.1 M6 90.4
0150 12.8 21.7 11.1 10.2 21.1 0.3 4.3 0.1 0.1 M6 92.6
IP00 Enclosure Drive

W1 4-d
t2
YEA_common
H1
H
t1
H2
D1
max 0.31 W max 0.31 D
Figure 1

Figure
CIMR-LU2A W H D W1 H1 H2 D1 t1 t2 d (lbs)
0215 17.7 27.8 13.0 12.8 26.8 0.5 5.1 0.1 0.1 M10 167.6
0283 17.7 27.8 13.0 12.8 26.8 0.5 5.1 0.1 0.1 M10 176.4
1
0346 19.7 31.5 13.8 14.6 30.4 0.5 5.1 0.2 0.2 M12 216.1
0415 19.7 31.5 13.8 14.6 30.4 0.5 5.1 0.2 0.2 M12 218.3

CIMR-LU4A Figure (lbs)
W H D W1 H1 H2 D1 t1 t2 d
0180 17.7 27.8 13.0 12.8 26.8 0.5 5.1 0.1 0.1 M10 174.2
0216 1 19.7 31.5 13.8 14.6 30.4 0.5 5.1 0.2 0.2 M12 211.6
0260 19.7 31.5 13.8 14.6 30.4 0.5 5.1 0.2 0.2 M12 224.9

3 Electrical Installation
◆ Standard Connection Diagram
Connect the drive and peripheral devices as shown in Figure 6. It is possible to set and run the drive via the digital
operator without connecting digital I/O wiring. This section does not discuss drive operation; Refer to Start-Up
Programming & Operation on page 47 for instructions on operating the drive.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Ensure holding brake circuits are properly configured, load equipment may fall or drop during
power loss or drive fault, which could result in death or serious injury.
・Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.
・Always construct the external sequence to confirm that the holding brake is activated in the event of an emergency, a power failure, or
an abnormality in the drive.
・When using the drive with an elevator, provide safety measures on the elevator to prevent the elevator from dropping.
NOTICE: Inadequate wiring could result in damage to the drive. Install adequate branch circuit short circuit protection per applicable
codes. The drive is suitable for circuits capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240 Vac maximum
(200 V Class) and 480 Vac maximum (400 V Class).
NOTICE: When the input voltage is 440 V or higher or the wiring distance is greater than 100 meters (328 ft.), pay special attention to
the motor insulation voltage or use a drive rated motor. Failure to comply could lead to motor insulation breakdown.
Note: Do not connect AC control circuit ground to drive enclosure. Improper drive grounding can cause control circuit malfunction.
NOTICE: The minimum load for the multi-function relay output MA-MB-MC is 10 mA. If a circuit requires less than 10 mA (reference
value), connect it to a photocoupler output (P1-C1, P2-C2). Improper application of peripheral devices could result in damage to the
photocoupler output of the drive.
Electrical Installation

Figure 9
<4>
FU
r1
Terminals -, +1, +2, B1, B2 are
for connecting options. Never
DC link choke <1>
(option) Thermal relay
(option)
s1
FV
M YEA_common
connect power supply lines to U X <2><3>
FW
these terminals
t1 Cooling fan
Jumper Braking resistor
(option)
+2 +1 − B1 B2 <2> U/T1
Wiring sequence should shut off
U/T1
Main Circuit
power to the drive when a fault V/T2 V/T2
output is triggered. 2MCCB M
<14> W/T3
r1
s1 W/T3
t1
ELCB (MCCB) MC Fuse
Three-phase R
R/L1
power supply S S/L2
Ground
200 to 240 VT T/L3
50/60 Hz PGX3 TB1
If running from a 400 V power
supply, a step-down transformer
is needed to reduce the voltage
Drive <6> A+
A
to 200 V.
MC MB 2MCCB THRX OFF ON MC Control Circuit <5> B+ PG
SA
B
MC Up command / Stop S1 Z+
Braking resistor unit
Thermal relay trip contact THRX Z
1
Down command / Stop S2
2
SA NC SD
TRX External Fault S3 FE
SA
CN3
MC MA Fault Reset S4 IP12 TB2
TRX
IP5 IP
Multi-step Speed 1 S5 IG
Fault relay IG
contact Multi-function SG
digtial inputs Multi-step Speed 2 S6
(default setting) a+
a- A pulse monitor signal
Multi-step Speed 3 S7 b+
b- B pulse monitor signal
Not Used S8 z+
Option card z- Z pulse monitor signal
connector CN5-C
SN
CN5-B MA Fault relay output <13> <14>
Sink / Source mode SC 250 Vac, max. 1 A
MB
selection wire jumper 30 Vdc, max 1 A
(default: Sink) <7> SP CN5-A MC (min. 5 Vdc, 10 mA)
+24 V
M1 Multi-function relay output (Brake Release Command)
250 Vac, max. 1 A
Shield ground terminal
M2 30 Vdc, max 1 A
(min. 5 Vdc, 10 mA)
<8>
M3 Multi-function relay output (Motor Contactor Close Command)
+V Power supply +10.5 Vdc, max. 20 mA 250 Vac, max. 1 A
2 kΩ M4 30 Vdc, max 1 A
A1 Analog Input 1 (Speed Bias) (min. 5 Vdc, 10 mA)
Multi-function -10 to +10 Vdc (20 kΩ)
analog inputs M5 Multi-function relay output (Drive Ready) <15>
A2 Analog Input 2 (Not used) 250 Vac, max. 1 A
M6 30 Vdc, max 1 A
-10 to +10 Vdc (20 kΩ)
(min. 5 Vdc, 10 mA)
AC
0V P1
−V Power supply, -10.5 Vdc, max. 20 mA Photo Coupler 1
<8> C1 (During Frequency Output) Digital output
Termination resistor 5 to 48 Vdc
(120 Ω, 1/2 W) P2 2 to 50 mA
Photo Coupler 2 (default setting)
DIP C2 (not used)
Switch S2
R+
R <9>
MEMOBUS/Modbus S+ FM
comm. RS485/422 Multi-function analog output 1
− + (Output Speed)
max. 115.2 kBps S FM -10 to +10 Vdc (2mA) <12>
IG
AM
Multi-function analog output 2
AC − + (Output Current)
AM
H1 -10 to +10 Vdc (2mA)
<10> 0V
H2
E (G)
Safe Disable inputs

shielded line
<11>
DM+
twisted-pair shielded line
HC EDM (Safety Electronic Device Monitor)
DM− control circuit terminal
main circuit terminal
Figure 6 Drive Standard Connection Diagram (example: CIMR-LU2A0033)
<1> Remove the jumper when installing a DC link choke. Models CIMR-LU2A0085 through 2A0415 and 4A0045 through 4A0260
come with a built-in DC link choke.
<2> Set L8-55 to 0 to disable the protection function of the built-in braking transistor of the drive when using an optional regenerative
converter or dynamic braking option.
<3> Set up a thermal relay sequence to disconnect drive main power in the event of an overheat condition on the dynamic braking
option.
<4> Self-cooling motors do not require the same wiring necessary for motors with separate cooling fans.
<5> Supplying power to the control circuit separately from the main circuit requires a 24 V power supply (option).

<6> For control modes that do not use a motor speed feedback signal, PG option card wiring is not necessary.
<7> This figure illustrates an example of a sequence input to S1 through S8 using a non-powered relay or an NPN transistor. Install the
wire link between terminals SC-SP for Sink mode, between SC-SN for Source mode, or leave the link out for external power
supply. Never short terminals SP and SN, as it will damage the drive.
<8> The maximum output current capacity for the +V and -V terminals on the control circuit is 20 mA. Never short terminals +V, -V,
and AC, as it can cause erroneous operation or damage the drive.
<9> Set DIP switch S2 to the ON position to enable the termination resistor in the last drive in a MEMOBUS/Modbus network.
<10> The sink/source setting for the Safe Disable input is the same as with the sequence input. Jumper S3 has the drive set for an
external power supply. When not using the Safe Disable input feature, remove the jumper shorting the input and connect an
external power supply. Refer to Sinking/Sourcing Mode Selection for Safe Disable Inputs on page 45 for instructions.
<11> Disconnect the wire jumper between H1 - HC and H2 - HC when utilizing the Safe Disable input.
<12> Monitor outputs work with devices such as analog frequency meters, ammeters, voltmeters, and wattmeters. They are not intended
for use as a feedback-type of signal.
<13> When the drive is set to trigger a fault output upon activation of the fault reset function (L5-02 = 1), a sequence to interrupt power
when a fault occurs will shut off the power to the drive when the drive attempts a reset. The default setting for L5-02 is 0 (fault
output not active during reset attempt).
<14> Wire fault contact outputs MA, MB, and MC. Wire so that a fault will open the safety circuit and interrupt drive output.
<15> When using the Programming Mode to edit parameter settings, L1000A will not accept an Up/Down command. If the drive still
will not run when an Up/Down command has been entered and no fault is present, then use the "Drive ready" signal (the default
setting for terminal M5-M6) to interlock components.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Ensure start/stop and safety circuits are wired properly and in the correct state before
energizing the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment.
NOTICE: When using the automatic fault reset function with wiring designed to shut off the power supply upon drive fault, make sure
the drive does not trigger a fault output during fault reset (L5-02 = 0, default). Failure to comply will prevent the automatic fault reset
function from working properly.

◆ Main Circuit Connection Diagram

Refer to the Figure 7 when wiring the main circuit of the drive. Connections may vary based on drive capacity. The DC
power supply for the main circuit also provides power to the control circuit.
NOTICE: Do not use the negative DC bus terminal “-” as a ground terminal. This terminal is at high DC voltage potential. Improper
wiring connections could damage the drive.
CIMR-LU2A0008 to 2A0075 CIMR-LU2A0085, 2A0115

CIMR-LU4A0005 to 4A0039 CIMR-LU4A0045, 4A0060
B1 B2 B1 B2
+1 +1
+2 Relay Relay
Current DC link Current
sensor choke sensor
R/L1 U/T1 R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 + +
V/T2 S/L2 V/T2
T/L3 W/T3 T/L3 W/T3
– –
YEA_co
mmon
Control Operator Control
Gate board board Gate board Operator
board
CIMR-LU2A0145 to 2A0180 CIMR-LU2A0215 to 2A0415

CIMR-LU4A0075 to 4A0112 CIMR-LU4A0150 to 4A0260
+3 +3
+1 +1
Relay Relay
DC link Current DC link Current
choke sensor choke sensor
R/L1 U/T1 R/L1 U/T1
+ +
S/L2 V/T2 S/L2 V/T2
T/L3 W/T3 T/L3 W/T3
–
YEA_co –
YEA_co
mmon mmon
Control 24 V Control
Gate board Operator Power Gate board Operator
board Supply board
Figure 7 Drive main circuit configurations

◆ Terminal Cover
Follow the procedure below to remove the terminal cover for wiring and to reattach the terminal cover after wiring is
complete.
■ Removing/Reattaching the Terminal Cover
Removing the Terminal Cover
Models CIMR- LU2A0008 to 2A0075 and 4A0005 to 4A0039
1. Loosen the terminal cover screw using a #2 Phillips screwdriver. Screw sizes vary by drive model.
Figure 10
YEA_common
Figure 8 Removing the Terminal Cover
2. Push in on the tab located on the bottom of the terminal cover and gently pull forward to remove the terminal
cover.
Figure 11
YEA_common

1. Loosen the screws on the terminal cover, then pull down on the cover.
CAUTION! Do not completely remove the cover screws, just loosen them. If the cover screws are removed completely, the terminal
cover may fall off causing an injury.
Note: The shape of the terminal covers and the numbers of screws differ depending on the drive models.
Figure 12
YEA_common

2. Pull forward on the terminal cover to free it from the drive.

Figure 13
YEA_common

Reattaching the Terminal Cover
Power lines and signal wiring should pass through the opening provided. Refer to Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal on
page 37 and Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal on page 41 for details on wiring.
Reattach the terminal cover after completing the wiring to the drive and other devices.
Figure 14
Connect ground wiring first,

followed by the main circuit,
and then wire the control circuit.
Power lines and signal wiring
YEA_common
exit through the opening provided.
Figure 12 Reattaching the Terminal Cover

After wiring the terminal board and other devices, double-check connections and reattach the terminal cover. Refer to
Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal on page 37 and Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal on page 41 for details on
wiring.
Figure 15
YEA_common
Connect ground wiring first,
followed by the main circuit,
and then wire the control circuit.
Figure 13 Reattaching the Terminal Cover

◆ Digital Operator and Front Cover

Detach the digital operator from the drive for remote operation or when opening the front cover to install an option card.
Note: Be sure to remove the digital operator prior to opening or reattaching the front cover. Leaving the digital operator plugged into the
drive when removing the front cover can result in erroneous operation caused by a poor connection. Firmly fasten the front cover
back into place before reattaching the digital operator.
■ Removing/Reattaching the Digital Operator

Removing the Digital Operator
While pressing on the tab located on the right side of the digital operator, pull the digital operator forward to remove it
from the drive.
Figure 16
YEA_common
Figure 14 Removing the Digital Operator

Reattaching the Digital Operator
Insert the digital operator into the opening in the top cover while aligning it with the notches on the left side of the
opening.
Next, press gently on the right side of the operator until it clicks into place.
Figure 17
YEA_common
Figure 15 Reattaching the Digital Operator
■ Removing/Reattaching the Front Cover

Removing the Front Cover

After removing the terminal cover and the digital operator, loosen the screw that affixes the front cover (model CIMR-
L2A0047, 4A0024, and 4A0031 does not use a screw to affix the front cover). Pinch inwards on the tabs found on each
side of the front cover, then pull forward to remove it from the drive.
Figure 18
YEA_common
Figure 16 Remove the Front Cover (Models CIMR-LU2A0008 to 2A0075 and 4A0005 to 4A0039)

Models CIMR-LU2A0085 to 2A0415 and 4A0045 to 4A0260

1. Remove the terminal cover and the digital operator.
2. Loosen the installation screw on the front cover.
3. Use a straight-edge screwdriver to loosen the hooks on each side of the cover that hold it in place.
Figure 19
Hook Hook
Front cover Free hooks on both

installation screw sides of the cover
4. Unhook the left side of the front cover then swing the left side towards you as shown in Figure 18 until the cover
comes off.
Figure 20
Reattaching the Front Cover
Reverse the instructions given in Remove the Front Cover (Models CIMR-LU2A0008 to 2A0075 and 4A0005 to
4A0039) on page 27 to reattach the front cover. Pinch inwards on the hooks found on each side of the front cover while
guiding it back into the drive. Make sure it clicks firmly into place.


1. Slide the front cover so the hooks on the top connect to the drive.
Figure 21
Figure 19 Reattach the Front Cover (CIMR-LU2A0085 to 2A0415 and 4A0045 to 4A0260)
2. After connecting the hooks to the drive, press firmly on the cover to lock it into place.
◆ Main Circuit Wiring

This section describes the functions, specifications, and procedures required to safely and properly wire the main circuit
in the drive.
NOTICE: Only connect recommended devices to the drives braking transistor terminals. Failure to comply could result in damage to
the drive or braking circuit. Carefully review instruction manual TOBP C720600 00 when connecting a braking option to the drive.
NOTICE: Do not use the negative DC bus terminal “-” as a ground terminal. This terminal is at high DC voltage potential.
Improper wiring connections could damage the drive.
NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. Comply with proper wiring practices. The motor may run in reverse if the phase order is backward,
causing incorrect elevator direction movement. Connect motor input terminals U, V and W to drive output terminals U/T1,V/T2, and W/
T3. The phase order for the drive and motor should match.
Note: Do not solder the ends of wire connections to the drive. Soldered wiring connections can loosen over time. Improper wiring
practices could result in drive malfunction due to loose terminal connections.
NOTICE: Do not switch the drive input to start or stop the motor. Frequently switching the drive on and off shortens the life of the DC
bus charge circuit and the DC bus capacitors, and can cause premature drive failures. For the full performance life, refrain from
switching the drive on and off more than once every 30 minutes.

■ Main Circuit Terminal Functions

Table 7 Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Terminal Type
200 V 2A0008 to 2A0075 2A0085, 2A0115 2A0145 to 2A0415
Class Model Function Page
CIMR-
400 V LU 4A0005 to 4A0039 4A0045, 4A0060 4A0075 to 4A0260
Class
R/L1
S/L2 Main circuit power supply input Connects line power to the drive 22
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2 Drive output Connects to the motor 22
W/T3
B1 Available for connecting a braking
Braking resistor Not available –
B2 resistor or a braking resistor unit option
+2 • DC reactor connection not available
+1 (+1, +2) (remove the For connection
shorting bar between • DC power supply • of the drive to a DC power supply
• DC power supply
+1 and +2) input (+1, –) (terminals +1 and – are not UL –
– input (+1, –)
• DC power supply • Braking unit approved)
input (+1, –) connection (+3, –) • of dynamic braking options
+3 not available
For 200 V class: 100 Ω or less
Grounding terminal 36
For 400 V class: 10 Ω or less
Note: Use terminal B1 and - when installing the braking unit (CDBR type) to the drives with built-in braking transistor (2A0008 to
2A0115, 4A0005 to 4A0060).
■ Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque

Use the tables in this section to select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals.
Gauges listed in the tables are for use in the United States.
Note: 1. Wire gauge recommendations based on drive continuous current ratings using 75°C 600 Vac vinyl-sheathed wire assuming ambient
temperature within 40°C and wiring distance less than 100 m (328 ft.).
2. Terminals B1, B2, +1, +2, and +3, are for connecting a DC link choke, braking resistor or DC power supply. Do not connect other
nonspecific devices to these terminals.
• Consider the amount of voltage drop when selecting wire gauges. Increase the wire gauge when the voltage drop is
greater than 2% of motor rated voltage. Ensure the wire gauge is suitable for the terminal block. Use the following
formula to calculate the amount of voltage drop:
Line drop voltage (V) = 3 × wire resistance (Ω/km) × wire length (m) × current (A) × 10-3
• Refer to instruction manual TOBP C720600 00 for braking transistor option or braking resistor option wire gauges.
• Use terminal +1 and the negative terminal when connecting a regenerative converter or a regen unit.
• Use terminal B1 and - when installing the braking unit to the drives with built-in braking transistor (2A0008 to 2A0115,
4A0005 to 4A0060).
• Refer to UL Standards Compliance on page 195 for information on UL compliance.
Magnetek recommends using closed-loop crimp terminals on all drive models. UL/cUL approval requires the use of
closed-loop crimp terminals when wiring the drive main circuit terminals on models CIMR-LU2A0085 to 2A0415 and
4A0045 to 4A0260. Use only the tools recommended by the terminal manufacturer for crimping. Refer to Closed-Loop
Crimp Terminal Recommendations on page 200 for closed-loop crimp terminal recommendations.
The wire gauges listed in the following tables are Magnetek recommendations. Refer to local codes for proper wire gauge
selections.

Three-Phase 200 V Class

Table 8 Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications (Three-Phase 200 V Class)
Model Recomm. Gauge Wire Range Screw Tightening Torque
CIMR-LU Terminal AWG, kcmil AWG, kcmil Nm (lb.in.)
Size
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
2A0008 1.2 to 1.5
–, +1, +2 – 14 to 10 M4
<1> (10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 12 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
2A0011 1.2 to 1.5
–, +1, +2 – 14 to 10 M4
<1> (10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 12 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 14 to 10
2A0014 1.2 to 1.5
–, +1, +2 – 14 to 10 M4
<1> (10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 18 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 18 to 10
1.2 to 1.5
2A0018 –, +1, +2 – 12 to 10 M4
(10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 12 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 8 12 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 12 to 6 1.2 to 1.5
M4
–, +1, +2 – 10 to 6 (10.6 to 13.3)
2A0025
B1, B2 – 12 to 10
2 to 2.5
8 10 to 8 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 12 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 12 to 6 1.2 to 1.5
M4
–, +1, +2 – 6 (10.6 to 13.3)
2A0033
B1, B2 – 12 to 10
2 to 2.5
8 10 to 8 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4 6 to 4
4 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4 6 to 4 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
–, +1, +2 – 6 to 4
2A0047 2 to 2.5
B1, B2 – 10 to 6 M5
(17.7 to 22.1) 3
4 to 6
6 8 to 6 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3 10 to 2
9 to11
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3 10 to 2 M8
(79.7 to 97.4)
–, +1, +2 – 4 to 3
2A0060 2 to 2.5
B1, B2 – 8 to 6 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
4 to 6
6 6 to 4 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)

Model Terminal Recomm. Gauge Wire Range Screw Tightening Torque

CIMR-LU AWG, kcmil AWG, kcmil Size Nm (lb.in.)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2 10 to 2
9 to11
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2 10 to 2 M8
(79.7 to 97.4)
–, +1, +2 – 3 to 2
2A0075 2 to 2.5
B1, B2 – 6 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
4 to 6
6 6 to 4 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 1/0 10 to 1/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1/0 10 to 1/0
2A0085 9 to 11
–, +1 – 2 to 1/0 M8
<1> (79.7 to 97.4)
B1, B2 – 6 to 1/0
6 6 to 4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2/0 10 to 3/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2/0 10 to 3/0 18 to 23
M10
2A0115 –, +1 – 1/0 to 3/0 (159 to 204)
<1> B1, B2 – 4 to 2/0
9 to 11
4 4 M8
(79.7 to 97.4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4/0 1/0 to 4/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4/0 1/0 to 4/0
2A0145 18 to 23
–, +1 – 1 to 4/0 M10
<1> (159 to 204)
+3 – 1/0 to 4/0
4 4 to 2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 1/0 × 2P 1/0 to 4/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1/0 × 2P 1/0 to 4/0
2A0180 18 to 23
–, +1 – 1 to 4/0 M10
<1> (159 to 204)
+3 – 1/0 to 4/0
4 4 to 1/0
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2/0 × 2P 3/0 to 300
32 to 40
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2/0 × 2P 3/0 to 300 M12
(283 to 354)
–, +1 – 3/0 to 300
2A0215
<1> 18 to 23
+3 – 2 to 300 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
3 3 to 300 M12
(283 to 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3/0 × 2P 3/0 to 300
32 to 40
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3/0 × 2P 3/0 to 300 M12
(283 to 354)
–, +1 – 3/0 to 300
2A0283
<1> 18 to 23
+3 – 3/0 to 300 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
2 2 to 300 M12
(283 to 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 250 × 2P 4/0 to 600
32 to 40
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4/0 × 2P 4/0 to 600 M12
(283 to 354)
–, +1 – 250 to 600
2A0346
18 to 23
<1> +3 – 3/0 to 600 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
1 1 to 350 M12
(283 to 354)


R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 350 × 2P 250 to 600
32 to 40
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 300 × 2P 300 to 600 M12
(283 to 354)
–, +1 – 300 to 600
2A0415
<1> 18 to 23
+3 – 3/0 to 600 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
1 1 to 350 M12
(283 to 354)
<1> After installing an EMC filter, take additional measures to comply with IEC61800-5-1. Refer to EMC Filter Installation on page 191 for
details.
Model Recomm. Gauge Wire Range Screw Tightening Torque
CIMR-LU Terminal AWG, kcmil AWG, kcmil Nm (lb.in.)
Size
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 14 to 10
4A0005 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
4A0006 1.2 to 1.5
–, +1, +2 – 14 to 10 M4
4A0007 (10.6 to 13.3)
<1>
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 12 18 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 18 to 10
1.2 to 1.5
4A0009 –, +1, +2 – 14 to 10 M4
(10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 12 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 12 to 6 1.2 to 1.5
M4
–, +1, +2 – 12 to 6 (10.6 to 13.3)
4A0015
B1, B2 – 12 to 10
2 to 2.5
10 14 to 10 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 12 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 12 to 6 1.2 to 1.5
M4
–, +1, +2 – 12 to 6 (10.6 to 13.3)
4A0018
B1, B2 – 12 to 10
2 to 2.5
10 12 to 10 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 8 10 to 6
3.6 to 4.0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 10 to 6 M5
(31.8 to 35.4)
–, +1, +2 – 10 to 6
4A0024 2.7 to 3.0
B1, B2 – 10 to 8 M5
(23.9 to 26.6)
3
4 to 6
8 10 to 8 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 10 to 6
3.6 to 4.0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 10 to 6 M5
(31.8 to 35.4)
–, +1, +2 – 6
4A0031 2.7 to 3.0
B1, B2 – 10 to 8 M5
(23.9 to 26.6)
4 to 6
6 10 to 6 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)


R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 6 to 4
4 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 6 to 4 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
–, +1, +2 – 6 to 4
4A0039 2 to 2.5
B1, B2 – 10 to 8 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
4 to 6
6 8 to 6 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4 10 to 1/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4 10 to 1/0
4A0045 9 to 11
–, +1 – 6 to 1 M8
<1> (79.7 to 97.4)
B1, B2 – 8 to 4
6 8 to 6
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3 10 to 3/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3 10 to 3/0
4A0060 9 to 11
–, +1 – 4 to 1 M8
<1> (79.7 to 97.4)
B1, B2 – 6 to 3
6 6
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2 6 to 250
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2 6 to 250
4A0075 9 to 11
–, +1 – 3 to 1/0 M8
<1> (79.7 to 97.4)
+3 – 6 to 1/0
4 6 to 4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 1/0 6 to 250
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1 6 to 250
4A0091 9 to 11
–, +1 – 3 to 1/0 M8
<1> (79.7 to 97.4)
+3 – 4 to 1/0
4 6 to 4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3/0 1/0 to 4/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2/0 1/0 to 4/0
4A0112 18 to 23
–, +1 – 1/0 to 4/0 M10
<1> (159 to 204)
+3 – 3 to 4/0
4 4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4/0 1/0 to 4/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4/0 1/0 to 4/0
4A0150 18 to 23
–, +1 – 1 to 4/0 M10
<1> (159 to 204)
+3 – 1/0 to 4/0
4 4 to 2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 1 × 2P 2 to 300
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1 × 2P 2 to 300
4A0180 18 to 23
–, +1 – 1 to 250 M10
<1> (159 to 204)
+3 – 3 to 3/0
4 4 to 300
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2/0 × 2P 1 to 600
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2/0 × 2P 1/0 to 600
4A0216 18 to 23
–, +1 – 3/0 to 600 M10
<1> (159 to 204)
+3 – 1 to 325
2 2 to 350


R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3/0 × 2P 2/0 to 600
32 to 40
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3/0 × 2P 2/0 to 600 M12
(283 to 354)
–, +1 – 3/0 to 600
4A0260
<1> 18 to 23
+3 – 1 to 325 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
2 2 to 350 M12
(283 to 354)
<1> After installing an EMC filter, take additional measures to comply with IEC61800-5-1. Refer to EMC Filter Installation on page 191 for
details.
■ Main Circuit Terminal and Motor Wiring

This section outlines the various steps, precautions, and checkpoints for wiring the main circuit terminals and motor
terminals.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment and lock out the power source. Failure to
comply may result in injury from electrical shock. Wait at least five minutes after all indicators are OFF and measure the DC bus voltage
level and main circuit terminals to confirm the circuit is safe before wiring.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Verify motor wiring bare wire ends do not contact the drive chassis or enclosure when wiring drive
terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3. Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death due to electrical shock.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting the motor
case. Always properly ground the motor-side grounding terminal.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque. Loose electrical connections could result in
death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electrical connections. Improperly tightened terminal screws can also cause
erroneous equipment operation.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Do not use an improper voltage source. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire. Verify
that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power.
WARNING! Do not connect the AC power line to the output motor terminals of the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or
serious injury by fire as a result of drive damage from line voltage application to output terminals.
NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. Comply with proper wiring practices. The motor may run in reverse if the phase order is backward,
causing incorrect elevator direction movement and injury to personnel. Connect motor input terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 to drive
output terminals U/T1,V/T2, and W/T3. The phase order for the drive and motor should match.
NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. Improper equipment sequencing could shorten useful life of the electrolytic capacitors and circuit relays
of the drive. Refrain from switching an input contactor more often than once every 30 minutes. Normally the drive I/O should be used to
stop and start the motor.
NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. Standard motors used with PWM drives may experience winding failures due to surge voltages, when
input line voltage is greater than 480 V or motor wire distance is greater than 100 meters. Select a motor design with insulation tolerant
of surge voltages and drive-rated motor for use with PWM drives. Failure to comply could lead to motor winding failure.
NOTICE: Do not use the negative DC bus terminal "-" as a ground terminal. This terminal is at high DC voltage potential. Improper
wiring connections could damage the drive.
NOTICE: Improper application of devices on drive output circuits can damage the drive. Do not connect unapproved LC or RC
interference suppression filters, capacitors, ground fault circuits, or overvoltage protection devices to the output of the drive. 3
NOTICE: Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits. Failure to comply could result in
damage to the drive, phase-advancing capacitors, LC/RC noise filters or ground fault circuit interrupters.
NOTICE: Properly integrate auxiliary contacts into the control logic circuit to avoid unnecessary fault displays caused by contactors or
output switches placed between drive and motor. Improper installation of input and output contactors could result in damage to the
drive.
NOTICE: Before applying power to the drive, use power-off resistance checks to check for short-circuits between (R/L1, S/L2, and
T/L3) or between main circuit terminals and ground. Failure to comply may result in damage to the drive.

Cable Length Between Drive and Motor

Voltage drop along the motor cable may cause reduced motor torque when the wiring between the drive and the motor is
too long, especially at low frequency output. This can also be a problem when motors are connected in parallel with a
fairly long motor cable. Drive output current will increase as the leakage current from the cable increases. An increase in
leakage current may trigger an overcurrent situation and weaken the accuracy of the current detection.
Adjust the drive carrier frequency according to Table 10. If the motor wiring distance exceeds 100 m (328 ft.) because of
the system configuration, reduce the ground currents. Refer to C6: Carrier Frequency on page 147.
Table 10 Cable Length Between Drive and Motor
Cable Length 50 m (164 ft.) or less 100 m (328 ft.) or less Greater than 100 m (328 ft.)
Carrier Frequency 15 kHz or less 5 kHz or less 2 kHz or less
Note: When setting carrier frequency for drives running multiple motors, calculate cable length as the total wiring distance to all
connected motors.
Ground Wiring
Follow the precautions to wire the ground for one drive or a series of drives.
WARNING! When using an EMC filter, the leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA. Therefore, according to IEC61800-5-1, at least one of the
conditions below must be satisfied:
a) The cross-section of the protective earthing conductor must be at least 10 mm2 (Cu) or 16 mm2 (Al).
b) The power supply must be disconnected automatically in case of discontinuity of the protective earthing conductor.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and
local installation regulations. Minimize the length of the ground wire. Improper equipment grounding may cause dangerous electrical
potentials on equipment chassis, which could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Be sure to ground the drive ground terminal (200 V class: Ground to 100 Ω or less, 400 V class:
Ground to 10 Ω or less). Improper equipment grounding may cause dangerous electrical potentials on equipment chassis, which could
result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE: Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or large-current electrical equipment. Improper
equipment grounding could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to electrical interference.
NOTICE: When using more than one drive, ground multiple drives according to instructions. Improper equipment grounding could
result in abnormal operation of drive or equipment.
Refer to Figure 20 when using multiple drives. Do not loop the ground wire.
Figure 22
OK OK Not OK
Figure 20 Multiple Drive Wiring

Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Shut off the power supply to the drive before wiring the main circuit terminals. Failure to comply
may result in death or serious injury.
Wire the main circuit terminals after the terminal board has been properly grounded.
Models CIMR-LU2A0008 through 2A0075 and 4A0005 through 4A0039 have a cover placed over the DC bus and
braking circuit terminals prior to shipment to help prevent miswiring. Use wire cutters to cut away covers as needed for
terminals.
Figure 23
A – Protecting Cover
Figure 21 Protecting Cover to Prevent Miswiring (CIMR-LU2A0047)
Main Circuit Connection Diagram
Refer to Main Circuit Connection Diagram on page 24 when wiring terminals on the main power circuit of the drive.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect braking resistors to any other
terminals. Improper wiring connections could cause the braking resistor to overheat and cause death or serious injury by fire. Failure to
comply may result in damage to the braking circuit or drive.
Refer to Standard Connection Diagram on page 21 when wiring the drive control circuit terminals.
■ Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions
Drive parameters determine which functions apply to the multi-function digital inputs (S3 to S8), multi-function digital
outputs (M1 to M6), multi-function photocoupler outputs (P1-C1, P2-C2), multi-function analog inputs (A1, A2), and
multi-function analog monitor output (FM, AM). The default setting is listed next to each terminal in Figure 6 on page
22.
NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. Improper equipment sequencing could shorten useful life of the electrolytic capacitors and circuit relays
of the drive. Refrain from switching an input contactor more often than once every 30 minutes. Normally the drive I/O should be used to
stop and start the motor.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Always check the operation and wiring of control circuits after being wired. Operating a drive
with untested control circuits could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Confirm the drive I/O signals and external sequence before starting test run. Failure to comply
may result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE: Frequently switching the drive power supply to stop and start the motor can damage the drive.
NOTICE: To get the full performance life out of the electrolytic capacitors and circuit relays, refrain from switching the drive power
supply off and on more than once every 30 minutes. Frequent use can damage the drive. Use the drive to stop and start the motor.
Note: Do not solder the ends of wire connections to the drive. Soldered wiring connections can loosen over time. Improper wiring
practices could result in drive malfunction due to loose terminal connections. 3

Input Terminals
Table 11 lists the input terminals on the drive. Text in parenthesis indicates the default setting for each multi-function
input.
Table 11 Control Circuit Input Terminals
Type No. Terminal Name (Function) Function (Signal Level) Default Setting Page
S1 Up Command (Closed: Up, Open: Stop)
S2 Down Command (Closed: Down, Open: Stop)
S3 Multi-function input 1 (External Fault)
S4 Multi-function input 2 (Fault Reset) Photocoupler
Multi-function input 3 24 Vdc, 8 mA
Digital Inputs S5 Use the wire link between terminals SC and SN or between SC 158
(Multi-Step Speed Reference 1)
and SP to select sinking or sourcing, and to select the power
Multi-function input 4
S6 supply.
Multi-function input 5
S7
S8 Multi-function input 6 (Not used)
SC Multi-function input common 24 Vdc, 150 mA (only when DI-A3 is not used)
Digital Input SN 0V Use the wire jumper between terminals SC and SN or between SC
44
Power Supply and SP to select sinking or sourcing, and to select the power
SP +24 Vdc supply.
H1 Safe Disable input 1 24 Vdc, 8 mA
One or both open: Drive output disabled
Both closed: Normal operation
Safe Disable Internal impedance: 3.3 kΩ
H2 Safe Disable input 2 Off time of at least 1 ms 204
Inputs <1>
Set the S3 jumper to select sinking or sourcing, and to select the
power supply.
HC Safe Disable function common Common for the Safe Disable function
+V Power supply for analog inputs 10.5 Vdc (max allowable current 20 mA) 201
-V Power supply for analog inputs -10.5 Vdc (max allowable current 20 mA) –
Multi-function analog input 1
A1 -10 to 10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc (input impedance: 20 kΩ) –
Analog Inputs (Speed reference bias)
A2 Multi-function analog input 2 (Not used) -10 to 10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc (input impedance: 20 kΩ) –
AC Analog input common 0V –
E (G) Ground for shielded lines and option cards – –
<1> Setting jumper S3 for an external power supply makes the wire jumper between terminals H1, H2, and HC ineffective. Remove the wire jumper
and connect an external power supply that can supply terminals H1, H2, and HC continuously.

Output Terminals
Table 12 lists the output terminals on the drive. Text in parenthesis indicates the default setting for each multi-function
output.
Note: Multi-function relay output terminals are rated at a minimum of 10 mA. If less than 10 mA is required, use the photocoupler
outputs (P1-C1, P2-C2). Using the wrong current output level may cause the output to malfunction when the terminal is activated.
Table 12 Control Circuit Output Terminals
Type No. Terminal Name (Function) Function (Signal Level) Default Setting
MA N.O.
30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A; 250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A
Fault Relay MB N.C. output
Minimum load: 5 Vdc, 10 mA
MC Fault output common
M1 Multi-function relay output 1
M2 (Brake release command) Contact relay output
Multi-Function
M3 Multi-function relay output 2 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A
Relay Output
M4 (Output contactor close command) 250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A
<1>
M5 Minimum load: 5 Vdc, 10 mA
Multi-function relay output 3 (Drive ready)
M6
P1
Multi-Function Photocoupler output 1 (During Frequency output)
C1
Photocoupler 48 Vdc, 2 to 50 mA <2>
Output P2
Photocoupler output 2 (Not Used/Through Mode)
C2
FM Analog monitor output 1 (Output speed)
-10 to +10 Vdc or 0 to +10 Vdc
Monitor Output AM Analog monitor output 2 (Output current)
AC Monitor common 0V
Safety Monitor DM+ Safety monitor output Outputs status of Safe Disable function. Closed when both Safe
Output DM- Safety monitor output common Disable channels are closed. Up to +48 Vdc 50 mA
<1> Refrain from assigning functions to terminals M1 thru M6 that involve frequent switching, as doing so may shorten relay performance life.
Switching life is estimated at 200,000 times (assumes 1 A, resistive load).
<2> Connect a suppression diode as shown in Figure 22 when driving a reactive load such as a relay coil. Make sure the diode rating is greater than
the circuit voltage.
Figure 24
C
A D
YEA_common
A – External power, 48 V max. C – Coil

B – Suppression diode D – 50 mA or less
Figure 22 Connecting a Suppression Diode
Serial Communication Terminals
3
Table 13 Control Circuit Terminals: Serial Communications
Type No. Signal Name Function (Signal Level)
R+ Communications input (+) RS-485/422
R- Communications input (-) MEMOBUS/Modbus communication: Use MEMOBUS/Modbus
MEMOBUS/Modbus
an RS-485 or RS-422 cable to connect the communication
Communication S+ Communications output (+) drive. protocol
<1>
S- Communications output (-) 115.2 kbps (max.)
IG Shield ground 0V
<1> Enable the termination resistor in the last drive in a MEMOBUS network by setting DIP switch S2 to the ON position.

■ Terminal Configuration
Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown in Figure 23.
Figure 25
YEA_common
E(G) HC H1 H2 DM+ DM- IG R+ R- S+ S-
M3 M4 M6
V+ AC V- A1 A2 FM AM AC P1 C1 P2 C2
M1 M2 M5
MA MB MC
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 SN SC SP
Figure 23 Control Circuit Terminal Arrangement

Wire Size and Torque Specifications
WARNING! Fire hazard. Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque. Loose electrical connections could result in
death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electrical connections. Improperly tightened terminal screws can also cause
erroneous equipment operation.
Select appropriate wire type and gauges from Table 14. For simpler and more reliable wiring, use crimp ferrules on the
wire ends. Refer to Table 15 for ferrule terminal types and sizes.
Table 14 Wire Gauges and Torque Specifications
Bare Wire Terminal Ferrule-Type Terminal
Tightening
Terminal Torque Applicable Recomm. Applicable Recomm.
Terminal Size Wire Size Wire Size
Block Nm mm2 mm2 Wire Type
(lb.in.) mm 2
(AWG) mm 2
(AWG)
(AWG) (AWG)
FM, AC, AM, P1,
P2, PC, SC, A1,
Standard wire:
A2, A3, +V, -V,
0.25 to 1.0
TB1, TB2, S1-S8, MA, MB,
0.22 to 0.25 (24 to 17) 0.75 0.25 to 0.5 0.5 Shielded wire,
TB4, TB5, MC, M1, M2, HC, M2
(1.9 to 2.2) Solid wire: (18) (24 to 20) (20) etc.
TB6 H1, H2, DM+,
0.25 to 1.5
DM-, IG, R+, R-,
(24 to 16)
S+, S-, RP, MP, E
(G)

Ferrule-Type Wire Terminals

Magnetek recommends using CRIMPFOX 6, a crimping tool manufactured by PHOENIX CONTACT, to prepare wire
ends with insulated sleeves before connecting to the drive. Refer to Table 15 for dimensions.
Figure 26
d1
6 mm
YEA_common
L
d2
Figure 24 Ferrule Dimensions

Table 15 Ferrule Terminal Types and Sizes
Size mm2 (AWG) Type L (mm) d1 (mm) d2 (mm) Manufacturer
0.25 (24) AI 0.25-6YE 10.5 0.8 2
0.34 (22) AI 0.34-6TQ 10.5 0.8 2 PHOENIX CONTACT
0.5 (20) AI 0.5-6WH 14 1.1 2.5
■ Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal

This section describes the proper procedures and preparations for wiring the control terminals.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Operating a drive with untested emergency circuits could result in death or serious injury.
Verify all drive fast stop circuit wiring and any additional emergency circuits before operating the drive.
WARNING! Fire hazard. Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque. Loose electrical connections could result in
death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electrical connections.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not remove covers or touch the circuit boards while the power is on. Failure to comply could
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment and lock out the power source. Failure to
comply may result in injury from electrical shock. Wait at least five minutes after all indicators are OFF and measure the DC bus voltage
level and main circuit terminals to confirm the circuit is safe before wiring.
WARNING! Sudden Movement and Hazard. Install additional emergency circuits separately from the drive fast stop circuits. Failure to
comply may result in personal injury.
NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. Do not connect control circuit ground terminals to the drive enclosure. Improper drive grounding can
cause control circuit malfunction.
NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. Insulate shields with heat shrink tubing or tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment.
Improper wiring practices could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to short circuit.
NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits. Improper wiring practices could result
in drive or equipment malfunction or nuisance trips.
NOTICE: Connect the shield of shielded cable to the appropriate ground terminal. Improper equipment grounding could result in drive
or equipment malfunction or nuisance trips.
NOTICE: Separate wiring for output terminals MA, MB, MC, M1 and M2 from wiring to other control circuit lines. Improper wiring 3
practices could result in drive or equipment malfunction or nuisance trips.
NOTICE: Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, -, +1, +2) and
other high-power lines. Improper wiring practices could result in drive malfunction due to electrical interference.
NOTICE: Use a class 2 power supply (UL standard) when connecting to the control terminals. Improper application of peripheral
devices could result in drive performance degradation due to improper power supply.
NOTICE: Do not exceed 50 meters (164 feet) for the control line between the drive and the operator when using an analog signal from
a remote source to supply the frequency reference. Failure to comply could result in poor system performance.
NOTICE: Do not use unshielded cable for control wiring. Failure to comply may cause electrical interference resulting in poor system
performance. Use shielded, twisted-pair wires, and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive.
NOTICE: Insulate shields with tape or shrink tubing to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment. Improper wiring practices
could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to short circuit.

Wire the control circuit only after terminals have been properly grounded and main circuit wiring is complete. Refer to
Figure 25 for details. Prepare the ends of the control circuit wiring as shown in Figure 26. Refer to Wire Size and Torque
Specifications on page 40.
WARNING! Do not tighten screws beyond the specified tightening torque. Failure to comply may result in erroneous operation, damage
the terminal block, or cause injury due to fire from overheating of loose electrical connections.
NOTICE: Use shielded twisted-pair cables as indicated to prevent operating faults. Improper wiring practices could result in drive or
equipment malfunction due to electrical interference.
Connect control wires as shown in Figure 25:

Figure 27
A
YEA_common
Preparing wire D
terminal ends
C
A – Loosen screw to insert wire C – Avoid fraying wire strands when stripping
insulation from wire. Strip length 5.5 mm.
B – Single wire or stranded wire D – Blade depth of 0.4 mm or less
Blade width of 2.5 mm or less
Figure 25 Terminal Board Wiring Guide
When connecting control wires to the terminals, use shielded twisted-pair wires (treating wire ends as shown in Figure 26
and connect the shield to the ground terminal (E [G]) of the drive.
Figure 28
E B
A C
A – Drive side D – Shield sheath (insulate with tape or heat-shrink tubing)

B – Insulation E – Shield
C – Control device side
Figure 26 Preparing the Ends of Shielded Cables
NOTICE: Do not exceed 50 meters (164 ft.) for the control line between the drive and the operator when using an analog signal from a
remote source to supply the frequency reference. Failure to comply could result in poor system performance.

■ Switches and Jumpers on the Terminal Board

The terminal board is equipped with several switches used to adapt the drive I/Os to the external control signals.
Figure 27 shows the location of these switches. Refer to Control I/O Configuration on page 44 for setting instructions.
Figure 29
YEA_c
ommon
Jumper S3
Terminal H1/H2
Sink/Source Sel.
DIP Switch S2
RS-422/485 Termination
Resistor
Off On
Figure 27 Locations of Jumpers and Switches on the Terminal Board

◆ Control I/O Configuration

■ Setting Sink/Source with Input Terminals SN and SP
Use the wire jumper between terminals SC and SP or SC and SN to select between Sink mode, Source mode or external
power supply for the digital inputs S1 to S8 as shown in Table 16 (Default: Sink mode, internal power supply).
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not short terminals SP and SN. Failure to comply will damage the drive.
Table 16 Digital Input Sink / Source / External Power Supply Selection

Drive Internal Power Supply
(Terminal SN and SP) External 24 Vdc Power Supply
S7 S7
S8 S8
Sinking Mode (NPN)

SN SN
SC SC
24 Vdc 24 Vdc
SP External SP
24 Vdc
S7 S7
S8 S8
Sourcing Mode (PNP)

SN SN
SC SC
24 Vdc 24 Vdc
External
SP SP
24 Vdc

■ Sinking/Sourcing Mode Selection for Safe Disable Inputs

Use jumper S3 on the terminal board to select between Sink mode, Source mode or external power supply for the Safe
Disable inputs H1 and H2 as shown in Table 17 (Default: Sink mode, internal power supply.)
Table 17 Safe Disable Input Sink / Source / External Power Supply Selection
Drive Internal Power Supply External 24 Vdc Power Supply
Jumper S3 Jumper S3
24 Vdc 24 Vdc
HC HC
External
24 Vdc
Sinking Mode
H1 H1
H2 H2
Jumper S3 Jumper S3
24 Vdc 24 Vdc
HC HC
External
24 Vdc
Sourcing Mode
H1 H1
H2 H2
◆ Connect to a PC
This drive is equipped with a USB port (type-B).
The drive can connect to a USB port on a PC using a USB 2.0, AB-type cable (sold separately). After connecting the
drive to a PC, Magnetek DriveWizard Plus software can be used to monitor drive performance and manage parameter
settings. Contact Magnetek for more information on DriveWizard Plus.
Download and install the USB driver before connecting L1000A to a PC with the USB cable.
To obtain the driver and software of USB Copy Unit, CopyUnitManager and DriveWizardPlus, visit
http://www.elevatordrives.com
Figure 30
USB Cable
(Type-AB) 3
(Type-B) (Type-A)
PC
YEA
Figure 28 Connecting to a PC (USB)

◆ Wiring Checklist
No. Item Page

Drive, peripherals, option cards
1 Check drive model number to ensure receipt of correct model. –
Make sure you have the correct braking resistors, DC link choke, noise filters, and other peripheral devices
2 –
installed.
3 Check the option card model number. –
Installation area and physical setup
4 Ensure that the area surrounding the drive complies with specifications. 17
Power supply voltage, output voltage
5 The voltage from the power supply should be within the input voltage specification range of the drive. –
15
6 The voltage rating for the motor should match the drive output specifications.
177
15
7 Verify that the drive is properly sized to run the motor.
177
Main circuit wiring
8 Confirm proper branch circuit protection as specified by national and local codes. 21
9 Properly wire the power supply to drive terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. 24
Properly wire the drive and motor together.
10 The motor lines and drive output terminals R/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 should match in order to produce the 35
desired phase order. If the phase order is incorrect, the drive will rotate in the opposite direction.
11 Use 600 Vac vinyl-sheathed wire for the power supply and motor lines. 30
Use the correct wire gauges for the main circuit. Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page 30. 30
• Consider the amount of voltage drop when selecting wire gauges. Increase the wire gauge when the voltage
drop is greater than 2% of motor rated voltage. Ensure the wire gauge is suitable for the terminal block. Use
30
12 the following formula to calculate the amount of voltage drop:
Line drop voltage (V) = 3 × wire resistance (Ω/km) × wire length (m) × current (A) × 10-3
• If the cable between the drive and motor exceeds 50 m (164 feet), adjust the carrier frequency set to C6-02
36
accordingly.
13 Properly ground the drive. Review page 36. 36
Tightly fasten all terminal screws (control circuit terminals, grounding terminals).
14 30
Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page 30.
Install a magnetic contactor when using a dynamic braking option. Properly install the resistor and ensure that
15 –
overload protection shuts off the power supply using the magnetic contactor.
Verify phase advancing capacitors, input noise filters, or ground fault circuit interrupters are NOT installed on
16 –
the output side of the drive.
Control circuit wiring
17 Use twisted-pair line for all drive control circuit wiring. 37
18 Connect the shields of shielded wiring to the ground terminal (E [G] ). 41
19 Properly wire any option cards. 40
Check for any other wiring mistakes.
20 –
Only use a multimeter to check wiring.
Properly fasten the control circuit terminal screws in the drive.
21 30
Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page 30.
22 Pick up all wire clippings. –
23 Ensure that no frayed wires on the terminal block are touching other terminals or connections. –
24 Properly separate control circuit wiring and main circuit wiring. –
25 Analog signal line wiring should not exceed 50 m (164 ft.). –
26 Safe Disable input wiring should not exceed 30 m (98 ft.). –

4 Start-Up Programming & Operation

◆ Using the Digital Operator
Use the digital operator to enter Run and Stop commands, edit parameters, and display data including fault and alarm
information.
■ Keys and Displays
Figure 31
DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 ALM 12
1
F1 F2
11 YEA_common
2 ESC
LO
RE
9
3 RESET ENTER
8
10 RUN STOP
4 5 6 7
Figure 29 Keys and Displays on the Digital Operator
No. Display Name Function
F1
Function Key The functions assigned to F1 and F2 vary depending on the currently displayed menu.
1
(F1, F2) The name of each function appears in the lower half of the display window.
F2
• Returns to the previous display.

2 ESC
ESC Key • Moves the cursor one space to the left.
• Pressing and holding this button will return to the Speed Reference display.
• Moves the cursor to the right.
3 RESET Key
RESET • Resets the drive to clear a fault situation.
Starts the drive in the LOCAL mode.
The Run LED
• is on, when the drive is operating the motor.
4 RUN RUN Key
• flashes during deceleration to stop or when the speed reference is 0.
Start-Up Programming
• flashes quickly, the drive is disabled by a DI, the drive was stopped using a fast stop
DI, or an Up/Down command was active during power up.
Scrolls up to display the next item, select parameter numbers, and increment setting
5 Up Arrow Key
& Operation
values.
Scrolls down to display the previous item, select parameter numbers, and decrements
6 Down Arrow Key
setting values.
7 STOP STOP Key <1> Stops drive operation.
• Enters parameter values and settings.

4
8 ENTER Key
ENTER • Selects a menu item to move between displays.
Switches drive control between the operator (LOCAL) and the control circuit
9 LO
RE
LO/RE Selection Key <2> terminals (REMOTE) for the Run command and speed reference. The LED is on
when the drive is in the LOCAL mode (operation from keypad).
10 RUN Light Lit while the drive is operating the motor. Refer to page 50 for details.
RUN
Lit while the operator is selected to run the drive (LOCAL mode). Refer to page 50
11 LO LO/RE Light
RE for details.

No. Display Name Function

12 ALM LED Light Refer to ALARM (ALM) LED Displays on page 50.
<1> The STOP key has highest priority. Pressing the STOP key will always cause the drive to stop the motor, even if an Up/Down command is
active at any external Up/Down command source. To disable the STOP key priority, set parameter o2-02 to 0.
<2> The LO/RE key can only switch between LOCAL and REMOTE when the drive is stopped. By default settings the LO/RE key function is
disabled. To allow using the LO/RE key for switching between LOCAL and REMOTE, set parameter o2-01 to 1.
■ LCD Display
Figure 32
1 2 3
- MODE - DRV Rdy

4 YEA_common
Speed Ref (OPR) 5
U1-01= 0.00%
U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ
6
U1-03= 0.00A LREF
FWD
9 8 7
Figure 30 LCD Display
Table 18 Display and Contents
No. Name Display Content
MODE Displayed when in Mode Selection.
MONITR Displayed when in Monitor Mode.
VERIFY Indicates the Verify Menu.
1 Operation Mode Menus
PRMSET Displayed when in Parameter Setting Mode.
A.TUNE Displayed during Auto-Tuning.
SETUP Displayed when in Setup Mode.
DRV Displayed when in Drive Mode.
2 Mode Display Area
PRG Displayed when in Programming Mode.
3 Ready Rdy Indicates the drive is ready to run.
4 Data Display – Displays specific data and operation data.
OPR Displayed when the speed reference source is assigned to the LCD Operator.
Speed Reference Source Displayed when the speed reference source is assigned to MEMOBUS/Modbus
5 COM
Assignment <1> Communication.
OP Displayed when the speed reference is assigned to an option card.
RSEQ Displayed when the Up/Down command is supplied from a remote source.
LO/RE LSEQ Displayed when the Up/Down command is supplied from the operator keypad.
6
Display <2> RREF Displayed when the speed reference is supplied from a remote source.
LREF Displayed when the speed reference is supplied from the operator keypad.
HELP Pressing F1 displays the Help menu.
← Pressing scrolls the cursor to the left.

Function Key 1 F1
7
(F1)
HOME Pressing F1 returns to the top menu (Speed Reference).
ESC Pressing F1 returns to the previous display.

FWD During Up command
8 FWD/REV
REV During Down command

No. Name Display Content
FWD/REV Pressing F1 switches between Up and Down when the Up/Down command is set from
the digital operator.
Function Key 2 DATA Pressing scrolls to the next display.
9 F1
(F2)
→ Pressing F1 scrolls the cursor to the right.
RESET Pressing F1 resets the existing drive fault or error.

<1> Displayed when in Drive Mode.
<2> Displayed when in Drive Mode and Monitor Mode.
■ Powering Up the Drive and Operation Status Display

Powering Up the Drive
Perform the following power-off checks before applying main power to the drive.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not contact live electrical parts. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Never
touch the output terminals directly with your hands or allow the output lines to come into contact with the drive case.
Always check the operation of drive fast stop circuits and any additional emergency circuits after they are wired. Fast stop circuits are
required to provide safe and quick shutdown of the drive.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Ensure start/stop and safety circuits are wired properly and in the correct state before
energizing the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment.
Power-off Checks Description

Ensure the power supply voltage is correct on the supply side of the disconnect, before applying power to the
drive.
200 V class: 3-phase 200 to 240 Vac 50/60 Hz
Power supply voltage 400 V class: 3-phase 380 to 480 Vac 50/60 Hz
Properly wire the power supply input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). Check for correct wiring, terminals are
tightened, and there are no loose wire strands.
Check for proper grounding of drive and motor.
Drive output terminals and Properly wire drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 with motor terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
motor terminals Check for correct wiring, terminals are tightened, and there are no loose wire strands.
Check control circuit terminal connections. Check that control circuit terminals are correctly wired, terminals
Control circuit terminals
are tightened, and there are no loose wire strands.
Drive control terminal status Open all control circuits to the drive I/O terminal block.
Status Display
When the power supply to the drive is turned on, the digital operator lights will appear as follows:
& Operation
No. Name Description

DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180
ALM
Normal - MODE - DRV Rdy

Speed Ref (OPR)
YEA_ The data display area in the upper half of the display, displays the speed reference.
Operation U1-01= 0.00%
common DRV is displayed.
U1-02= 0.00%
U1-03= 0.00A
FWD
RSEQ
LREF
4
ALM
- MODE - DRV YEA_ Data displayed varies by the type of fault. Refer to Fault Displays, Causes, and
Fault EF3
Ext Fault S3 common Possible Solutions on page 110 for more information and possible solutions. ALM
FWD RESET LED is lit and DRV displayed.
External fault (example)

■ ALARM (ALM) LED Displays

Table 19 ALARM (ALM) LED Status and Contents
State Content Display
Illuminated When the drive detects an alarm or error.
• When an alarm occurs.

Flashing • When oPE is detected.
• When a fault or error occurs during Auto-Tuning.
Off Normal operation (no fault or alarm).
■ LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications

Table 20 LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications
LED Lit Flashing Flashing Quickly Off
When source of the Up/
Up/Down command to be given
Down command is assigned
– – from a device other than the digital
to the digital operator
operator (REMOTE).
(LOCAL).
• While the drive is set for
LOCAL, an Up/Down
command was entered to the
input terminals after which
the drive was then switched
to REMOTE.
• An Up/Down command was
entered via the input
• During deceleration to stop.
terminals while not in the
• When an Up/Down command
During run Drive Mode. During stop
is input and speed reference is
• During deceleration when a
0%.
Fast Stop command was
entered.
• The drive output is shut off
by the Safe Disable
function.
• While the drive was running
in the REMOTE mode, the
STOP key was pushed.
Examples

■ Menu Structure for Digital Operator

Figure 33
- MODE - DRV Rdy -MONITR- DRV Rdy

Speed Ref (OPR) Speed Ref 1
U1-01= 0.00%
U1-01= 000.00%
Drive Mode <1>
U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ 㧔0.00㨪50.00㧕

U1-03= 0.00A LREF ̌0.00%̍
FWD
← FWD
→ <3>
- MODE - DRV Rdy -MONITR- DRV Rdy -MONITR- DRV Rdy

Monitor Menu Monitor Speed Reference
U1-01= 0.00% U1 -01= 0.00% U1- 01 = 0.00%
U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ
U1-03= 0.00A LREF U1-03= 0.00A LREF U1-03= 0.00A LREF
FWD FWD FWD
- MODE - PRG -MONITR- DRV Rdy -MONITR- DRV Rdy

Fault Trace Output Speed
Modified Consts
U2 -01= oC U1- 02 = 0.00%
Modified
U2-02= oPr RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A RSEQ
X Parameters U2-03= 0.00Hz LREF U1-04= 0 LREF
HELP FWD DATA <4> FWD FWD
- MODE - PRG
Programming Mode <2>
Quick Setting
Initial Display <5>
L1000A
HELP FWD DATA XXXVX.X/X.XkW
L1000A XX.XX/XX.XXA
YASKAWA <XXXXXXXXX>
<6>
- MODE - PRG
Programming
HELP FWD DATA
- MODE - PRG Rdy

Auto-Tuning
AUTO
HELP FWD DATA
YEA_common
Figure 31 Digital Operator Menu and Screen Structure

<1> Pressing RUN will start the motor.

<2> Drive cannot operate the motor.
<3> Flashing characters are shown as 0 .
& Operation
<4> An "X" character is used as a placeholder for illustration purposes in this manual. The LCD Operator will
display the actual setting values.
<5> The Speed Reference appears after the initial display which shows the product name.
<6> The information that appears on the display will vary depending on the drive. 4

◆ The Drive and Programming Modes

The drive has a Drive Mode to operate the motor and a Programming Mode to edit parameter settings.
Drive Mode: In Drive Mode the user can operate the motor and observe U Monitor parameters. Parameter settings cannot
be edited or changed when in Drive Mode.
Programming Mode: In Programming Mode the user can edit and verify parameter settings and perform Auto-Tuning.
The drive will not accept an Up/down command when the digital operator is in the Programming Mode unless parameter
b1-08 is set to 1 to allow an Up/down command.
■ Changing Parameter Settings or Values
This example explains changing C1-02 (Deceleration Ramp 1) from 1.50 seconds (default) to 2.50 seconds.
Step Display/Result
- MODE - DRV Rdy
Speed Ref (OPR)
U1-01= 0.00%
1. Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears. U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ
U1-03= 0.00A LREF
FWD
- MODE - PRG
Programming
2. Press or until the Parameter Setting Mode screen appears.
HELP FWD DATA
-PRMSET- PRG
Initialization
3. A1-00=0
Press to enter the parameter menu tree. Select Language
← FWD
→
-PRMSET- PRG
Basic Setup
4. Press or to select the C parameter group.

C1-01 = 1.50 sec
Accel Ramp 1
φ FWD
ψ
-PRMSET- PRG -PRMSET- PRG
Accel/Decel Accel Ramp 1
5. C1-01= 1.50 sec C1-01= 1.50 sec

Press two times. Accel Ramp 1
(0.0~600.00)
“1.50 sec”
φ FWD
ψ φ FWD
ψ
-PRMSET- PRG
Decel Ramp 1
6. Press or to select the parameter C1-02.

C1-02= 1.50 sec
(0.0~600.00)
“1.50 sec”
← FWD
→
-PRMSET- PRG
Decel Ramp 1
7. C1-02= 001.50 sec
Press to view the current setting value (1.5 s). The left most digit flashes. (0.0~600.00)
“1.50 sec”
φ FWD
ψ
-PRMSET- PRG
Decel Ramp 1
8. Press F1 , F2 or until the desired number is selected. “1” flashes. C1-02=001.50 sec
(0.0~600.00)
left right “1.50 sec”
φ FWD
ψ
-PRMSET- PRG
Decel Ramp 1
9. Press and enter 0020.0.

C1-02=002.50 sec
(0.0~600.00)
“1.50 sec”
φ FWD
ψ

Step Display/Result
10.
Press to confirm the change. Entry Accepted
-PRMSET- PRG
Decel Ramp 1
11. The display automatically returns to the screen shown in Step 4. C1-02= 2.50 sec
(0.0~600.00)
“1.50 sec”
φ FWD
ψ
- MODE - DRV Rdy
Speed Ref (OPR)
U1-01= 0.00%
12. Press as many times as necessary to return to the initial display. U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ
U1-03= 0.00A LREF
FWD
■ Simplified Setup Using the Setup Group

In the Setup Group, the drive lists the basic parameters needed to set up the drive for an elevator application. This group
expedites the startup process for an elevator application by showing only the most important parameters for the
application.
Using the Setup Group
Figure 32 illustrates how to enter and how to change parameters in the Setup Group.
The first display shown when entering the Setup Group is the Control Method menu. Skipping this display will keep the
current Setup Group parameter selection. The default setting for the Setup Group is a group of parameters most
commonly use in control methods.
In this example, the Setup Group is accessed to change b1-01 from 0 to 1. This changes the source of the speed reference
from the digital operator to the control circuit terminals.
- MODE - DRV Rdy - MODE - PRG
YEA_common
Speed Ref (OPR)
Quick Setting
U1-01= 0.00%
U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ
U1-03= 0.00A LREF
FWD HELP FWD DATA
Speed reference
appears when - SETUP - PRG Rdy
powered up <1> Control Method
A1-02= 2 ∗2∗
Open Loop Vector
Home FWD DATA - SETUP - PRG Rdy

Speed Ref Sel
b1-01= 0 ∗0∗
Operator
“1”
- SETUP - PRG Rdy
Speed Ref Sel
← FWD
→
Control Circuit
b1-01= 0 ∗0∗ Terminal
Operator <2>
- SETUP - PRG Rdy
& Operation
Home FWD DATA

Speed Ref Sel
b1-01= 0 ∗0∗
Entry Accepted Analog Input
“1”
- SETUP - PRG Rdy ← FWD
→
Up/Dn Command Sel Operator
b1-02= 1 ∗1∗ <2>
4
Digital Inputs
Home FWD DATA
- SETUP - PRG Rdy

StallP Accel Sel
L3-01= 1 ∗1∗
General Purpose
Home FWD DATA
<1> Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the Setup Group. Press the ENTER key to view or change parameter settings.
<2> To return to the previous menu without saving changes, press the ESC key.
Figure 32 Setup Group Example

■ Switching Between LOCAL and REMOTE

LOCAL mode is when the drive is set to accept the Up/Down command from the digital operator keypad. REMOTE
mode is when the drive is set to accept the Up/Down command from an external device (via the input terminals or serial
communications, etc.).
Switch the operation between LOCAL and REMOTE using the LO/RE key on the digital operator or via a digital input.
This key is disabled with default settings, but can be enabled by setting parameter o2-01 to 1.
Note: 1. After selecting LOCAL, the LO/RE light will remain lit.
2. The drive will not allow the user to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE during run.
Using the LO/RE Key on the Digital Operator
Step Display/Result
- MODE - DRV Rdy
Speed Ref(A1/A2)
U1-01= 0.00%
1. Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears.
YEA_c U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ
U1-03= 0.00A RREF
ommon FWD
- MODE - DRV Rdy

Speed Ref (OPR)
U1-01= 0.00%
U1-02= 0.00% LSEQ
U1-03= 0.00A LREF
YEA_ FWD
Press . The LO/RE light will light up. The drive is now in LOCAL. F1 F2
2. com- ESC
LO
RE
mon RESET ENTER
To set the drive for REMOTE operation, press again.

RUN STOP
◆ Start-Up Flowcharts
This section covers basic setup for the drive, including Auto-Tuning procedures and corresponding flowcharts. Follow the
flowchart that matches the motor used in your application. Refer to Types of Auto-Tuning on page 61 for details on the
types of Auto-Tuning.
Flowchart Purpose Page

A Installation, wiring, and basic steps required to setup the motor and elevator for operation. 55
B Auto-Tuning for induction motors. 58
C Auto-Tuning for PM motors. 59
D Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning 60

■ Flowchart A: Installation, Wiring, Basic Setup for Motor and Elevator

The flowchart below covers the basic procedure required to install the drive, motor, and elevator.
Figure 34
START
Install the drive as explained in

Mechanical Installation on page 17.
Wire the drive as explained in

Main Circuit Wiring on page 29.
Check the PG encoder power supply selection.

(Closed Loop Vector Control only -CLV)
Apply main power to the drive.

Adhere to safety messages concerning application of power.
Check the motor rotation direction.
Select the control mode in parameter A1-02.
Set up the PG encoder feedback in F1- parameters when using a

Closed Loop Vector Control and check the PG encoder rotation direction.
Set the Unit Length in parameter o1-12.

Set up o1-20 to o1-22 and then select the display units for speed,
acceleration and deceleration ramp and jerk settings in o1-03.
Perform Auto-Tuning for motor parameters and the PG encoder offset.

For control modes below, refer to Flowchart B: Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors on page 58.
• V/f Control
• Open Loop Vector Control
• Closed Loop Vector Control
For Closed Loop Vector for PM, refer to Flowchart C: Auto-Tuning for PM Motors on page 59.
Digital operator (b1-01 = 0)

(Speed selection by digital inputs)
Determine the
source of the speed
reference.
Set the Speed Reference Selection mode
Analog Input parameter d1-18.
Assign functions to the analog/digital I/O terminals using

parameters H1-, H2-, H3-, and H.4-. Assign functions to the digital I/O terminals using
parameters H1- and H2-.
Set up: Set up:

• Acceleration/deceleration ramp (C1-) • Preset speed references (d1-)
& Operation
• Jerk settings (C2-) • Acceleration/deceleration ramp (C1-)

• Jerk settings (C2-)
Set up the Inspection Operation sequence.

4
Perform a test run.
Fine-tuning
• Adjust settings for the brake sequence (S1-) .
• Adjust speed control loop (C5-) etc.
FINISH
Figure 33 Installation, Wiring, Basic Setup for Motor and Elevator

Note: Set parameter H5-11 to 1 when setting parameters using MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.

■ Power On
Take the following precautions before applying main power to the drive:
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Ensure start/stop, I/O and safety circuits are wired properly and in the correct state before
energizing or running the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Do not use an improper voltage source. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire. Verify
that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electrical
connections. Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Do not connect the AC power line to the output motor terminals of the drive. Failure to comply could result in
death or serious injury by fire as a result of drive damage from line voltage application to output terminals.
• Do not connect AC line power to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
• Make sure that the power supply lines are connected to main circuit input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3
(or R/L1 and S/L2 for single-phase power).
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Clear personnel, secure equipment and check sequence and safety circuitry before starting
the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment.
• Clear all personnel from the drive, motor, and machine area.
• Secure covers, couplings, shaft keys, and machine loads.
• Ensure start/stop and safety circuits are wired properly and in the correct state.
Always check the operation of drive fast stop circuits and any additional emergency circuits after they are wired. Fast stop circuits are
required to provide safe and quick shutdown of the drive.
NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. Comply with proper wiring practices. The motor may run in reverse if the phase order is backward.
Connect motor input terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 to drive output terminals U/T1,V/T2, and W/T3. The phase order for the drive and
motor should match.
NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. Check all the wiring including the PG encoder wiring and PG option jumper settings, to ensure that all
connections are correct after installing the drive and connecting any other devices. Failure to comply could result in damage to the
drive.
After applying the power, the drive mode display should appear and no fault or alarm should be displayed. In the event of
a drive fault or error code, refer to Troubleshooting on page 110.
■ Control Mode Selection
Select one of the four motor control modes after applying power to the drive. Note that Closed Loop Vector modes require
PG encoder feedback cards. The table below indicates possible control modes depending on the motor type and shows the
required encoder feedback card.
Machine Type Control Mode A1-02 setting Encoder Option Card

V/f Control 0 No card required
Induction motor without encoder
Open Loop Vector Control 2 No card required
Induction motor with incremental encoder Closed Loop Vector Control 3 PG-B3 / PG-X3
Permanent magnet motor with EnDat 2.1/01,
Closed Loop Vector Control for PM motors 7 PG-F3
EnDat 2.2/01, or EnDat 2.2/22 encoder
Permanent magnet motor with ERN1387 or
Closed Loop Vector Control for PM motors 7 PG-E3
ERN487 encoder
Magnetek IPM motor with incremental encoder Closed Loop Vector Control for PM motors 7 PG-X3

■ Motor Rotation Direction Setup

Check the direction of motor rotation to verify the Up command causes the elevator to move in the upward direction.
Perform the following checks to confirm proper motor and load direction:
• The drive outputs motor voltage in U/T1-V/T2-W/T3 phase sequence when an Up command is issued. Check the motor
rotation with this phase sequence (for most motors clockwise is seen from the shaft side).
• If the motor drives the elevator in up direction with a U/T1-V/T2-W/T3 sequence, make sure parameter b1-14 is set to
0.
• If the motor drives the elevator in down direction with a U/T1-V/T2-W/T3 sequence, make sure parameter b1-14 is set
to 1. Motor direction may also be changed by reversing two motor leads connected to U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 on the drive
terminal block.
DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Failure to comply will result in death or
serious injury. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power
supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait
at least five minutes after all indicators are OFF and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level.
Note: Always perform motor rotation direction setup prior to setting the encoder rotation direction.
■ PG Encoder Setup
PG Encoder Resolution Setup
Set the encoder resolution (incremental signal in the case of absolute encoders with Sin/Cos channels) in parameter F1-
01.
PG Encoder Rotation Direction Setup
Perform the following steps to make sure the PG encoder rotation direction is set up correctly in the drive:
If information about the signal sequence of the PG encoder is available:
1. Check the sequence of PG encoder phases A and B when the motor drives the elevator in up direction.
2. If the PG encoder A phase leads phase B, make sure F1-05 is set to 0.
3. If the PG encoder B phase leads phase A, make sure F1-05 is set to 1.
If no information about the signal sequence of the PG encoder is available:
1. Turn the motor manually in elevator up direction while checking the value of monitor U1-05.
2. If the value in U1-05 is positive, the set PG encoder direction is correct.
3. If the value in U1-05 is negative, alter the setting of parameter F1-05.
Note: Always set the motor rotation direction prior to the encoder rotation direction. Refer to Motor Rotation Direction Setup on
page 57.
& Operation

■ Flowchart B: Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors

The flowchart below covers Auto-Tuning for induction motors operating with V/f Control, Open Loop Vector Control, or
Closed Loop Vector Control.
START
YEA_common
Set terminals H1 and H2 if the Safe Disable function is used.

Set the Baseblock input (H1-=8/9) if used.
No
Yes
A1-02=2 or 3
(Ropes removed)
Is the Control Mode Can the motor
V/f Control ? rotate freely?
Yes
A1-02=0 No
Select Stationary Auto-Tuning Select Stationary Select Rotational

for Terminal Resistance only, Auto-Tuning 1 or 2 Auto-Tuning
T1-01 = 2. T1-01 = 1 or 4. T1-01 = 0.
Refer to Enter the data in to T1- parameters as indicated on the Enter the data in to T1- parameters as
Auto-Tuning Fault Detection display. indicated on the display.
on page 117. Press the Up key until “Tuning Ready” is displayed. <1> Press the Up key until “Tuning Ready” is
Remove the source of Fault/Alarm displayed. <1>
and repeat Auto Tuning.
Release the Brake.
Close the motor contactor(s).
Press the Run key on the digital operator

and wait until Auto-Tuning is finished.
Tuning
No Successful?
(Alarm or Fault code
displayed Yes
(“Entry Accepted”
displayed) <2>
Apply the brake if it was released during Auto-tuning.

Open the motor contactor(s).
Open terminals H1-HC and H2-HC if used during the normal sequence.
Open the Baseblock input (H1-=8/9) if used.
FINISH
<1> If an LED operator is used, the display shows “ ”.

Figure 34 Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors

■ Flowchart C: Auto-Tuning for PM Motors

The flowchart below covers Auto-Tuning for permanent magnetic (PM) motors operating with Closed Loop Vector
Control for PM motors.
START
YEA_common
Set terminals H1-HC and H2-HC if Safe Disable function is used.
No
Is the motor data
sheet available?
Yes
Select Motor Data Input Select Stationary Auto-Tuning

Refer to
T2-01 = 0. T2-01 = 1.
Auto-Tuning Fault Detection
Enter the data in to T2- parameters as Enter the data in to T2- parameters as on page 117.
indicated on the display. indicated on the display. Remove the Fault/Alarm source and
Press the Up key until “Tuning Ready” is Press the Up key until “Tuning Ready” is repeat Auto Tuning.
displayed. <1> displayed. <1>
Close the motor contactor.

No
(Alarm or Fault code
Tuning displayed
Successful?
Yes
(“Entry Accepted”
displayed<2>
Continue with encoder offset tuning.

Refer to Flowchart D: PG Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning on page 60.
Can the motor No

rotate freely?
& Operation
Yes (Ropes removed)
・Select Rotational Back EMF Constant Auto-Tuning T2-01=11.

・Press the Up key.

and wait until Auto-Tuning is finished. 4
FINISH

Figure 35 Auto-Tuning for PM Motors

■ Flowchart D: PG Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning

The flowchart below covers Rotational and Stationary Auto-Tuning procedures used to automatically set up the PG
encoder offset. PG encoder Offset Tuning should be performed when the PG encoder offset (T2-17) is unknown, when a
PG encoder offset value has been set but problems with the speed feedback occur, or when the PG encoder is replaced.
START
Set the motor and PG encoder data manually or
Has all motor and PG

No perform motor data Auto-tuning.
YEA_comm
encoder data been on
set correctly?
Yes
Set terminals H1-HC and H2-HC if Safe Disable function is used.

Close the motor contactor(s).
Select Initial Magnet Pole Search Parameter Auto-Tuning T2-01 = 3.

Press the Up key until “Tuning Ready” is displayed. <1>
Press the Run key on the digital operator and wait until Absolute PG encoder
Auto-Tuning is finished. necessary for driving the motor.
No - “Er-22” <2> Change the PG option card and

Rotational PG Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning necessary use an absolute PG Encoder
Tuning (EnDat, ...).
Successful?
Yes
(Stationary PG Encoder Offset Absolute PG No
Auto-Tuning possible)
encoder used? (PG-X3, Incremental
Yes PG encoder used)
(EnDat, ...)
Uncouple motor and the mechanical system

of the elevator (remove ropes).
Select Stationary Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning Select Rotational PG Encoder Offset

T2-01 = 4. Auto-Tuning T2-01 = 10.
Press the Up key until “Tuning Ready” is Press the Up key until “Tuning Ready” is
displayed. <1> displayed. <1>
Release the brake.
Refer to
No Auto-Tuning Fault Detection
Tuning Press the Run key on the digital operator
Successful? on page 117. and wait until Auto-Tuning is finished.
Remove the Fault/Alarm source
and repeat Auto Tuning.
Yes
Apply the brake.
No Refer to
Tuning Auto-Tuning Fault Detection
Successful? on page 117.
Remove the Fault/Alarm source
Yes and repeat Auto Tuning.

Recouple the motor (ropes) to the load if decoupled for tuning.
FINISH

Figure 36 PG Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning

■ Types of Auto-Tuning
The drive offers different types of Auto-Tuning for induction motors and permanent magnet motors. The type of Auto-
Tuning used differs further based on the control mode and other operating conditions. Refer to the tables below to select
the type of Auto-Tuning that bests suits the application. Directions for performing Auto-Tuning are listed in Start-Up
Flowcharts on page 54.
Note: The drive will only show Auto-Tuning parameters that are valid for the control mode that has been set in A1-02. If the control
mode is for an induction motor, the Auto-Tuning parameters for PM motors will not be available. If the control mode is for a PM
motor, the Auto-Tuning parameters for induction motors will not be available. Inertia Tuning and ASR Gain Tuning parameters
and setting options will be visible only when the drive is set for operation with CLV or CLV/PM.
Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors
Table 21 Types of Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors
Control Mode (A1-02)
Type Setting Requirements and Benefits
V/f (0) OLV (2) CLV (3)
• Rotational Auto-Tuning gives the most accurate results, and is recommended if
Rotational Auto-
T1-01 = 0
possible. No Yes Yes
Tuning
• Motor must run freely or with light load (<30%), i.e. ropes have to be removed.
• A motor test report listing motor data is not available.
Stationary Auto- • Automatically calculates motor parameters needed for vector control.
T1-01 = 1 No Yes Yes
Tuning 1 • Use if ropes can not be removed. Note that the accuracy is less then with
Rotational Auto-Tuning.
• Used for V/f Control or in vector control modes when the drive was previously
Stationary Auto- set up properly and now the motor cable has changed.
Tuning for Line-to- T1-01 = 2 • Used in V/f control if drive and motor capacities differ. Yes Yes Yes
Line Resistance • Should not be used for any vector control modes unless the motor cable has
changed.
• A motor test report is available. Once the no-load current and the rated slip have
Stationary Auto- been entered, the drive calculates and sets all other motor-related parameters.
T1-01 = 4 No Yes Yes
Tuning 2 • Use if ropes can not be removed and if slip and no-load current data are
available.
Auto-Tuning for Permanent Magnet Motors

Automatically sets the V/f pattern and motor parameters E1-, E5-, and some F1- parameters for speed
feedback detection.
Table 22 Types of Auto-Tuning for Permanent Magnet Motors
• Use if a motor test report is available
• Input motor data from the motor test report. Convert data into the correct unit before inputting data if
Motor Data Input T2-01 = 0
necessary.
• Motor does not rotate during Auto-Tuning
& Operation
• Use if a motor test report is not available

Stationary Auto-Tuning T2-01 = 1 • Input motor data from the motor name plate. Make sure to convert data into the correct units. The
drive automatically calculates the motor data.
Stationary Stator • Tunes stator resistance only.
T2-01 = 2
Resistance Auto-Tuning • Should be performed if the motor cabling has changed.
4
• Use if a motor test is not available
Rotational Back EMF • Tunes the Motor Induction Voltage only
T2-01 = 11
Constant Auto-Tuning • Should be performed after Motor data are set and the encoder offset is adjusted.
• The motor must be uncoupled from the mechanical system (remove ropes).

Table 23 Auto-Tuning Input Data

Tuning Type (T2-01)
3 4 10
0 2 Initial Encoder Encoder
Input Value Input Unit Magnet 11
Parameter Motor 1 Stationary Offset Offset
Parameter Stationary Stator Pole Search Stationary Rotational Back EMF
Settings Resistance Parameters Auto- Auto- Constant
Auto- Tuning Tuning
Tuning
Control Mode A1-02 – 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Motor Rated Power T2-04 kW Yes Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Motor Rated Voltage T2-05 V Yes Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Motor Rated Current T2-06 A Yes Yes Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A
Number of Motor Poles T2-08 N/A Yes Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Motor Rated Speed T2-09 min-1 Yes Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Stator 1 Phase Resistance T2-10 Ω Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
d-Axis Inductance T2-11 mH Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
q-Axis Inductance T2-12 mH Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Induced Voltage Constant
T2-13 N/A Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Unit Selection
Voltage Constant T2-14 <1> Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
PG Number of Pulses per
T2-16 N/A Yes Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Revolution
deg
Z Pulse Offset T2-17 Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
(mech.)
<1> Depends on T2-13 setting.
Properly set the motor and PG encoder data before performing PG Encoder Offset Tuning.
Table 24 Types of Auto-Tuning for PG Encoder Offset
• Should be performed after motor Auto-Tuning in order to determine the PG encoder tuning method.
• Attempts to detect the motor rotor position, determines whether PG encoder offset can be tuned using
Stationary Encoder Offset Tuning and sets parameters needed for Initial Magnet Pole Search (n8-36,
n8-37).
Initial Magnet Pole Search • When using the Rescue Operation mode, perform this tuning to let the drive automatically set the
T2-01 = 3
Parameters Auto-Tuning parameters needed for Initial Magnet Pole Search with power supply from a battery or UPS (n8-81,
n8-82).
• Must be performed when using an incremental PG encoder.
Important: If this tuning fails when using a PG-X3 card with an incremental PG encoder the motor
cannot be driven using an incremental PG encoder. Change the PG encoder to an absolute PG encoder.
• Tunes the PG encoder offset without rotating the motor.
Stationary PG Encoder
T2-01 = 4 • If the PG encoder offset cannot be tuned properly by this method, try Rotating PG Encoder Offset
Offset Auto-Tuning
Tuning.
Rotational PG Encoder • Tunes the PG encoder offset while rotating the motor.
T2-01 = 10
Offset Auto-Tuning • Motor and mechanical system must be uncoupled (ropes must be removed from traction sheave).

■ Auto-Tuning Interruption and Fault Codes

If tuning results are abnormal or the STOP key is pressed before completion, Auto-Tuning will be interrupted and a fault
code will appear on the digital operator.
Figure 35

ALM DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180
ALM
- A.TUNE - DRV Rdy - MODE - DRV
REV DRV
DRV FOUT
Tune Proceeding
X.XX Hz/ X.XXA Er-03
STOP key

FWD FWD RESET YEA_
common
During Auto-Tuning Auto-Tuning Aborted
Figure 37 Auto-Tuning Aborted Display
■ Auto-Tuning Operation Example

The following example demonstrates Rotational Auto-Tuning when using OLV (A1-02 = 2).
Selecting the Type of Auto-Tuning
Step Display/Result
- MODE - DRV Rdy
Speed Ref (OPR)
U1-01= 0.00%
1. Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears. U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ
U1-03= 0.00A LREF
FWD
- MODE - PRG
Auto-Tuning
2. Press or until the Auto-Tuning display appears. AUTO
HELP FWD DATA
- A.TUNE - PRG
Tuning Mode
3. Press to begin setting parameters.
T1-01= 0 ∗0∗
Standard Tuning
ESC FWD DATA
- A.TUNE - PRG
Tuning Mode
4. Press to select the value for T1-01.

T1-01= 0 ∗0∗
Standard Tuning
“0”
FWD
5. Save the setting by pressing . Entry Accepted

- A.TUNE - PRG
Tuning Mode
& Operation
6. The display automatically returns to the display shown in Step 3. T1-01= 0 ∗0∗
Standard Tuning
ESC FWD DATA
Enter Data from the Motor Nameplate

After selecting the type of Auto-Tuning, enter the data required from the motor nameplate. 4
Note: These instructions continue from Step 6 in “Selecting the Type of Auto-Tuning”.
Step Display/Result
- A.TUNE - PRG
Mtr Rated Power
1. Press to access the motor output power parameter T1-02.

T1-02= 3.70kW
(0.00 ~ 650.00)
“3.70kW”
ESC FWD DATA

Step Display/Result
- A.TUNE - PRG
Mtr Rated Power
2. Press to view the default setting.

T1-02= 003.70kW
(0.00 ~ 650.00)
“3.70kW”
FWD
- A.TUNE - PRG
Mtr Rated Power
Press F1 , F2 , , and to enter the motor power nameplate
3. left right
T1-02= 004.00kW
(0.00 ~ 650.00)
data in kW. “3.70kW”
FWD
4. Press to save the setting. Entry Accepted
- A.TUNE - PRG
Mtr Rated Power
5. The display automatically returns to the display in Step 1. T1-02= 4.00kW

(0.00 ~ 650.00)
“3.70kW”
ESC FWD DATA
- A.TUNE - PRG
Mtr Rated Power
T1-02= 4.00kW
Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to set the following parameters: (0.00 ~ 650.00)
“3.70kW”
• T1-03, Motor Rated Voltage ESC FWD DATA
• T1-04, Motor Rated Current

6.
• T1-05, Motor Base Frequency
• T1-06, Number of Motor Poles - A.TUNE - PRG
• T1-07, Motor Base Speed Rated Speed
T1-07= 1450RPM
(0 ~ 24000)
“1450RPM”
ESC FWD DATA
Starting Auto-Tuning
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. The drive and motor may start unexpectedly during Auto-Tuning, which could result in death or
serious injury. Ensure the areas surrounding the drive, motor and load are clear before proceeding with Auto-Tuning.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. High voltage will be supplied to the motor when Stationary Auto-Tuning is performed even with
the motor stopped, which could result in death or serious injury. Do not touch the motor until Auto-Tuning has been completed.
WARNING! When performing Rotational Auto-Tuning for motor data or PG encoder offset, always uncouple the motor from the
mechanical system (remove ropes from traction sheave). Performing Rotational Auto-Tuning with the mechanical system connected to
the motor can cause hazardous situations, injury to personnel and damage to the equipment.
NOTICE: Rotational Auto-Tuning will not function properly if a holding brake is applied on the load. Ensure the motor can freely spin
before beginning Auto-Tuning. Failure to comply could result in improper operation of the drive.
Enter the required information from the motor nameplate. Press to proceed to the Auto-Tuning start display.
Note: These instructions continue from Step 6 in “Enter Data from the Motor Nameplate”.
Step Display/Result
- A.TUNE - DRV
Auto-Tuning
1. After entering the data listed on the motor nameplate, press to confirm.
0.00 Hz/ 0.00A
Tuning Ready ?
Press RUN key
ESC FWD
Press to activate Auto-Tuning. The drive begins by injecting current into the - A.TUNE - DRV Rdy
motor for about 1 min, and then starts to rotate the motor. Tune Proceeding
2. Note: The first digit on the display indicates which motor is undergoing Auto-Tuning X.XX Hz/ X.XXA

(motor 1 or motor 2). The second digit indicates the type of Auto-Tuning being FWD
performed.
- MODE - DRV
3. Auto-Tuning finishes in approximately one to two minutes. End

Tune Successful
FWD RESET

■ Parameter Settings during Induction Motor Auto-Tuning: T1

The T1- parameters are used to set the Auto-Tuning input data for induction motor tuning.
Note: For motors operating in the field weakening range, first perform the Auto-Tuning with the base data. After Auto-Tuning is
complete, change E1-04, Maximum Output Frequency, to the desired value.
T1-01: Auto-Tuning Mode Selection
Sets the type of Auto-Tuning to be used. Refer to Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors on page 61 for details on the
different types of Auto-Tuning.
No. Name Setting Range Default

2 (V/f) 2 (V/f)
T1-01 Auto-Tuning Mode Selection
0 to 2, 4 (OLV, CLV) 1 (OLV, CLV)
Setting 0: Rotational Auto-Tuning

Setting 1: Stationary Auto-Tuning 1
Setting 2: Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance
Setting 4: Stationary Auto-Tuning 2
T1-02: Motor Rated Power
Sets the motor rated power according to the motor nameplate value.

T1-02 Motor Rated Power 0.00 to 650.00 kW Determined by o2-04
T1-03: Motor Rated Voltage

Sets the motor rated voltage according to the motor nameplate value. Enter the motor voltage at base speed here if the
motor is operating above base speed.
Enter the voltage needed to operate the motor under no-load conditions at rated speed to T1-03 for better control precision
around rated speed when using a vector control mode. The no-load voltage can usually be found in the motor test report
available from the manufacturer. If the motor test report is not available, enter approximately 90% of the rated voltage
printed on the motor nameplate. This may increase the output current and reduce the overload margin.

T1-03 Motor Rated Voltage 0.0 to 255.5 V <1> 200.0 V <1>
<1> Values shown are specific to 200 V class drives. Double value for 400 V class drives.
T1-04: Motor Rated Current

Sets the motor rated current according to the motor nameplate value. Set the motor rated current between 50% and 100%
& Operation
of the drive rated current for optimal performance in OLV or CLV. Enter the current at the motor base speed.
T1-04 Motor Rated Current

10 to 200% of drive rated
current
Depending on o2-04 4
T1-05: Motor Base Frequency
Sets the motor rated frequency according to the motor nameplate value. If a motor with an extended speed range is used
or if the motor is used in the field weakening area, enter the maximum frequency to E1-04 (E3-04 for motor 2) after Auto-
Tuning is complete.

T1-05 Motor Base Frequency 0.0 to 120.0 Hz 60.0 Hz

T1-06: Number of Motor Poles

Sets the number of motor poles according to the motor nameplate value.

T1-06 Number of Motor Poles 2 to 48 4
T1-07: Motor Base Speed

Sets the motor rated speed according to the motor nameplate value. If a motor with an extended speed range is used or if
the motor is used in the field weakening area, enter the speed at base frequency to T1-07.

T1-07 Motor Base Speed 0 to 24000 r/min 1750 r/min
T1-08: PG Number of Pulses Per Revolution

Sets the number of pulses from the PG encoder. Set the actual number of pulses for one full motor rotation.

T1-08 PG Number of Pulses Per Revolution 0 to 60000 ppr 1024 ppr
Note: T1-08 will only be displayed in CLV.

T1-09: Motor No-Load Current
Sets the no-load current for the motor. The default setting displayed is no-load current automatically calculated from the
output power set in T1-02 and the motor rated current set to T1-04. Enter the data listed on the motor test report. Leave
this data at the default setting if the motor test report is not available.

0 to [T1-04] A
T1-09 <1> Motor No-Load Current –
(Max: 0 to 2999.9)
<1> The value will have two decimal places (0.01 A) in the drive models 2A0008 to 0033 and 4A0005 to 0018 (refer to Table 50 and Table 51), and
one decimal place (0.1 A) in the drive models 2A0047 to 0415 and 4A0024 to 0260
T1-10: Motor Rated Slip

Sets the rated slip for the motor.
The default setting displayed is the motor rated slip for a Magnetek motor calculated from the output power set in T1-02.
Enter the data listed on the motor test report.

T1-10 Motor Rated Slip 0.00 to 20.00 Hz –

■ Parameter Settings during PM Motor Auto-Tuning: T2

The T2- parameters are used to set the Auto-Tuning input data for PM motor tuning.
T2-01: PM Auto-Tuning Mode Selection
Selects the type of Auto-Tuning to be performed. Refer to Auto-Tuning for Permanent Magnet Motors on page 61 for
details on different types of Auto-Tuning.

T2-01 PM Auto-Tuning Mode Selection 0 to 4, 10, 11 0
0: Motor Data Input

1: PM Stationary Auto-Tuning
2: PM Stationary Stator Resistance Auto-Tuning
3: Initial Magnet Pole Search Parameters Auto-Tuning
4: Stationary PG Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning
10: Rotational PG Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning
11: Rotational Back EMF Constant Auto-Tuning
T2-04: PM Motor Rated Power
Specifies the PM motor rated power in kilowatts.

T2-04 PM Motor Rated Power 0.00 to 650.00 kW Depending on o2-04
T2-05: PM Motor Rated Voltage

Sets the PM motor rated voltage.

T2-05 PM Motor Rated Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V <1> 200.0 V <1>
<1> Values shown are specific to 200 V class drives. Double value for 400 V class drives.
T2-06: PM Motor Rated Current

Enter the PM motor rated current in amps.

10% to 200% of the drive
T2-06 PM Motor Rated Current Depending on o2-04
rated current.
T2-08: Number of PM Motor Poles

& Operation
Enter the number of motor poles.

T2-08 Number of PM Motor Poles 2 to 48 6
4
T2-09: PM Motor Base Speed
Enter the motor rated speed in r/min.
Note: T2-09 will be displayed when in CLV/PM.

T2-09 PM Motor Base Speed 0 to 24000 r/min 150 r/min

T2-10: PM Motor Stator Resistance

Enter the motor stator resistance per motor phase.

T2-10 PM Motor Stator Resistance 0.000 to 65.000 Ω –
T2-11: PM Motor d-Axis Inductance

Enter the d axis inductance per motor phase.

T2-11 PM Motor d-Axis Inductance 0.00 to 600.00 mH –
T2-12: PM Motor q-Axis Inductance

Enter the q axis inductance per motor phase.

T2-12 PM Motor q-Axis Inductance 0.00 to 600.00 mH –
T2-13: Induced Voltage Constant Unit Selection

Selects the units used for setting the induced voltage coefficient.

T2-13 Induced Voltage Constant Unit Selection 0, 1 1
0: mV (r/min)
1: mV (rad/sec)
Note: If T2-13 is set to 0, then the drive will use E5-24 (Motor Induction Voltage Constant 2), and will automatically set E5-09 (Motor
Induction Voltage Constant 1) to 0.0. If T2-13 is set to 1, then the drive will use E5-09 and will automatically set E5-24 to 0.0.
T2-14: PM Motor Induced Voltage Constant
Enter the motor induced voltage constant.

T2-14 PM Motor Induced Voltage Constant 0.0 to 2000.0 Depending on T2-02
T2-16: PG Number of Pulses Per Revolution for PM Motor Tuning

Enter the number of pulses from the PG encoder per motor rotation.

T2-16 Encoder Resolution (Pulses Per Revolution) 1 to 15000 ppr 1024 ppr
T2-17: PG Encoder Z-pulse Offset

Sets the offset between the rotor magnet axis and the PG encoder zero position. If the PG encoder offset value is unknown
or if the PG encoder is replaced, perform PG Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning.

T2-17 PG Encoder Z-pulse Offset -180.0 to 180.0 deg 0.0 deg

◆ Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications

■ Up and Down Commands and Speed Reference Selection
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Remove the Up/Down Command before resetting alarms and faults. Failure to comply can
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Verify drive parameter b1-03 Stopping Method is set to 0:Ramp to Stop before starting the
drive. Failure to comply may cause the elevator to free-fall when the Up/Down command is removed.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. The drive is capable of running the motor at high speed. Verify the maximum drive output
frequency before starting the drive. Failure to comply may cause injury or death due to inadvertent high speed operation.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Use the Initial Pole Search Status Signal (H2- = 61) to interlock the brake to ensure the
brake is not released before the Initial Magnetic Pole Search is completed. Failure to comply may cause inadvertent elevator
movement resulting in serious injury.
NOTICE: Always turn off the RUN command before changing the setting of parameters d1-18 (Speed Reference Selection Mode), b1-
01 (Speed Reference Selection), or H1- (Multi-Function Digital Inputs). If the RUN command is on when changing any of these
settings, the motor may unexpectedly start running, and could result in injury.
Speed Reference Selection

Parameter b1-01 determines the source of the speed reference.
b1-01 Reference source Speed reference input

Set the speed references in the d1- parameters and use digital inputs to switch
0 (default) Digital operator keypad
between different reference values.
1 Analog input <1> Apply the speed reference signal to terminal A1 or A2.
2 Serial Communication <2> Serial Communications using the RS422/485 port
3 Option Board <2> Communications option card
<1> If source of the speed reference is assigned to the control terminals (b1-01 = 1), then d1-18 will automatically be set to 0 (so that the drive uses
multi-speed references d1-01 to d1-08).
<2> If the speed reference selection in d1-18 is set so that either the high speed reference has priority (d1-18 = 1), or so that the leveling speed has
priority (d1-18 = 2), then the drive will look to the multi-function input terminals for the speed reference.
Up/Down Command Source Selection

The input source for the Up and Down command can be selected using parameter b1-02.
b1-02 Up/Down source Up/Down command input

0 Operator keypad RUN and STOP keys on the operator
Terminal S1: Run in Up direction
1 (default) Digital inputs
Terminal S2: Run in Down direction

2 Serial Communication Serial Communications using the RS422/485 port
3 Option Board Communications option card
& Operation
Travel Start and Stop

Travel Start
To start the elevator in up or down direction, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
4
• A speed reference greater than zero must be provided.
• The Safe Disable signals at terminals H1 and H2 must both be closed (drive output enabled).
• If a multi-function digital input is programmed for Baseblock (H1-=8 or 9), this input must be set so the drive is not
in a baseblock condition.
• An Up or Down Signal must be set at the source specified in b1-02.
• If a multifunction input is programmed for output contactor feedback (H1-=56), then the output contactor must be
closed.

Travel Stop
The drive stops under the following conditions:
• The Up or Down command is removed.
• d1-18 is set to 1 or 2 and the Up/Down or Leveling Speed signal (H1- = 53) is removed.
• d1-18 is set to 3 and all speed inputs are removed.
• A fault occurs. The stopping method depends on the specific fault that occurred, in combination with certain parameter
settings.
• The Safe Disable inputs are opened or a Base Block signal is input. In this case, the brake is applied immediately and
the drive output shuts off.
■ Speed Selection Using Digital Inputs (b1-01 = 0)
Set parameter b1-01 = 0 to enable the speed selection using the drive digital inputs. Use parameter d1-18 to determine
different travel speeds selected by the digital inputs.
d1-18 Speed Selection

0 (default) Multi-speed inputs 1, Speed references are set in d1-01 to d1-08
1 Separate speed inputs, Speed references are set in d1-19 to d1-24 and d1-26, Higher speed has priority
2 Separate speed inputs, Speed references are set in d1-19 to d1-24 and d1-26, Leveling speed has priority
3 Multi speed inputs 2, Speed references are set in d1-02 to d1-08, Stop if no speed selection input is enabled
Multi-Speed Inputs 1, 2 (d1-18 = 0 or 3)

Speed Selection
When d1-18 = 0 or 3, multi-function digital inputs are preset as shown below.
Terminal Parameter Number Set Value Details

S5 H1-05 3 Multi-Speed Reference 1
Different speed reference settings can be selected by combining the three digital inputs as shown in the table below.
Note: Parameters d1-19 through d1-26 are displayed only if d1-18 is set to 1 or 2.
Digital Inputs Selected Speed

Multi-Speed Multi-Speed Multi-Speed d1-18 = 0 d1-18 = 3
Reference 1 Reference 2 Reference 3
0 0 0 Speed reference 1 (d1-01) Stop
1 0 0 Speed reference 2 (d1-02 or terminal A1, A2 input value if H3-02 or H3-10 is set to 2)
0 1 0 Speed reference 3 (d1-03 or terminal A1, A2 input value if H3-02 or H3-10 is set to 3)
1 1 0 Speed reference 4 (d1-04)
0 = Off, 1 = On

Setting d1-18 = 0
Up to eight speed references can be set using parameters d1-01 to d1-08. The drive starts with an Up or Down command,
and stops when the Up or Down command is removed. When d1-18 = 0, parameters d1-19 through d1-23 will not be
displayed.
Setting d1-18 = 3
Allows seven speed references to be set using parameters d1-02 to d1-08. The drive starts with an Up or Down command,
and stops either when all three input terminals that set the speed reference are released, or when the Up/Down command
is released. When d1-18 = 0, parameters d1-19 through d1-23 will not be displayed.
Separate Speed Inputs (d1-18 = 1 or 2)
Six different speed settings (defined in the parameters d1-19 to d1-24 and d1-26) can be set and selected using four digital
inputs.
Speed Selection
When d1-18 = 1 or 2, multi-function digital inputs are preset as shown below:
Terminal Parameter Number Set Value Details

S3 H1-03 50 Nominal speed (d1-19)
S5 H1-05 51 Intermediate speed
S6 H1-06 53 Leveling speed (d1-26)
Different speed settings can be selected depending on the assignment of the speed selection digital inputs (H1-) as
shown in the table below.
Note: Parameters d1-19 through d1-26 are displayed only if d1-18 is set to 1 or 2.
Leveling and Nominal Speed Leveling speed Nominal Speed

assigned not assigned not assigned
Selected Speed (H1- = 50 and H1- = 53) (H1- ≠ 53) (H1- ≠ 50)
50 51 52 53 50 51 52 51 52 53
Nominal Speed (d1-19) 1 0 0 A 1 0 0 0 0 0
Intermediate Speed 1 (d1-20) 0 1 0 A 0 1 0 1 0 0
Intermediate Speed 2 (d1-21) 1 1 1 A 1 1 1 N/A N/A N/A
Intermediate Speed 3 (d1-22) 0 1 1 A 0 1 1 1 1 0
Releveling Speed (d1-23) 0 0 1 A 0 0 1 0 1 0
Leveling Speed (d1-26) 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 B B B
Zero Speed 0 0 0 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
0 = Off, 1 = On, A = 0 when d1-18 = 2 and no influence when d1-18=1, B = no influence, N/A = Not available
Higher Speed has Priority and the Leveling Speed Input is Assigned (d1-18 = 1 and H1- = 53) (Default)
& Operation
The higher speed has priority over the leveling speed. The leveling signal is disregarded as long as any other speed
selection input is active. The drive decelerates to the leveling speed (d1-26) when the selected speed reference signal is
removed.
4
DC Injection/ DC Injection/
Position lock Position lock
Speed
Safe disable (terminals H1/H2 on)
and Baseblock off (H1- = 8/9)
Up/Down Command
Leveling speed
Selected speed (other than leveling)
Input is set No effect

Higher Speed Priority is Selected and the Leveling Speed Input is Not Assigned (d1-18 = 1 and H1- ≠ 53)
The drive decelerates to the leveling speed (d1-26) when the selected speed reference signal is removed.
If no speed reference is selected at start, the drive will trigger an “FrL” fault. Set parameter S6-15 to 0 to disable Speed
Reference Missing (FrL) detection. With this setting the drive starts using leveling speed if no other speed reference is
selected.
Speed

Up/Down Command
Leveling Speed has Priority and the Leveling Speed Input is Assigned (d1-18 = 2, H1- = 53)
The leveling signal has priority over other speed references. The drive decelerates to the leveling speed (d1-26) when the
leveling speed selection input is activated. The drive stops when either the leveling input or the Up/Down command is
released.
Speed
Up/Down Command
Leveling speed Leveling speed has priority
Leveling Speed Priority is Selected and the Nominal Speed Input is Not Assigned (d1-18 = 2, H1- ≠ 50)
The drive runs at nominal speed (d1-19) when no speed selection input is set. When the leveling speed signal is set, the
drive decelerates to the leveling speed. The leveling speed signal has priority over all other speed signals.
NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. This function may not work properly if a broken wire connection to the drive I/O causes improper elevator
speed selection. Properly tighten wire connections at the drive terminals before enabling this function.
position lock position lock
Speed
Up/Down Command
Leveling speed
■ Multi-Function Terminal Setup

Multi-Function Digital Input (Terminals S3 to S8)
The H1 parameters assign functions to digital input terminals S3 to S8 digital input terminal functions, refer to H1: Multi-
Function Digital Inputs on page 158.
Multi-Function Digital Outputs
The H2 parameters assign functions to digital output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6, P1-C1, and P2-PC digital input
terminal functions, refer to H2: Multi-Function Digital Outputs on page 159.
Multi-Function Analog Inputs
The H3 parameters assign functions to analog input terminals A1 and A2 analog input functions, refer to H3: Multi-
Function Analog Inputs on page 161.

Multi-Function Analog Outputs

The H4 parameters assign functions to analog output terminals FM and AM. Select the function for these terminals by
entering the last three digits of the desired U monitor. For a list of analog output functions, refer to U: Monitors on
page 179.
■ Accel/Decel Ramp and Jerk Settings
Acceleration and deceleration ramps are set using the C1- parameters. Use the C2- parameters to adjust the jerk
at the start of acceleration or deceleration.
Figure 38 explains how accel/decel ride and jerk settings can be used to adjust the ride profile.
Figure 36
C2-03
(Jerk at
C2-02 Decel Start)
(Jerk at
Accel End) C2-04
(Jerk at
C2-01 Decel End) C2-05 (Jerk Below Leveling Speed)
C1-01
(Jerk at (Accel Ramp 1)
Accel Start) d1-26 (Leveling Speed)
C1-02
(Decel Ramp 1)
Figure 38 Accel/Decel Ramp and the Jerk Function
Units used to set the acceleration and deceleration ramp as well as the Jerk function change with the setting of parameter
o1-03.
■ Inspection Operation
Start Condition in Inspection Operation
Inspection operation is performed when an Up or Down signal is input while one of the following conditions is true:
• Parameter d1-18 is set to 0 or 3 and the selected speed is higher than d1-28 but lower than d1-29.
• Parameter d1-18 is set to 1 or 2 and a digital input programmed for Inspection Operation Speed (H1- = 54) is
enabled.
Inspection Operation uses the same acceleration characteristics and brake sequence at start as normal operation.
The carrier frequency is set to 2 kHz during Inspection Operation, but can be changed using parameter C6-21.
Stop Condition in Inspection Operation
To stop the drive during Inspection Operation, either remove the Up or Down command or reset the input terminal for
Inspection Operation.
& Operation
A deceleration ramp can be set for Inspection Operation using parameter C1-15.
• If C1-15 = 0.00, the drive immediately applies the brake, shuts off the drive output, and opens the motor contactor, i.e.,
the multi-function output terminals set for “Brake Control” (H2- = 50) and “Output Contactor Control” (H2- =
51) are cleared. 4
• If C1-15 > 0.00, the drive decelerates to stop at the rate set to C1-15, then applies the brake, shuts the output off, and
opens the motor contactor.

Inspection Operation Timing Chart

A timing chart for Inspection Operation appears in Figure 39.
Inspection Operation without Decel Ramp (C1-15=0) Inspection Operation with Decel Ramp (C1-15>0)
Inspection Operation Inspection Operation

Speed Speed
DC Injection Braking/ DC Injection Braking/
Position Lock at start Position Lock at start C1-15
Speed Speed
Safe disable (terminals H1/H2 on) Safe disable (terminals H1/H2 on)
and Baseblock off (H1- = 8/9) and Baseblock off (H1- = 8/9)
H1- = 54 (Inspection Operation) H1- = 54 (Inspection Operation)
<1> <1>
Up/Down command Up/Down command
H2- = 51 (Output Cont. Contr.) H2- = 51 (Output Cont. Contr.)
H2- = 50 (Brake Control) H2- = 50 (Brake Control)
<1> The drive stops if either the Up/Down command or Inspection Operation signals are removed.
Figure 39 Inspection Operation Sequence
■ Brake Sequence
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Rapid deceleration may cause the drive to fault on an overvoltage condition, resulting in death
or serious injury due to an uncontrolled motor state. Be sure to set an acceptable deceleration time in parameter C1-09, Fast Stop
Ramp, when using the fast-stop feature.
01 (Speed Reference Selection), or H1-(Multi-Function Digital Inputs). If the RUN command is on when changing any of these
The drive supports two types of brake sequences, one with torque compensation at start using an analog input terminal
(H3- = 14) and the other without torque compensation at start.
Brake Sequence without Torque Compensation
To configure the brake sequence operation without torque compensation, do not set any analog input terminals for
“Torque compensation” (H3- = 14).
Figure 37
S1-04 S1-05
S1-10 (DC Injection/ Selected Speed (DC Injection
(Up/Down Command PositionLock Braking/Position
Time at Start) Lock Time at stop) S1-11
Delay Time) d1-26 (Output Contactor
DC Injection Braking/ (Leveling Speed) DC Injection/ Open Delay Time)
Position Lock at Start Position Lock at Stop
Speed
S1-06 S1-07
(Brake (Brake
Release Close
Delay
Time) Delay
Up/Down Command Time)
Output Contactor Control
(H2- = 51)
Motor Contactor Response
(H1- = 56)
Brake Control (H2- = 50)
t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7 t8 t9
Enabled
Figure 40 Brake Sequence without Torque Compensation at Start

Figure 40 is divided into time zones. Table 25 explains the sequence in each time zone.

Table 25 Time Zones for Brake Sequence without Torque Compensation at Start
Time Zone Description
Up or Down command is issued.
Safe Disable terminals H1-HC and H2-HC must be set and Baseblock must be disabled (digital inputs set to H1- = 8/9).
Speed reference must be selected by multi-function input terminals.
t1 Output contactor control signal is set (H2- = 51) by the drive.
Drive waits for the “Motor Contactor Feedback” signal (H1- = 56) to be issued. If the motor contactor feedback is not
received within t1, or if the feedback signal is on before the contactor control command has been issued, an SE1 fault is triggered.
If the motor contactor feedback signal is not used, then the drive waits for the operation start delay time set in S1-10 to pass, then
proceeds to the next step.
After the delay time set in S1-10 has passed, the drive outputs current to the motor.
DC Injection Braking or Position Lock begins.
t2
After the brake release delay time set in S1-06 has passed, the drive sets the “Brake Control” output (H2- = 50) in order to
release the brake.
DC Injection Braking or Position Lock will continue until:
the time S1-04 has elapsed, or
t3 the time S1-06 has elapsed if S1-06 > S1-04 (this setting should be avoided since the motor could be driven against the applied
brake).
t4 The drive accelerates up to the selected speed. The speed is kept constant until the leveling speed is selected.
Leveling speed is selected. The drive decelerates to the leveling speed and maintains that speed until the Up or Down command is
t5 removed.
t6 The Up or Down signal is cleared. The drive decelerates to zero speed.
The motor speed reaches the zero speed level (S1-01).
DC Injection Braking or Position Lock is then executed for the time set in S1-05.
t7
After the delay time to close the brake set in S1-07 has passed, the drive clears the “Brake Control” output (H2- = 50). The
brake applies.
The drive continues DC Injection or Position Lock until the time S1-05 has passed. When S1-05 has passed the drive output is
t8 shut off.
After the delay for the magnetic contactor set in S1-11 has passed, the drive resets the output terminal set for “Output Contactor
t9 Control” (H2- = 51).
The Safe Disable Inputs can be cleared and Baseblock can be enabled.
Brake Sequence Using Torque Compensation

If a load measuring device is installed in the elevator, an analog input can be used to input a torque compensation value to
the drive. This function requires one of the closed loop control modes (CLV or CLV/PM). To use torque compensation,
one of the analog input terminals must be configured to provide the torque compensation signal (H3- = 14).
Figure 41 is a timing chart for a brake sequence using torque compensation.
Figure 38
S1-10 S1-04 Selected Speed S1-05

(Up/Down Command (DC Injection/ (DC Injection

Delay Time) Position Lock Braking/
Time at Start) d1-26 Position Lock at stop) S1-11
S3-14 (Torque (Leveling Speed)
Compensation (Output Contactor
Position Lock Position Lock
Open Delay Time)
& Operation
Speed Fade Out Speed)

300%Torque S1-07
Torque Compensation (Brake
Fades Out with S3-10 Close
Latch value from analog input Delay
at S3-14.
Time)
Torque Compensation at Start
S3-10 (Starting
Torque Compensation 4
Increase Time)
Up/Down Command
Output Contactor Control
(H2- = 51)
Motor Contactor Response
(H1- = 56)
Brake Control (H2- = 50)
t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7 t8 t9
Enabled
Figure 41 Brake Sequence Using Torque Compensation at Start

Figure 41 is divided into time zones. Table 26 explains the sequence in each time zone.
Table 26 Time Zones for Brake Sequence Using Torque Compensation at Start
Time Zone Description
Up or Down command is issued.
Safe Disable terminals H1-HC and H2-HC must be set and Baseblock must be disabled (digital inputs set to H1- = 8/9).
Speed reference must be selected by multi-function input terminals.
Output contactor control signal is set (H2- = 51) by the drive.
t1
Drive waits for the “Motor Contactor Feedback” signal (H1- = 56) to be issued. If the motor contactor feedback is not
received within t1, or if the feedback signal is on before the contactor control command has been issued, an SE1 fault is triggered.
If the motor contactor feedback signal is not used, then the drive waits for the operation start delay time set in S1-10 to pass, then
proceeds to the next step.
The drive reads the torque value from the analog input (load cell).
After the delay time set in S1-10 has passed, the drive outputs current to the motor. Position Lock begins.
The torque value from the analog input is latched and internal torque compensation value is increased from zero to the latched
t2 value using the time constant set in S3-10.
After the internal torque compensation level reaches the latched value, the drive sets the “Brake Control” output (H2- = 50) in
order to release the brake.
t3 The brake is released and the drive executes Position Lock until the time set in S1-04 has passed.
The drive accelerates up to the selected speed.
t4 After the torque compensation fade-out speed level (S3-14) is reached during acceleration, the internal torque compensation value
is reduced in accordance with the time constant set in S3-10.
t5 Leveling speed is selected. The drive decelerates to the leveling speed and maintains that speed until the Up or Down command is
removed.
t6 The Up or Down signal is cleared. The drive decelerates to zero speed.
The motor speed reaches the zero speed level (S1-01).
DC Injection Braking or Position Lock is then executed for the time set in S1-05.
t7
After the delay time to close the brake set in S1-07 has passed, the drive clears the “Brake Control” output (H2- = 50). The
brake applies.
t8 The drive continues DC Injection or Position Lock until the time S1-05 has passed. When S1-05 has passed the drive output is
shut off.
After the delay for the magnetic contactor set in S1-11 has passed, the drive resets the output terminal set for “Output Contactor
t9 Control” (H2- = 51).
The Safe Disable Inputs can be cleared and Baseblock can be enabled.
Adjusting the Torque Compensation at Start

CAUTION! Set all motor-related parameters (the E- parameters) and perform a test run before fine-tuning the torque
compensation at start. Adjusting the torque compensation prematurely may result in faulty performance.
To use torque compensation at start, apply at least 50% of the maximum weight to the elevator car and set the drive
according to the Load Condition 2 procedure below. If using a voltage signal to the analog input terminals as a load
sensor, then that input signal will determine the rate of torque compensation applied according to S3-27 and S3-28.
Before the torque compensation function can be used, the analog input scaling must be adjusted to the load sensor output.
This can be done by bringing the elevator into two different load conditions and teaching the corresponding analog input
value and torque reference value to the drive.
Note: 1. This torque compensation requires a closed loop control mode (CLV, CLV/PM).
2. The torque compensation value is limited to 120%.
Set an analog input terminal for torque compensation (H3- = 14) and proceed with the steps below.

Procedure for Load Condition 1 (S3-27, S3-29)

1. Make sure the drive is wired properly. For instructions, refer to Standard Connection Diagram on page 21.
2. Set the speed reference to 0%.
3. Apply no weight to the elevator car.
4. Note the value of the analog input monitor for the load signal input is connected to (U1-13 for terminal A1, U1-14
for terminal A2).
5. Provide an elevator Up or Down command, using Inspection Operation or normal operation mode. The car
should be held in place when the brake releases.
6. Note the drives internal torque reference monitor U1-09.
7. Stop the drive.
8. Set the value noted in step 4 to parameter S3-29. Set the value noted in step 6 to parameter S3-27.
Procedure for Load Condition 2 (S3-28, S3-30)
1. Set the speed reference to 0%.
2. Apply load to the car has much as possible (at least 50% of the maximum weight).
3. Note the value of the analog input monitor for the load signal input connected to (U1-13 for terminal A1, U1-14 for
terminal A2)
4. Provide an elevator Up or Down command, using Inspection Operation or normal operation mode. The car
should be held in place when the brake releases.
5. Note the drives internal torque reference monitor U1-09.
6. Stop the drive.
7. Set the value noted in step 3 to parameter S3-30. Set the value noted in step 5 to parameter S3-28.
Figure 42 shows the Torque Compensation at Start settings with parameters S3-27 to S3-30.
The solid line in Figure 42 indicates the torque compensation at start when the elevator moves up or down.
Figure 39
Torque Compensation Value
S3-28
During Load Condition 2
(Torque Compensation
Value with Load Condition 2) S3-29

(Analog Input from
Load Sensor
with Load
Condition 1)
S3-30 Analog Input Voltage (V)

0
(Analog input
S3-27
(Torque Compensation Value from Load Sensor
with Load Condition 1) with Load Condition 2)

During Load Condition 1
& Operation
Figure 42 Torque Compensation at start for the Elevator in Up and Down Direction
Note: PRG: 7015 or earlier will apply a limit at 0 V torque compensation input value.
PRG: 7016 and later have no torque compensation limit when adding negative voltage to analog input voltage (see Figure 42).
4

After setting load conditions 1 and 2, perform a trial run. If required, parameter S3-12 can be set up to add a bias to the
load sensor input when riding in a Down direction (default: 0.0%, same torque compensation characteristics in up and
down direction). Figure 43 illustrates the effect of torque compensation on the settings of S3-12 and S3-27 through S3-
30.
Figure 40
S3-28 During Load Condition 2

(Torque Compensation
Torque Compensation
Value with Load Condition 2)
at Start for the Elevator
in Down Direction
Torque Compensation
at Start for the Elevator
S3-29 in Up Direction
(Analog Input
from Load Sensor S3-12 (Starting Torque
with Load Compensation Bias during Lowering)
Condition 1)
0 S3-30
(Analog input Analog Input Voltage (V)
from Load Sensor
with Load Condition 2)
S3-27
(Torque Compensation Value
with Load Condition 1) During Load Condition 1
Figure 43 Torque Compensation at start for the Elevator in Up and Down Direction
◆ S: Elevator Parameters
This section describes various functions and faults needed to operate an elevator application: braking sequence, slip
compensation, optimal adjustments at start and stop, Rescue Operation, and elevator-related faults.
■ S1-01: Zero Speed Level at Stop
Determines the speed to begin applying DC Injection (or Position Lock) when the drive is ramping to stop (b1-03 = 0).
Set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default

S1-01 Zero Speed Level at Stop 0.000 to 9.999% Determined by A1-02
The function set by S1-01 changes depending on the control mode:

• V/f Control or OLV Control (A1-02 = 0, 2)
For these control modes, parameter S1-01 sets the starting speed for DC Injection Braking at stop. Once the output
speed falls below the setting of S1-01, the amount of DC Injection Braking current set in S1-03 is injected into the
motor for the time set in parameter S1-05.
• CLV Control or CLV/PM Control (A1-02 = 3, 7)
For these control modes, parameter S1-01 sets the starting speed for Position Lock at stop. Once the motor speed falls
below the setting of S1-01, Position Lock is enabled for the time set in parameter S1-05.
■ S1-02: DC Injection Current at Start
Determines the amount of current to use for DC Injection at start. Set as a percentage of the drive rated current.

S1-02 DC Injection Current at Start 0 to 100% 50%

■ S1-03: DC Injection Current at Stop

Determines the amount of current to use for DC Injection at stop. Set as a percentage of the drive rated current. When
using OLV Control, the DC injection current is determined by multiplying S1-03 by S3-25 or S3-26.

S1-03 DC Injection Current at Stop 0 to 100% 50%
■ S1-04: DC Injection / Position Lock Time at Start

Determines how long the drive should perform DC Injection at start. In CLV and CLV/PM, S1-04 determines how long
Position Lock should be performed. During this time, the drive allows motor flux to develop, which is essential for
applying torque quickly once the brake is released. A setting of 0.00 disables S1-04.

S1-04 DC Injection / Position Lock Time at Start 0.00 to 10.00 s 0.40 s
■ S1-05: DC Injection / Position Lock Time at Stop

Determines how long the drive should perform DC Injection at stop. In CLV and CLV/PM, S1-05 determines how long
Position Lock should be performed. A setting of 0.00 disables S1-05.

S1-05 DC Injection / Position Lock Time at Stop 0.00 to 10.00 s 0.60 s
■ S1-06: Brake Release Delay Time

Determines the time that must pass after an Up/Down command is entered before the output terminal set for "Brake
control" (H2- = 50) is triggered.
Adjusting this delay time can help when there is not enough time to develop the appropriate amount of motor flux. Be
sure to also increase the time S1-04 when setting S1-06 to relatively long delay time.

S1-06 Brake Release Delay Time 0.00 to 10.00 s 0.20 s
■ S1-07: Brake Close Delay Time

Determines the time that must pass after zero speed is reached before the output terminal set for "Brake control"
(H2- = 50) is released.

& Operation
S1-07 Brake Close Delay Time 0.00 to [S1-05] 0.10 s
■ S1-10: Run Command Delay Time

Sets the time the drive waits after receiving an Up/Down command before starting operation. The time set should give the
motor contactor enough time to close. 4

S1-10 Run Command Delay Time 0.00 to 1.00 s 0.10 s

■ S1-11: Output Contactor Open Delay Time

Determines the time that must pass for an output terminal set for “Output contactor control” (H2- = 51) to be released
after the drive has stopped and drive output has been shut off.

S1-11 Output Contactor Open Delay Time 0.00 to 1.00 s 0.10 s
■ S1-12: Motor Contactor Control During Auto-Tuning Selection

Note: Available in drive software PRG: 7016 and later.
Determines the state of the output contactor control command (H2- = 51) during Auto-Tuning. The contactor closes
as soon as the Enter key is pressed in the Auto-Tuning start menu.

S1-12 Motor Contactor Control during Auto-Tuning 0, 1 0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard.Use parameter S1-12 to enable/disable automatic switching of the Motor Contactor Control
output signal during Auto-Tuning. When using setting S1-12 = 1, ensure that the multi-function output terminals are properly wired and
in the correct state before setting parameter S1-12. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive, serious injury or death.
■ S2-01: Motor Rated Speed

Sets the rated speed of the motor.

S2-01 Motor Rated Speed 300 to 1800 rpm 1380 rpm
■ S2-02/S2-03: Slip Compensation Gain in Motoring Mode / Regenerative Mode

Slip compensation for leveling speed can be set separately for motoring and regenerative states to help improve the
accuracy of leveling.

S2-02 Slip Compensation Gain in Motoring Mode 0.0 to 5.0 0.7
S2-03 Slip Compensation Gain in Regenerative Mode 0.0 to 5.0 1.0
■ S2-05: Slip Compensation Torque Detection Delay Time

Sets a delay time before detecting torque for slip compensation.

S2-05 Slip Compensation Torque Detection Delay Time 0 to 10000 ms 1000 ms
■ S2-06: Slip Compensation Torque Detection Filter Time Constant

Sets the filter time constant applied to the torque signal used for the slip compensation value calculation.

S2-06 Slip Compensation Torque Detection Filter Time Constant 0 to 2000 ms 500 ms

■ S3-01 / S3-02: Position Lock Gain at Start 1 / 2

Sets gain levels 1 and 2 for the Position Lock at start function. Position Lock at start adjusts the internal torque reference
value depending on the position deviation to hold the car in place when the brake is released. S3-01 sets the gain used to
adjust the speed reference During Position Lock. S3-02 sets gain to adjust the internal torque reference directly (Anti-
Rollback function).
Increase S3-01 and S3-02 if there is a problem with rollback when the brake is released. Decrease S3-01 and S3-02 if
motor oscillation occurs during Position Lock.

S3-01 Position Lock Gain at Start 1 0 to 100 5
S3-02 Position Lock Gain at Start 2 (Anti-Rollback Gain) 0.00 to 100.00 0.00
Note: 1. Check the C5- parameters to make sure the speed control loop settings are correct before making any adjustments to the Position
Lock gain.
2. Sometimes a fault may occur with detecting the direction of motor rotation (dv4) when using Closed Loop Vector for PM motors. To
correct this, either increase the settings of S3-01 and S3-02, or increase the number of pulses needed to trigger dv4 (F1-19).
■ S3-03: Position Lock Gain at Stop

Sets the gain used by the Position Lock control loop at stop to hold the car in place while the brake is applied.
Setting S3-03 to a high value will increase the ability of the drive to hold the car in place. Setting S3-03 too high can
cause motor oscillation and car vibration.

S3-03 Position Lock Gain at Stop 0 to 100 5
Note: 1. Check the C5- parameters to make sure the speed control loop settings are correct before making any adjustments to the Position
Lock gain.
2. Faults may occur when detecting the direction of motor rotation (dv4) when using CLV/PM. To correct this, either increase the
settings of S3-01 and S3-02, or increase the number of pulses required to trigger dv4 (F1-19).
■ S3-04: Position Lock Bandwidth

Determines the bandwidth around the locked position to enable a digital output set for H2- = 33 (within position lock
bandwidth). The output will be triggered when the car moves from the Position Lock start point to plus or minus the
number of pulses set to S3-04.

S3-04 Position Lock Bandwidth 0 to 16383 10
■ S3-10: Starting Torque Compensation Increase Time

& Operation
Sets a time constant for the torque reference to reach 300%. Enabled by setting an analog input terminal for torque
compensation (H3- = 14).
4
S3-10 Starting Torque Compensation Increase Time 0 to 5000 ms 500 ms
■ S3-12: Starting Torque Compensation Bias in Down Direction

Adds a bias to torque compensation in Down direction.
Refer to Adjusting the Torque Compensation at Start on page 76 for details.

S3-12 Starting Torque Compensation Bias in Down Direction –40.0 to 40.0% 0.00%

■ S3-14: Torque Compensation Fade Out Speed

Sets the speed level for torque compensation to fade out during the time determined by S3-15. Set as a percentage of the
maximum output frequency (E1-04). A setting of 0.0% disables this function.

S3-14 Torque Compensation Fade Out Speed 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0%
■ S3-15: Torque Compensation Fade Out Time

Sets the time for torque compensation to fade out when motor speed reaches the level set in S3-14.

S3-15 Torque Compensation Fade Out Time 0 to 5000 ms 1000 ms
■ S3-16: Torque Limit Reduction Time

After Position Lock at stop, S3-16 determines the length of time to reduce the torque limit rate = Torque 300%
S3-16

S3-16 Torque Limit Reduction Time 0 to 10000 ms 100 ms
■ S3-20: Dwell 2 Speed Reference

Sets the speed reference for the Dwell 2 function.
Note: Setting this parameter to 0.00 disables the Dwell 2 function.

S3-20 Dwell 2 Speed Reference 0.00 to 100.00 0.00%
Figure 41
Run Command
ON
SFS output
C1-01 Motor speed
C1-07
C2-01
S3-21
S3-20
Figure 44 Dwell Speed Reference at Start
■ S3-21: Dwell 2 End Speed

The Dwell 2 function will end when the drive reaches this speed. A setting of 0.00 will disable the acceleration rate switch
that occurs at the end of Dwell 2.

S3-21 Dwell 2 End Speed 0.00 to 100.00% 0.00%

■ S3-25: DC Injection Gain in Regenerative Operation

In OLV Control, S3-25 sets a gain level for DC Injection at stop (S1-03) for when the regenerative load reaches 100%. At
that time, the current applied during DC Injection at stop is determined as S1-03 × S3-25.

S3-25 DC Injection Gain in Regenerative Operation 0 to 400% 100%
■ S3-26: DC Injection Gain in Motoring Operation

In OLV Control, S3-26 sets a gain level for DC Injection at stop (S1-03) when the motoring load reaches 100%. At that
time, the current applied during DC Injection at stop is determined as S1-03 × S3-26.

S3-26 DC Injection Gain in Motoring Operation 0 to 400% 20%
■ S3-27: Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 1

Adjusts the analog signal from a load sensor for torque compensation. Refer to Adjusting the Torque Compensation at
Start on page 76 for details.

S3-27 Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 1 -100.0 to 100.0% -50.0%
■ S3-28: Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 2


S3-28 Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 2 -100.0 to 100.0% 50.0%
■ S3-29: Analog Input from Load Sensor with Load Condition 1


S3-29 Analog Input from Load Sensor with Load Condition 1 -100.0 to 100.0% 0.0%
■ S3-30: Analog Input from Load Sensor with Load Condition 2

& Operation

S3-30 Analog Input from Load Sensor with Load Condition 2 -100.0 to 100.0% 100.0% 4
■ S3-34: Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 1
Sets an intermediary value for the torque bias used for Anti-Rollback when Position Lock at start is performed. This
setting rarely needs to be changed.

S3-34 Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 1 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0%

■ S3-35: Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 2

Sets a maximum value for the torque bias used for Anti-Rollback when Position Lock at start is performed. This setting
rarely needs to be changed.

S3-35 Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 2 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0%
■ S3-37: Position Deviation Level to Apply Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 1

Sets the position deviation level to activate at Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 1 (S3-34). This setting rarely needs to be
changed.

S3-37 Position Deviation Level to Apply Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 1 0 to 32767 0
■ S3-38: Position Deviation Level to Apply Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 2

Determines the position deviation level when the drive should switch from the Anti-Rollback torque bias set in S3-34 to
the torque bias set in S3-35. This setting rarely needs to be changed.

S3-38 Position Deviation Level to Apply Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 2 0 to 32767 0
■ S3-39: Anti-Rollback Integral Gain

Determines the drive responsiveness for Anti-Rollback during Position Lock.
Increasing the value set to S3-39 may help if there is still too much deviation from the Position Lock start position after
Position Lock gain 1 and gain 2 have already been adjusted. Lower S3-39 if oscillation occurs. This parameter rarely
needs to be changed.

S3-39 Anti-Rollback Integral Gain -30.00 to 30.00 0.00
■ S3-40: Anti-Rollback Movement Detection

Sets the amount of speed feedback signal pulses to detect a movement of the rotor.

S3-40 Anti-Rollback Movement Detection 0 to 100 pulses 1 pulse
■ S3-41: Position Lock Gain at Start 2 Reduction

Sets a reduction factor for the Position Lock Gain at Start 2 (Anti Rollback Gain) set in parameter S3-02.
If the motor rotation (i.e., car movement) is below the movement detection level set to S3-40, the drive will reduce the
Anti-Rollback gain according to the gain reduction level set in S3-41.

S3-41 Position Lock Gain at Start 2 Reduction 0.00 to 1.00 0.50

■ S4-01: Light Load Direction Search Selection

Enables and disables the Light Load Direction Search.

S4-01 Light Load Direction Search Selection 0 to 2 0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2: Enabled for motor 1 only
■ S4-02: Light Load Direction Search Method
Determines the method used to perform Light Load Direction Search.

S4-02 Light Load Direction Search Method 0 or 1 1
0: Output current
1: Detect direction of regeneration
■ S4-03: Light Load Direction Search Time
Sets the time to perform Light Load Direction Search.

S4-03 Light Load Direction Search Time 0.0 to 5.0 s 1.0 s
■ S4-04: Light Load Direction Search Speed Reference

Sets the speed reference to use during Light Load Direction Search.

S4-04 Light Load Direction Search Speed Reference 0.00 to 20.00% Determined by A-02
■ S4-05: Rescue Operation Torque Limit

Sets the torque limit used during Rescue Operation.

S4-05 Rescue Operation Torque Limit 0 to 300% 100%
■ S4-06: Rescue Operation Power Supply Selection

& Operation
Specifies the type of backup power supply the drive should switch to when the power goes out.

S4-06 Rescue Operation Power Supply Selection 0 to 2 0 4
0: Battery
1: UPS (single-phase)
2: UPS (three-phase)

■ S4-07: UPS Power

Sets the capacity of the UPS.

S4-07 UPS Power 0.0 to 100.0 kVA 0.0 kVA
■ S4-08: UPS Operation Speed Limit Selection

Determines how a speed limit should be applied to the Rescue Operation speed (d1-25) when operating from a UPS. The
drive calculates the appropriate speed limit based on the UPS capacity set in S4-07. This speed limit helps prevent voltage
saturation and motor stall during Rescue Operation.

S4-08 UPS Operation Speed Limit Selection 0 to 2 2
0: Disabled
1: Enabled until Light Load Direction Search is complete
2: Enabled until stop
■ S4-12: DC Bus Voltage during Rescue Operation
Sets the DC bus voltage during Rescue Operation.

S4-12 DC Bus Voltage during Rescue Operation 0 to 800 V 0V
■ S4-13: Rescue Operation Power Supply Deterioration Detection Level

Determines at which level of backup power supply deterioration a PF5 fault is triggered. The following conditions will
trigger PF5:
• During Rescue Operation, DC bus voltage < [S4-12 × (S4-13 - 10%)]
• 100 ms after Rescue Operation has been triggered, the DC bus voltage does not rise above S4-12 × S4-13 before the
motor starts

S4-13 Rescue Operation Power Supply Deterioration Detection Level 10 to 100% 80%
■ S4-15: Speed Reference Selection at Rescue Operation

Note: Available in drive software PRG: 7016 and later.
Selects the speed reference used for Rescue Operation.

S4-15 Speed Reference Selection for Rescue Operation 0, 1 0
0: The setting of parameter d1-25 is used as speed reference for Rescue Operation
1: The speed selected by digital inputs is used as speed reference

■ Short Floor Function

Short Floor automatically adjusts the speed in order to reduce the leveling time if leveling speed was activated before the
selected speed was reached. Short Floor is enabled setting S5-01 = 1. The drive calculates the distance to decelerate from
rated speed to the leveling speed, then controls the stop so that the stopping time is shortened. In Figure 45 below, area S
indicates the distance for a stop from nominal speed.
Figure 42
Speed
d1-19 (nominal speed)
nominal speed × 0.4
d1-26 (leveling speed)
0 t
Figure 45 Speed During Normal Operation

Advance Short Floor
Advanced Short Floor minimizes the operation time to arrive at a designated floor. It uses the leveling speed once the
leveling speed command is entered via one of the multi-function inputs (H1- = 53). Advance Short Floor calculates
optimal speed based on the Short Floor Minimum Constant Speed Time (S5-03) and the currently selected deceleration
rate.
Table 27 explains the Short Floor and Advance Short Floor functions.
& Operation

Table 27 Short Floor Operation Example

Leveling
Speed Input Short Floor Advanced Short Floor
Timing
Operating
speed d1-19
Constant speed (Nominal Speed)
operation at
rated speed d1-26
(normal stop (Leveling Speed)
0
sequence) Time
H1- = 53
(Leveling Speed) ON(close)
(The speed is 40% of the nominal speed or more.)

(The speed is over Optimum Speed.)
Operating d1-19
Operating
speed (Nominal Speed) d1-19
speed
(Nominal Speed)
40% of nominal
speed Optimal Speed
d1-26 d1-26
0 (Leveling Speed)
0 (Leveling Speed)
Time
Time
H1- = 53
ON(close) H1- = 53
(Leveling Speed)
During
acceleration
(The speed is less than 40% of the nominal speed.) (The speed is optimal speed or less.)
Operating d1-19 Operating d1-19
speed (Nominal Speed) speed (Nominal Speed)
S5-03
40% of nominal Optimal Speed
speed
d1-26 d1-26
0 (Leveling Speed) 0 (Leveling Speed)
Time Time
H1- = 53 H1- = 53
(Leveling Speed) ON(close) ON(close)
(Leveling Speed)
(The speed is 40% of the nominal speed or more.)
Operating
speed d1-19
(Nominal Speed)
40% of nominal
speed
d1-26
(Leveling Speed)
0
Time
Constant speed H1- = 53
operation at
Not Available.
less than the (The speed is less than 40% of the nominal speed.)
rated speed Operating d1-19
speed (Nominal Speed)
40% of nominal
speed
d1-26
(Leveling Speed)
0
Time
H1- = 53
Before start Operates at the leveling speed.

■ S5-01: Short Floor Operation Selection

Enables and disables the Short Floor function.
Note: 1. The Short Floor and Advanced Short Floor functions cannot be used during Rescue Operation.
2. Do not use Short Floor or Advanced Short Floor when the analog input terminals are configured to supply the speed reference.
3. The drive will accelerate or decelerate to the specified speed reference at the specified Accel/Decel rate if the speed priority is set for
multi-step speed reference (d1-18 = 0 or 3) and the leveling speed reference is selected during Short Floor or Advanced Short Floor.

S5-01 Short Floor Operation Selection 0 to 2 0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Short Floor Operation)
2: Enabled (Advanced Short Floor Operation)
■ S5-02: Nominal Speed for Short Floor Calculation
Determines the rated speed used to calculate the distance for the Short Floor function when speed priority is set for Multi-
step Speed Reference (d1-18 = 0 or 3).

S5-02 Nominal Speed for Short Floor Calculation 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0%
■ S5-03: Short Floor Minimum Constant Speed Time

Sets the minimum time of the constant speed operation when the Advanced Short Floor function is enabled (S5-01 = 2).

S5-03 Short Floor Minimum Constant Speed Time 0 to 2.0 s 0.0 s
■ S5-04: Distance Calculation Acceleration Time Gain

Sets the gain used to adjust the jerk at acceleration for an optimum speed calculation when Short Floor Operation
Selection (S5-01) is set to 2.
• Increase the gain level set to S5-04 and S5-05 if the leveling time is too short or if the optimum speed calculated by the
drive is too fast.
• Decrease the gain level set to S5-04 and S5-05 if the leveling time is too long or if the optimum speed calculated by the
drive is too slow.

S5-04 Distance Calculation Acceleration Time Gain 50.0 to 200.0% 150.0%
Note: Setting S5-04 too low may trigger an overrun due to faster optimum speeds and shortened leveling times. Avoid setting this gain
& Operation
less than 100%.
■ S5-05: Distance Calculation Deceleration Time Gain

Sets the gain used to adjust the jerk at deceleration and optimum speed calculation when Short Floor Operation Selection
(S5-01) is set to 2. 4
• Increase the gain level set to S5-04 and S5-05 if the leveling time is too short or if the optimum speed calculated by the
drive is too fast.
• Decrease the gain level set to S5-04 and S5-05 if the leveling time is too long or if the optimum speed calculated by the
drive is too slow.

S5-05 Distance Calculation Deceleration Time Gain 50.0 to 200.0% 150.0%
Note: Setting S5-05 too low may trigger an overrun due to faster optimum speeds and shortened leveling times. Avoid setting this gain
less than 100%.

■ Leveling Distance Control

Leveling Distance Control uses the accel/decel rate, jerk settings, and stopping distance to automatically calculate a speed
sequence and arrive at the designated floor with increased accuracy. Two types of Leveling Distance Control are available
that allow the user to select the Stopping Method (S5-10).
WARNING! Inadvertent Movement Hazard. The elevator will not stop at the designated location and an overrun will occur which may
cause injury to personnel if parameters o1-20, S5-11, and S5-12 are set incorrectly. Before using Leveling Distance Control, make sure
that parameters for Traction Sheave Diameter (o1-20), Deceleration Distance (S5-11) and the Stop Distance (S5-12) are set to the
correct units.
Note: Leveling Distance Control should be used only for elevators with a constant stopping distance. Do not use Leveling Distance
Control in elevators where the stopping distance changes frequently.
The following functions are disabled when Leveling Distance Control is selected:
• Switching between deceleration times
• Droop Control (b7 parameters)
• Shoot Floor, Advanced Short Floor (S5-01 = 1, 2)
Leveling Distance Control is disabled when any one of the following functions are selected:
• Analog frequency reference
• Rescue Operation
• Inspection Operation
• During Motor 2 selection
Direct Landing
Direct Landing (S5-10 = 1) is activated at the start of deceleration, and brings the elevator car to the designated floor
without the use of the leveling speed.
Direct Landing disables Leveling Distance Control, and uses a speed reference calculated by multiplying E1-04 times S5-
13. If a Stop distance correction command (H1- = 5C) is triggered during Direct Landing, then the drive will switch
to the stop distance set in S5-12 for the remaining distance. Direct Landing will end once data from the encoder indicates
that the stopping distance is 0.
Figure 46 illustrates a Direct Landing Operation example.
Table 28 Conditions for Direct Landing
Speed Priority Direct Landing Start Conditions
Multi-step speed sequence
Speed reference ≥ E1-04 × S5-13 and the Up/Down command is not active or the speed reference is 0.
(d1-18 = 0, 3)
High speed reference has priority
(d1-18 = 1) The Up/Down command is not active, the speed reference is 0, or the leveling speed reference has been
Leveling speed reference has priority selected by one of the multi-function input terminals (H1-).
(d1-18 = 2)

Run Command ON OFF

(Forward [Up] / Reverse [Down])
OFF
H1- = 5C
(Stop Distance Correction)
H2- = 51 ON Output Contactor Open
(Output Contactor Control) Delay Time (S1-11)
H1- = 56 ON
(Motor Contactor Feedback) Run Command Delay Time (S1-10)
Brake Release Delay Time

(S1-06)
ON OFF
H2- = 50 (Brake Control)
Brake Close
Operation
Delay Time
Speed
(S1-07)
Zero Speed Zero Speed

S1 <1>
at Start at Stop
S2 Time
<1>
<1> Area S1 is the deceleration distance (S5-11) from the start of deceleration to stop. Area S2 is the stopping distance (S5-12) from the point
at which the stopping distance compensation signal is entered to when the car arrives at the designated floor.
Figure 46 Direct Landing Operation Example
Leveling Distance Control
Leveling Distance Control (S5-10 = 2) uses the leveling speed reference for the remaining distance to arrive at the
designated floor. Leveling Distance Control is activated when the conditions listed in Table 29 are met.
Table 29 Leveling Distance Control Operation
Speed Priority Selection Multi-Function Input Terminal Settings Leveling Distance Control Start Conditions
Multi-step speed sequence The Up/Down command is not active or the speed
–
(d1-18 = 0, 3) reference is 0.
Leveling speed reference is selected The Up/Down command is not active, or all input
High speed reference has priority (H1- = 53). terminals set for H1- = 50 to 53 are open.
(d1-18 = 1) Leveling speed reference is not selected
Up/Down command is not active.
(H1- ≠ 53).
Rated speed reference is selected The Up/Down command is not active, or all input
Multi-step speed sequence (H1- = 50). terminals set for H1- = 50 to 53 are open.
(d1-18 = 2) Rated speed reference is not selected
Up/Down command is not active.
(H1- ≠ 50).
& Operation

Run Command ON OFF

(Forward [Up] / Reverse [Down])
OFF ON OFF
H2- = 53 (Not Zero Speed)
H2- = 51 ON Output Contactor Open
(Output Contactor Control) Delay Time (S1-11)
H1- = 56 ON
(Motor Contactor Feedback) Run Command Delay Time (S1-10)
Brake Release Delay Time

(S1-06)
ON OFF
H2- = 50 (Brake Control)
Brake Close
Delay Time
Operation (S1-07)
Speed
Zero Speed Zero Speed

at Start at Stop
S Time
<1>
<1> Area S is the stopping distance (S5-12) from the point at which leveling operation is complete to when the car arrives at the designated
floor.
Figure 47 Operation Sequence Example for Leveling Distance Control
■ S5-10: Stopping Method Selection

Selects the stopping method.

S5-10 Stopping Method Selection 0 to 2 0
0: Disable
1: Direct Landing
2: Leveling Distance Control
■ S5-11: Deceleration Distance
Sets the deceleration distance when Stop Distance Control is enabled. Refer to Direct Landing on page 90 for details.

S5-11 Deceleration Distance 0 to 32767 mm <1> 0 mm
<1> The setting range becomes 0.00 to 650.00 inches when the length units are set for inches (o1-12 = 1).
■ S5-12: Stop Distance

Sets the stopping distance when Stop Distance Control is enabled. Refer to Direct Landing on page 90 and Leveling
Distance Control on page 91 for details.

S5-12 Stop Distance 0 to 10000 mm <1> 0 mm
<1> The setting range becomes 0.00 to 393.00 inches when the length units are set for inches (o1-12 = 1).

■ S5-13: Direct Landing Minimum Speed Level

Sets the speed level for the start of Direct Landing. Direct Landing is disabled if the starting speed for Direct Landing is
less than the maximum output speed multiplied by this parameter (E1-04 × S5-13).

S5-13 Direct Landing Minimum Speed Level 0 to 100% 20%
■ S6-01: Motor Contactor Response Error (SE1) Detection/Reset Selection

Determines when the drive should detect a motor contactor response error (SE1). SE1 is triggered if there is no response
from the motor contactor within the time set in S6-10 after the contactor control output has been set.

S6-01 Motor Contactor Response Error (SE1) Detection/Reset Selection 0 to 2 0
0: Detect during stop, SE1 must be manually reset

1: Detect during stop, SE1 can be automatically reset
2: No SE1 detection
■ S6-02: Starting Current Error (SE2) Detection Delay Time
Sets a delay time for starting current error (SE2). SE2 is detected when the drive output current is below 25% after the
Up/Down command has been entered and the brake release time and the time set to S6-02 have both passed. The brake
control command will not be issued (brake stays applied).

S6-02 Starting Current Error (SE2) Detection Delay Time 0.00 to [S1-04 - S1-06] 200 ms
■ S6-04: Output Current Error (SE3) Detection Delay Time

Sets a delay time for detecting an output current fault (SE3). SE3 is detected when the drive output current drops below
25% after the brake has released.

S6-04 Output Current Error (SE3) Detection Delay Time 0 to 5000 ms 200 ms
■ S6-05: Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time

Sets a delay time for detecting a brake response error (SE4). SE4 is detected when an output terminal set for “Brake
release” (H2- = 50) and an input terminal set for “Brake feedback” (H1- = 79) do not match for the time set to
S6-05.
& Operation

S6-05 Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time 0 to 10000 ms 500 ms
■ S6-10: Overacceleration Detection Level

4
If the elevator car accelerates at an abnormal rate, the drive triggers an overacceleration fault (dv6) and the motor coasts
to stop. Parameter S6-10 determines the acceleration rate that triggers the dv6 fault. A setting of 0.0 m/s2 disables
overacceleration detection.

S6-10 Overacceleration Detection Level 0.0 to 20.0 m/s2 1.5 m/s2 <1>
<1> Default setting is determined by parameter o1-03. If o1-03 is set to 0 through 5, the default is 1.5 m/s2. If o1-03 is set to 6, the default is 5.0 ft/
s2 (setting range: 0.0 to 50.0 ft/s2).

■ S6-11: Overacceleration Detection Time

Sets the time that the acceleration must exceed the overacceleration detection level before as fault is triggered.

S6-11 Overacceleration Detection Time 0 to 5000 ms 50 ms
■ S6-12: Overacceleration Detection Selection

Determines the conditions for detecting an overacceleration situation.

S6-12 Overacceleration Detection Selection 0 or 1 0
0: Always enabled
1: During run only
■ S6-15: Speed Reference Loss Detection
Enabled or disables detection for missing speed reference (FrL).

S6-15 Speed Reference Loss Detection 0 or 1 1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
■ S6-16: Restart after Baseblock Selection
Allows the drive to restart the motor after returning to normal operation from Baseblock state (H1- = 8/9) or from
Safe Torque-Off state (Safe Disable inputs H1 and H2 enabled) while the Up/Down command is still active.

S6-16 Restart after Baseblock Selection 0 or 1 0
0: No restart after Baseblock or Safe Torque-Off

Do not restart the motor when leaving the Baseblock or Safe Torque-Off state even if an Up/Down command is still
active.
1: Restart after Baseblock or Safe Torque-Off
Restart when the Up/Down command is still active while the Baseblock or Safe Torque-Off state is left. To use this
function with the Safe Disable function, parameter L8-88 must be set to 1.
■ Rescue Operation
In the event of a power outage, Rescue Operation allows the elevator to travel to the nearest floor by switching to a
backup battery or UPS (Uninterruptable Power Supply) for power.
An input terminal set for Rescue Operation (H1- = 55) can be used to initiate Rescue Operation. During Rescue
Operation, the drive uses the speed reference set in d1-25 to travel to the nearest floor.
NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. Do not use the Rescue Operation feature for extended periods. Failure to comply may result in drive heat
sink overtemperature alarms (oH).
NOTICE: When changing parameters while the drive is supplied from the rescue operation power supply, wait at least 5 s after entering
parameters before switching off the power supply. Instantly switching off the power can cause parameter settings corruption that can
only be resolved by initializing the drive. This may cause erroneous drive performance.

Drive Power Supply for Rescue Operation

There are various methods of supplying power to the drive for rescue operation. Independent of the chosen method, the
voltage in the DC bus of the drive and the voltage supplied to the drive control circuit must meet the specifications
provided in Table 30.
The DC bus voltage can either be supplied by a battery connected to the DC bus terminals of the drive or by a UPS
connected to drive terminals L1 and L2. The control circuit voltage can be supplied directly from the drives DC bus (no
external wiring required), from an external battery (connection to CN19), or by using an optional 24 Vdc control power
backup unit.
When using a single-phase AC power supply for rescue operation such as a single-phase UPS, the ripple in the DC bus
voltage will be higher than with a three-phase or battery supply. Make sure that the DC bus voltage never falls below the
minimum value listed in Table 30.
When using a PM motor with an incremental PG encoder and a PG-X3 option card, always perform Initial Magnet Pole
Search Parameters Auto-Tuning (T2-01=3) with the normal power supply connected. The tuning function will prepare the
drive for Rescue Operation by automatically setting certain parameters. If the tuning ends with an “End8” to “End10”
fault, then rescue operation will require a battery or UPS that supplies the drive DC bus with at least 280 Vdc for 200 V
class drives and 560 Vdc for 400 V class drives. Alternatively utilize to an absolute PG encoder and a PG-E3 or PG-F3
option card.
Table 30 Power Supply Ratings for Rescue Operation
Motor Type Speed Feedback DC Bus Voltage Control Circuit Voltage
Incremental PG Encoder with 200 V class drives: 48 to 340 Vdc
Induction Motor
PG-X3 option card 400 V class drives: 96 to 680 Vdc
Incremental PG Encoder with
PG-X3 option card When supplied from a battery or the drive DC bus:
200 V class drives: 280 to 340 Vdc
“End8” to “End10” error occurs
400 V class drives: 560 to 680 Vdc 200 V class drives: 250 to 340 Vdc
during Initial Magnet Pole 400 V class drives: 280 to 680 V (recommended:
Search Auto-Tuning 500 to 680 Vdc)
Permanent Magnet Incremental PG Encoder with
Motor PG-X3 option card When supplied via a 24 Vdc control power backup
200 V class drives: 72 to 340 Vdc unit:
No error occurs during Initial
400 V class drives: 144 to 680 Vdc 200 V and 400 V class drives: 24 Vdc
Magnet Pole Search Auto-
Tuning
Absolute PG Encoder with PG- 200 V class drives: 48 to 340 Vdc
F3 or PG-E3 option card 400 V class drives: 96 to 680 Vdc
Parameter Setup
Adjust drive parameters as described below when using Rescue Operation.

• Select the type of Rescue Operation power supply for the drives main circuit in parameter S4-06.
& Operation
• When using a UPS, set the UPS power value to parameter S4-07. Use parameter S4-08 to decide if the Rescue
Operation speed shall be limited automatically depending on the UPS power.
• If deterioration of the battery or UPS shall be detected, also set up parameters S4-12 and S4-13. Measure the DC bus
voltage during operation using the rescue power supply and set the measured value to parameter S4-12. Set the
deterioration detection level to parameter S4-13. 4
• Set parameters S4-01 to S4-04 if light load direction search shall be automatically performed when Rescue Operation is
started.

Wiring Examples
Switching the main power supply to a battery or UPS requires magnetic contactors that must be controlled by an external
controller. Wiring methods and the sequence used for the magnetic contactors depend on the application. This instruction
manual describes the following configurations:
• A single-phase, 230 V UPS is used as backup power supply for a 200 V or 400 V class drive.
• Two separate batteries for the main power and control power supplies. Main power battery voltage is below 250 Vdc for
200 V class drives or 500 Vdc for 400 V class drives.
• Two separate batteries. One is used for the main power supply, a second battery supplies the controller via an optional
24 V Backup Power Supply Unit.
• A single battery with minimum 250 Vdc for 200 V class drives or 500 Vdc for 400 V class drives is used for the main
and control power supply.
Select the configuration that matches your application. Follow the corresponding instructions for wiring and drive
settings. For configurations not covered in the list above, contact your Magnetek representative or our sales office directly
for consultation.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Never remove or install option cards or
attempt to replace the cooling fan while the drive is switched on. Make sure that the drive and all devices connected to the drive have
been shut off prior to performing and type of maintenance or wiring. After shutting off the power, wait for at least the amount of time
specified on the drive before touching any components or perform wiring. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power
supply is turned off.
NOTICE: Be sure to thoroughly read the instructions for wiring and magnetic contactor sequence described in this section before
setting up the drive for Rescue Operation. Failure to follow these instructions can damage the drive.
NOTICE: Refrain from using Rescue Operation for extend periods of time. Rescue Operation uses a low DC bus voltage, which can
cause the cooling fan to shut off temporarily during Rescue Operation. Continuing to operate under these conditions can trigger an
overheat fault and damage the drive.
Using a Single-Phase, 230 Vac UPS (Uninterruptable Power Supply)
Follow the instructions when using a single-phase 230 V UPS for Rescue Operation. A 230 V UPS can be used for both
200 V and 400 V class drives.
Wiring
Refer to Figure 48 for a wiring diagram.
Figure 43
Elevator L1000A
control Magnetic
system B2
Contactor A
N UPS
sine wave
230 Vac
single-phase +1
+2 U/T1
R/L1
L1 V/T2
S/L2
L2 W/T3
T/L3
L3
Magnetic -
Contactor B
Power supply Control
circuit
CN19
1
4
H1-‫ = غغ‬55 S3 to S8
(Rescue Operation) SC
Magnetic Contactor Sequence

Magnetic Contactor B
Magnetic Contactor A
H1-‫ = غغ‬55
(Rescue Operation)
Figure 48 Using a Single-Phase 230 V UPS

Operation Sequence
Starting Rescue Operation
1. Open contactor B.
2. Set the input terminal programmed for Rescue Operation (H1- = 55).
3. Close contactor A.
4. Set the Up/Down command.
Ending Rescue Operation
1. After the car has stopped open contactor A.
2. Clear the input terminal set for Rescue Operation (H1- = 55).
3. Close contactor B to return to operation with normal power supply.
Application Precautions
The drive may fault on a control power supply fault (Uv2) if the UPS can’t provide enough voltage, or if the Light Load
Direction Search is not set properly. If this problem occurs, take the following corrective actions:
Corrective Action:
• Use a separate battery for the controller power supply.
• Use a battery with a voltage higher than 250 Vdc for 200 V class drives or 500 Vdc for 400 V class drives and connect
it to the control power supply input (CN19). Alternatively use a 24 Vdc battery and an optional 24 V Backup Power
Supply Unit.
• Enable Light Load Direction Search (S4-01 = 1).
& Operation

Using Separate Batteries for DC Bus and Control Power Supply, DC Bus Battery under 250 Vdc (500 Vdc)
Follow these instructions when using separate batteries for Rescue Operation with the battery for the DC bus having a
lower voltage than 250 Vdc for 200 V class drives and 500 Vdc for 400V class drives.
Wiring
Follow the wiring diagram shown in Figure 49. When connecting the battery for the control power supply to the L1000A,
use the 1.1 m cable packaged with the product. The connector cover must first be removed in order to access connection
port CN19 for the battery. Refer to Connecting the Drive and Battery on page 101 for details.
Figure 44
L1000A
B2
B1
+1
+2 U/T1
DC bus power supply
Battery for DC bus R/L1
L1 V/T2
48 to 340 Vdc
S/L2
96 to 680 Vdc L2 W/T3
T/L3
L3
Magnetic Contactor B -
Control
Magnetic Contactor C Power supply
CN19 circuit
Battery for 1
control circuit
250 to 340 Vdc
(500 to 680 Vdc 4
H1-‫ = غغ‬55 S3∼S8


5s 0.5 s
Magnetic Contactor C
H1-‫ = غغ‬55
(Rescue Operation)
Figure 49 Wiring Two Batteries for DC Bus and Control Power Supply (DC Bus Battery is less than 250 V)
Operation Sequence
1. Open contactor B and wait at least 5 seconds.
3. Close contactors A and C.
1. After the car has stopped, open contactors A and C.
3. Wait at least 0.5 s and then close contactor B to return to operation with normal power supply.

Using a Battery for the DC Bus and 24 V Power Supply Unit Option for the Control Circuit
Follow the instructions when using a 24 V Power Supply Unit option for the control circuit and a battery for the main
circuit. The main circuit battery voltage must be higher than 48 Vdc for 200 V class drives and 96 Vdc for 400 V class
drives.
Wiring
Magnetek offers a 24 V Power Supply Option for the control circuit that is useful in applications unable to connect to a
backup battery greater than 250 V. Wiring instructions can be found in Figure 50. For a more detailed explanation of the
24 V Power Supply Option, refer to the manual provided with the option.
Figure 45
L1000A
B2
B1
+1
DC bus power supply +2 U/T1

R/L1
L1 V/T2
Battery for DC bus S/L2
L2 W/T3
48 to 340 Vdc
96 to 680 Vdc T/L3
L3
Control
Magnetic Contactor C Power supply
CN19 circuit
Battery for 24 V 1
control circuit Power
Supply
24 Vdc 4
Unit
S3∼S8
H1-‫ = غغ‬55

5s 0.5 s
Magnetic Contactor C
H1-‫ = غغ‬55
(Rescue Operation)
Figure 50 Using a Battery for the DC Bus and 24 V Power Supply Unit Option for the Control Circuit
Operation Sequence
Starting Rescued Operation
& Operation
1. Open contactor B and wait at least 5 seconds.

3. Close contactors A and C.
4
1. After the car has stopped, open contactors A and C.
3. Wait at least 0.5 s and then close contactor B to return to operation with normal power supply.

Using a Single Battery with Minimum 250 Vdc (500 Vdc)

Follow the instructions when using one battery to supply both, main circuit and controller. The battery voltage must be at
least 250 Vdc for 200 V class drives or 500 Vdc for 400 V class drives.
Wiring
Following the wiring diagram show in Figure 51.
Figure 46
L1000A
B2
B1
DC bus power supply U/T1

Battery for DC bus R/L1
L1 V/T2
250 to 340 Vdc S/L2
500 to 680 Vdc L2 W/T3
L3 T/L3
Power supply Control
CN19 circuit
1
H1-‫ = غغ‬55 S3∼S8


H1-‫ = غغ‬55
(Rescue Operation)
Figure 51 Using a Backup Battery With Minimum 250 Vdc (500 Vdc)
Operation Sequence
1. Open contactor B.
3. Close contactor A.
1. After the car has stopped, open contactor A.
3. Close contactor B to return to operation with normal power supply.
Connecting the Drive and Battery

Use the 1.1 m cable packaged with the drive to connect the battery. Remove the connector covering port CN19 before
connecting the cable to CN19.
Information on battery power ratings can be found in Table 30.
Note: The connector port location and angle vary by drive model.
DANGER! Switch off the power supply before wiring and connecting the battery cable. Failure to comply will lead to death or serious
injury from electric shock.
Battery Connections for CIMR-LU2A0008 to 2A0075, CIMR-LU4A0005 to 4A0039

1. Insert the tip of a screwdriver into the opening on the edge of the CN19 connector cover. Slide the cover off the
drive as indicated in Figure 52.
NOTICE: A straight-edge screwdriver should be inserted into the opening provided on the connector cover at the proper angle.
Attempting to insert the screwdriver blade at a different angle could damage the drive.
Figure 47
Press inwards on the tab and

slide the connector cover in the
direction indicated by the arrow.
Figure 52 Removing the Connector Cover

2. Connect the cable provided to the CN19 port.
NOTICE: Be sure that the connector fastens at the correct angle to the drive port. The incorrect angle could damage the battery, cable,
or connector.
Figure 48
Port CN19
& Operation
4
Press in on the connector
clip to plug in the cable.
Figure 53 Connecting the Cable
3. Use a pair of diagonal cutters to cut an opening in the connector cover that allows the cable to pass through. The
cable should pass through the connector cover with the cover fastened to the drive.
Figure 49
Cut an opening to allow the

battery cable to pass through.
Figure 54 Reattaching the Connector Cover (1)

4. Slide the connector cover back into place as shown in Figure 55.
NOTICE: Make sure the cable does not get pinched between the drive and the connector cover, as this could damage the cable.
Figure 50
Figure 55 Reattaching the Connector Cover (2)

Figure 51
Connect
to battery.
Figure 56 Drive and Battery Connection Complete
Models CIMR-LU2A0085 to 2A0415, CIMR-LU4A0045 to 4A0260

1. Use a Phillips screwdriver (M4) to loosen the screw holding the CN19 connector cover in place.
Figure 52
Screw
Connector
cover
Phillips screwdriver (M4)
Figure 57 Removing the CN19 Connector Cover

2. Slide the CN19 connector cover from the drive as shown in Figure 58.
Figure 53
Figure 58 Sliding the CN19 Connector Cover

3. Insert a straight-edge screwdriver into the opening as shown in Figure 59, then remove the CN19 connector
cover by sliding it as shown in Figure 59.
Figure 54
& Operation
Figure 59 Removing the CN19 Connector Cover

4
4. Connect the cable to the CN19 connector port on the drive.

Note: The connector port location and angle vary by drive model.
NOTICE: Be sure that the connector fastens at the correct angle to the CN19 connector port. The incorrect angle could damage the
battery, cable, or connector.
Figure 55
Port CN19
Battery cable
Figure 60 Connecting the Cable

5. The cable should pass through the connector cover with the cover fastened to the drive.
Figure 56
Figure 61 Reattaching the CN19 Connector Cover

6. Slide the CN19 connector cover back into place as shown in Figure 62.
NOTICE: Make sure the cable does not get pinched between the drive and the CN19 connector cover, as this could damage the cable.
Figure 57
Downward Leftward
Figure 62 Sliding the CN19 Connector Cover into Place
7. Use a Phillips screwdriver (M4) to fasten the screw that holds the CN19 connector cover in place.
NOTICE: Use the screw provided to fasten the connector cover into place. Using a different screw may damage the internal drive
components.
Figure 58
Figure 63 Reattaching the CN19 Connector Cover

Figure 59
Connect
to battery
Figure 64 Drive and Battery CN19 Connection Complete

Rescue Operation Torque Limit
The Torque Limit During Rescue Operation is set in parameter S4-05. After Rescue Operation is complete, the drive
utilizes to the torque limits set in the L7 parameters.
Light Load Direction Search Function
Light Load Direction Search can be used to automatically perform Rescue Operation in the direction with the lower load.
It can help to minimize the amount of power required by the backup power supply required for Rescue Operation. Light
Load Direction Search can be set so that it is automatically performed when Rescue Operation is started. To enable Light
Load Direction Search set parameter S4-01 = 1.
& Operation
When Light Load Direction Search is enabled the drive first runs in the up and then in the down direction, each for the
time set to S4-03. It then compares the load condition of both operations and travels to the next floor using the lighter load
condition direction. The speed reference used for Light Load Direction Search can be set in parameter S4-04.
4
• When the lightest load direction is up, the drive stops after Light Load Direction Search and then accelerates upwards to
the Rescue Operation speed set in parameter d1-25. The output terminals set for “Light Load Direction” (H2- = 54)
and “Light Load Direction detection status”(H2- = 55) will close.
Figure 60
H1-‫ = غغ‬55 Off (open) On (closed)

(Rescue Operation)
Up/Down command Off (open) On (closed)
Speed agree torque calculations
Up command (internal) Up Up
Down command (internal) Down

Elevator moves in the
direction of the light load
H2- = 55 Off (open) On (closed)
㧔Light Load Direction Search status㧕

㧔Light load direction㧕
Figure 65 Light Load Direction Detection (Up)

• When the lightest direction is down, then after Light Load Direction Detection is finished the drive immediately
accelerates to the Rescue Operation speed set in d1-25 without stopping. An output terminal set for “Light load
direction” (H2- = 54) will stay open, and an output terminal set for “Light Load Direction detection status”(H2-
 = 55) will close.
Figure 61
H1-‫ = غغ‬55 Off (open) On (closed)

(Rescue Operation)
Up/Down command Off (open) On (closed)
Speed agree torque calculations
Up command (internal) Up
Down command (internal) Down

Elevator moves in the
direction of the light load
㧔Light Load Direction Search status㧕
H2- = 54 Off (open)

㧔Light load direction㧕
Figure 66 Light Load Direction Detection (Down)
◆ Setup Troubleshooting and Possible Solutions

This section describes troubleshooting problems that do not trip an alarm or fault.
Symptom Page
Cannot Change Parameter Settings 107
Motor Does Not Rotate 108
Motor Does Not Rotate Properly after Pressing RUN Button
Motor Rotates in the Opposite Direction from the Up/Down
or after Entering External Up/Down Command 108
Command
Motor Gets Too Hot 109
Drive Does Not Allow Selection of Rotational Auto-Tuning 109
Noise From Drive or Output Lines When the Drive is Powered On 109
■ Cannot Change Parameter Settings
Cause Possible Solutions

The drive is running the motor (i.e., the Up/Down • Stop the drive and switch over to the Programming Mode.
command is present). • Most parameters cannot be edited during run.
The Access Level is set to restrict access to
• Set the Access Level to allow parameters to be edited (A1-01 = 2).
parameter settings.
• Verify the digital operator mode, Drive or Programming mode?
The operator is not in the Parameter Setup Mode. • Switch to the Programming Mode. Refer to The Drive and Programming Modes on
page 52.
• If the password entered to A1-04 does not match the password saved to A1-05, then drive
settings cannot be changed.
• Reset the password.
If the password is unknown:
The wrong password was entered.
• Scroll to A1-04. Press STOP and press at the same time. Parameter A1-05 will
appear.
• Set a new password to parameter A1-05.
• Check the drive main input voltage by looking at the DC bus voltage (U1-07).
Undervoltage was detected.
• Check all main circuit wiring.
& Operation
■ Motor Does Not Rotate Properly after Pressing RUN Button or after Entering External Up/
Down Command
Motor Does Not Rotate

• Check if the DRV on the digital operator is displayed.
The drive is not in the Drive Mode.
• Enter the Drive Mode. Refer to The Drive and Programming Modes on page 52.
Stop the drive and check if the correct frequency reference source is selected. If the digital
operator is the source, the LO/RE button LED must be on. If the source is REMOTE, it must
be off.
The button is enabled (o2-01=1) and was Take the following steps to solve the problem:
pushed.
• Push the button.
• o2-01 is set to 0 by default, i.e. the LO/RE button is disabled.
• When Auto-Tuning completes, the drive is switched back to the Programming Mode. The
Up/Down command will not be accepted unless the drive is in the Drive Mode.
Auto-Tuning has just completed.
• Use the digital operator to enter the Drive Mode. Refer to The Drive and Programming
Modes on page 52.
A Fast Stop was executed and is not reset. Reset the Fast Stop command.
Check parameter b1-02 (Up/Down Command Selection).
Set b1-02 so that it corresponds with the correct Up/Down command source.
Settings are incorrect for the source that provides 0: Digital operator
the Up/Down command. 1: Control circuit terminal (default setting)
2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
3: Option card
• Check the wiring for the control terminal.
There is faulty wiring in the control circuit
• Correct wiring mistakes.
terminals.
• Check the input terminal status monitor (U1-10).
Check parameter b1-01 (Speed Reference Selection).
Set b1-01 to the correct source of the speed reference.
0: Digital operator
The speed reference source setting is incorrect.
1: Control circuit terminal (default setting)
3: Option card
The settings for the analog speed reference are Check the settings (signal level, function, bias, gain) for the analog input that supplies the
incorrect. speed reference.
Selection for the sink/source mode and the internal/ Check the position of the jumper and setting for S3. Refer to Control I/O Configuration on
external power supply is incorrect. page 44
• Check the speed reference monitor (U1-01).
• Increase the speed reference above the minimum output speed (E1-09).
Speed reference is too low. • Make sure speed references are set properly and the speed selection works properly. If
using an analog signal make sure the input signal is present at the time the Up/Down
command is issued.
The brake does not release or motor contactor is not
Check the brake and motor contactor sequence.
closed.
The button is enabled (o2-02=1) and was • When the

STOP STOP button is pressed, the drive will decelerate to stop.
pressed when the drive was started from a • Switch off the Up/Down command and then re-enter a new Up/Down command.
REMOTE source. • o2-02 is set to 0 by default, i.e. the Stop button is disabled.
Motor Rotates in the Opposite Direction from the Up/Down Command

Phase wiring between the drive and motor is Check the motor wiring. Perform the steps described in Motor Rotation Direction Setup on
incorrect. page 57 and PG Encoder Setup on page 57.
Drive control circuit terminals for the Up and Down • Check the control circuit wiring.
commands are switched. • Correct any fault wiring.
■ Motor is Too Hot

If the load is too heavy for the motor, the motor will overheat as it exceeds its rated torque
value for an extended period of time.
Keep in mind that the motor also has a short-term overload rating in addition to the possible
solutions provided below:
• Reduce the load.
The load is too heavy.
• Lower the acceleration and deceleration ramps. (Increase the acceleration time and
deceleration time)
• Check the values set for the motor protection (L1-01, L1-02) as well as the motor rated
current (E2-01).
• Increase motor capacity.
• Check the ambient temperature.
The air around the motor is too hot.
• Cool the area until it is within the specified temperature range.
• Perform Auto-Tuning.
The drive is operating in a vector control mode but
• Calculate the motor value and reset the motor parameters.
Auto-Tuning has not yet been performed.
• Change the motor control method to V/f Control (A1-02 = 0).
When the motor cable is long, high voltage surges occur between the motor coils and drive
switching.
Insufficient voltage insulation between motor Normally, surges can reach up to three times the drive input power supply voltage.
phases. • Use a motor with a voltage tolerance higher than the max voltage surge.
• Install an AC reactor on the output side of the drive. Make sure the output reactor can
handle frequencies in the range of the drive carrier frequency.
The motor fan has stopped or is clogged. Check the motor fan.
■ Drive Does Not Allow Selection the Desired Auto-Tuning Mode

The desired Auto-Tuning mode is not available for • Check if the desired tuning mode is available for the selected control mode.
the selected control mode. • Change the motor control method by setting A1-02.
■ Electrical Noise From Drive or Output Lines When the Drive is Operating

• Lower the carrier frequency (C6-03).
• Install a noise filter on the input side of drive input power.
• Install a noise filter on the output side of the drive.
PWM switching in the drive generates excessive
• Place the wiring inside a metal conduit to shield it from switching noise.
noise.
• Ground the drive and motor properly.
• Separate the main circuit wiring and the control lines.
• Make sure wires and the motor have been properly grounded.
& Operation
5 Troubleshooting
5 Troubleshooting
◆ Fault Detection
■ Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Faults are detected for drive protection, and cause the drive to stop while triggering the fault output terminal MA-MB-
MC. Remove the cause of the fault and manually clear the fault before attempting to run the drive again.
Table 31 Detailed Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Digital Operator Display Fault Name
Braking Transistor Overload
boL
The braking transistor has reached its overload level.
Option Communication Error
bUS • The connection was lost after establishing initial communication.
• Only detected when the Up/Down command speed reference is assigned to an option card.
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error
CE Communication data was not received for the amount of time set in parameter, H5-09
Communication Fault Detection Time.
Control Fault
CF The torque limit was reached continuously for three seconds or longer while ramping to stop in OLV
Control.
or
CPF00 or CPF01 Control Circuit Error
<1>
A/D Conversion Error

CPF02
An A/D conversion error or control circuit error occurred.
Control Board Connection Error
CPF03
Connection error between the control board and the drive
EEPROM Memory Data Error
CPF06
An error in the data saved to EEPROM
CPF07
Terminal Board Connection Error
CPF08
to ,
CPF11 to CPF14,
to Control Circuit Error
CPF16 to CPF21
<1>
CPF22 Hybrid IC Failure

Control Board Connection Error
CPF23
Connection error between the control board and the drive
Drive Unit Signal Fault
CPF24 The drive capacity cannot be detected correctly (drive capacity is checked when the drive is powered
up).
CPF25 Terminal Board not Connected
Control Circuit Error
to CPF26 to CPF34
CPU error
A/D Conversion Error
CPF35
An A/D conversion error or control circuit error occurred.
Speed Deviation (for Control Mode with Encoder)
dEv The deviation between the speed reference and speed feedback is greater than the setting in F1-10 for
longer than the time set to F1-11.
Encoder Z Pulse Fault
dv1
The motor turned one full rotation without the Z Pulse being detected.
110 MAGNETEK Magnetek L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide
5 Troubleshooting

Z Pulse Noise Fault Detection
dv2 The Z pulse is out of phase by more than 5 degrees for the number of times specified in parameter
F1-17.
Inversion Detection
dv3 The torque reference and acceleration are in opposite directions and the speed reference and actual
motor speed differ by over 30% for the number of times set to F1-18.
Inversion Prevention Detection
Pulses indicate that the motor is rotating in the opposite direction of the speed reference. Set the
dv4 number of pulses to trigger inverse detection to F1-19.
Note: Set F1-19 to 0 to disable inverse detection in applications where the motor may rotate in the
opposite direction of the speed reference.
Overacceleration Detection
dv6
The acceleration of the elevator car exceeds the overacceleration detection level (S6-10)
Rotor Polarity Detection Timeover
dv7
Unable to detect the magnetic poles within the designated time.
PM Rotor Position Estimation Error
dv8 An invalid value resulted from Initial Pole Search.
Note: Reset the fault and try Initial Pole Search again.
Option Card External Fault
EF0
An external fault condition is present.
External Fault (input terminal S3)
EF3
External fault at multi-function input terminal S3.
EF4
EF5
EF6
EF7
External fault at multi-function input terminal S7
EF8
External fault at multi-function input terminal S8
EEPROM Write Error
Err
Data cannot be written to the EEPROM.
Speed Reference Missing
FrL Parameter d1-18 is set to 3, leveling speed detection is not assigned to a digital input (H1- ≠ 53)
and no speed was selected while an Up or Down command was entered.
Ground Fault
GF
A current short to ground exceeded 50% of rated current on the output side of the drive.
Troubleshooting
Output Phase Loss

LF • Phase loss on the output side of the drive.
• Setting L8-07 to 1 or 2 enables Phase Loss Detection.
Output Current Imbalance (detected when L8-29 = 1)
LF2
One or more of the phases in the output current is lost.
Overcurrent 5
oC
Drive sensors have detected an output current greater than the specified overcurrent level.
Option Card Connection Error at Option Connector CN5-A, Option Card Fault at Option Connector
oFA00 CN5-A
Option compatibility error
Option Card Fault at Option Connector CN5-A
oFA01
Option not properly connected
MAGNETEK Magnetek L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide 111
5 Troubleshooting

, oFA05, oFA06
, oFA10, oFA11
Option card error occurred at option port CN5-A
to oFA12 to oFA17
to oFA30 to oFA43
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-B
oFb00
oFb01
oFb02
Same type of option card already connected
to oFb03 to oFb11
Option card error occurred at Option Port CN5-B
to oFb12 to oFb17
Option Card Connection Error at Option Port CN5-C
oFC00
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-C
oFC01
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-C
oFC02 A maximum of two PG option boards can be used simultaneously. Remove the PG option board
installed into option port CN5-A.
to oFC03 to oFC11
Option card error occurred at option port CN5-C
to oFC12 to oFC17
Encoder Option AD Conversion Error
oFC50
Error with the A/D conversion level (VCC level), or A/D conversion timed out.
Encoder Option Analog Circuit Error
oFC51
Incorrect signal level (+2.5 V signal)
Encoder Communication Timeout
oFC52
Signal encoder timed out waiting to receive data
Encoder Communication Data Error
oFC53
Serial encoder CRC checksum error
Encoder Error
oFC54 Alarm reading EnDat absolute position data from encoder
(OR flag from EnDat error for overvoltage, undervoltage, etc.)
Heatsink Overheat
oH The temperature of the heatsink exceeded the overheat pre-alarm level set to L8-02. Default value
for L8-02 is determined by drive capacity (o2-04).
Heatsink Overheat
oH1 The temperature of the heatsink exceeded the drive overheat level. The overheat level is determined
by drive capacity (o2-04).
Motor Overload
oL1
The electronic motor overload protection tripped.
Drive Overload
oL2
The thermal sensor of the drive triggered overload protection.
Overtorque Detection 1
oL3 The current has exceeded the value set for torque detection (L6-02) for longer than the allowable
time (L6-03).
oL4 The current has exceeded the value set for Overtorque Detection 2 (L6-05) for longer than the
allowable time (L6-06).
External Digital Operator Connection Fault
• The external operator has been disconnected from the drive.
oPr Note: An oPr fault will occur when all of the following conditions are true:
• Output is interrupted when the operator is disconnected (o2-06 = 1).
• The Up/Down command is assigned to the operator (b1-02 = 0 and LOCAL has been selected).
5 Troubleshooting

Overspeed
oS
The motor speed feedback exceeded the F1-08 setting.
DC Bus Overvoltage
Voltage in the DC bus has exceeded the overvoltage detection level.
ov
• For 200 V class: approximately 410 V
Input Phase Loss
PF Drive input power has an open phase or has a large imbalance of voltage between phases. Detected
when L8-05 = 1 (enabled).
PF5 Rescue Operation Power Supply Deterioration Error
Encoder Disconnected (for Control Mode with Encoder)
PGo
No encoder pulses are received for longer than the time set to F1-14.
Encoder Disconnected (detected when using an encoder)
PGoH
Encoder cable is not connected properly.
Braking Resistor Fault
rF
The resistance of the braking resistor being used is too low.
Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault
rr
The built-in dynamic braking transistor failed.
IGBT Short Circuit
SC
Short Circuit or Ground Fault is detected
Motor Contactor Response Error
SE1
Motor contactor does not respond within the time set to S1-10 (Run Command Delay Time).
Starting Current Error
SE2
The output current was lower than 25% of the motor no-load current at start.
Output Current Error
SE3
The output current was lower than 25% of the motor no-load current during operation.
Brake Feedback Error
SE4 The input terminal set for “Brake feedback” (H1- = 79) did not respond within the SE4 error
time set to S6-05 after an output terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50) closed.
Position Lock Error
SvE
Position deviation during Position Lock.
Undertorque Detection 1
UL3 The current has fallen below the minimum value set for torque detection (L6-02) for longer than the
UL4 The current has fallen below the minimum value set for torque detection (L6-05) for longer than the
DC Bus Undervoltage
One of the following conditions occurred while the drive was running:
Troubleshooting
Uv1 • Voltage in the DC bus fell below the undervoltage detection level (L2-05)
• For 400 V class: approximately 380 V (350 V when E1-01 is less than 400)
Control Power Supply Voltage Fault
Uv2
Voltage is too low for the control drive input power.
Soft-Charge Bypass Circuit Fault
Uv3
The soft-charge bypass circuit failed.
5
Output Voltage Detection Error
voF
Problem detected with the voltage on the output side of the drive.
<1> Displayed as or when occurring at drive power up. When one of the faults occurs after successfully starting the drive, the display
will show or .
5 Troubleshooting
◆ Alarm Detection
■ Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Alarms are drive protection functions that do not necessarily cause the drive to stop. Once the cause of an alarm is
removed, the drive will return to the same status as before the alarm occurred.
When an alarm has been triggered, the ALM light on the digital operator display blinks and the alarm code display
flashes. If a multi-function output is set for an alarm (H2- = 10), that output terminal will be triggered for certain
alarms.
Note: If a multi-function output is set to close when an alarm occurs (H2- = 10), it will also close when maintenance periods are
reached, triggering alarms LT-1 through LT-4 (triggered only if H2- = 2F).
Table 32 Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name
Communication Option Node ID Setting Error (CANopen)
AEr
Option card node address is outside the acceptable setting range.
Baseblock
bb
Drive output interrupted as indicated by an external baseblock signal.
Braking Transistor Overload
boL
The braking transistor in the drive has been overloaded.
Option Communication Error
bUS • After initial communication was established, the connection was lost.
• Assign a Up/Down command or speed reference to the option card.
Serial Communication Stand By
CALL
Communication has not yet been established.
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error
CE
Control data was not received correctly for two seconds.
CrST Cannot Reset
Speed Deviation (when using a PG option card)
dEv The deviation between the speed reference and speed feedback is greater than the setting in F1-10 for
longer than the time in F1-11.
Up/Down Command Error
EF
Both forward run and reverse run closed simultaneously for over 0.5 s.
Option Card External Fault
EF0
An external fault condition is present.
External fault (input terminal S3)
EF3
EF4
EF5
EF6
EF7
EF8
Safe Disable Circuit Fault Signal (H1-HC, H2-HC) Release
Hbb
Both Safe Disable Input channels are open.
Safe Disable Circuit Fault Signal (H1-HC, H2-HC) Release
HbbF
One Safe Disable channel is open while the other one is closed.
5 Troubleshooting
Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name

High Current Alarm
HCA
Drive current exceeded overcurrent warning level (150% of the rated current).
Cooling Fan Maintenance Time
LT-1 The cooling fan has reached its expected maintenance period and may need to be replaced.
Note: An alarm output (H2- = 10) will only be triggered if H2- = 2F.
Capacitor Maintenance Time
LT-2 The main circuit and control circuit capacitors are nearing the end of their expected performance life.
Soft Charge Bypass Relay Maintenance Time
LT-3 The DC bus soft charge relay is nearing the end of its expected performance life.
IGBT Maintenance Time (90%)
LT-4 IGBTs have reached 90% of their expected performance life.
Heatsink Overheat
oH The temperature of the heatsink exceeded the overheat pre-alarm level set to L8-02 (90-100°C). Default
value for L8-02 is determined by drive capacity (o2-04).
oL3 Drive output current (or torque in OLV, CLV, CLV/PM) was greater than L6-02 for longer than the time
set in L6-03.
oL4 Drive output current (or torque in OLV, CLV, CLV/PM) was greater than L6-05 for longer than the time
set in L6-06.
Overspeed (for Control Mode with Encoder)
oS
The motor speed feedback exceeded the F1-08 setting.
DC Bus Overvoltage
The DC bus voltage exceeded the trip point.
ov
For 200 V class: approximately 410 V
For 400 V class: approximately 820 V
PASS MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Test Mode Complete
Encoder Disconnected (for Control Mode with Encoder)
PGo
Detected when no encoder signal is received for a time longer than setting in F1-14.
Encoder Disconnected (detected when using an encoder)
PGoH
Encoder cable has become disconnected.
SE MEMOBUS/Modbus Self Test Failed
IGBT Maintenance Time (90%)
TrPC IGBTs have reached 90% of their expected performance life.
Note: This alarm will not trigger a multi-function output terminal that is set for alarm output (H2- =
10).
Troubleshooting
UL3
Drive output current (or torque in OLV, CLV, CLV/PM) less than L6-02 for longer than L6-03 time.
UL4
Drive output current (or torque in OLV, CLV, CLV/PM) less than L6-05 for longer than L6-06 time.
Undervoltage
One of the following conditions was true when the drive was stopped and a Up/Down command was 5
entered:
Uv • DC bus voltage dropped below the level specified in L2-05.
• Contactor to suppress inrush current in the drive was opened.
• Low voltage in the control drive input power. This alarm outputs only if L2-01 is not 0 and DC bus
voltage is under L2-05.
Output Voltage Detection Error
voF
There is a problem with the output voltage.
5 Troubleshooting
◆ Operator Programming Errors

■ oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
An Operator Programming Error (oPE) occurs when a contradictory parameter is set or an individual parameter is set to
an inappropriate value.
The drive will not operate until the parameter or parameters causing the problem are set correctly. An oPE, however, does
not trigger an alarm or fault output. If an oPE occurs, investigate the cause and refer to Table 33 for the appropriate
action. When an oPE appears on the operator display, press the ENTER button to view U1-18 and see which parameter is
causing the oPE.
Table 33 oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Digital Operator Display Error Name
Drive Capacity Setting Fault
oPE01
Drive capacity and the value set to o2-04 do not match.
Parameter Range Setting Error
oPE02
Use U1-18 to find parameters set outside the range.
Multi-function Digital Input Selection Error
oPE03
A contradictory setting is assigned to multi-function contact inputs H1-03 to H1-08.
oPE04 Terminal Board Mismatch Error
oPE05 Reference Source Selection Error

Control Mode Selection Error
oPE06
Correct the setting for the control method.
Multi-function Analog Input Selection Error
oPE07
A contradictory setting is assigned to multi-function analog inputs H3-02 and H3-10.
Parameter Selection Error
oPE08
A function has been set that cannot be used in the motor control method selected.
V/f Pattern Setting Error
The following setting errors have occurred where:
oPE10
E1-04 is greater than or equal to E1-06, E1-06 is greater than or equal to E1-07, E1-07 is greater than or
equal to E1-09, or E1-09 is greater than or equal to E1-11.
oPE16 Energy Savings Constants Error
Parameter Setting Error, Online Tuning Parameter Setting Error
• The input from load cell with load condition 1 (S3-29) is set to the same value as load condition 2
oPE18 (S3-30).
• DWELL 2 related parameters are not set correctly.
• Parameters that control Online Tuning are not set correctly.
PG-F3 Setting Error
oPE20
The encoder signal frequency is too high.
Elevator Parameter Setting Fault
oPE21
Elevator parameters are not set correctly.
5 Troubleshooting
◆ Auto-Tuning Fault Detection

When the Auto-Tuning faults shown below are detected, the fault is displayed on the digital operator and the motor coasts
to a stop. Auto-Tuning faults do not trigger a multi-function terminal set for fault or alarm output.
An End error indicates that although Auto-Tuning has successfully completed, there is some discrepancy in the
calculations.
If an End error occurs, check for the cause of the error using the table below, and perform Auto-Tuning again after
fixing the problem. Start the application if no problem can be diagnosed despite the existence of the End error.
■ Auto-Tuning Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Table 34 Auto-Tuning Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Digital Operator Display Error Name
Excessive V/f Setting (detected only during Rotational Auto-Tuning, and displayed after Auto-Tuning
End1
is complete)
Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient (detected only during Rotational Auto-Tuning and displayed
End2
after Auto-Tuning is complete)
End3 Rated Current Setting Alarm (displayed after Auto-Tuning is complete)
End4 Adjusted Slip Calculation Error
End5 Resistance Tuning Error
End6 Leakage Inductance Alarm
End7 No-Load Current Alarm
End8 Rescue Operation Speed Warning
End9 Rescue Operation Rotor Pole Position Search Warning
End10 Rescue Operation Rotor Polarity Detection Warning
Er-01 Motor Data Error
Er-02 Alarm
Er-03 STOP Button Input
Er-04 Line-to-Line Resistance Error
Er-05 No-Load Current Error
Er-08 Rated Slip Error
Er-09 Acceleration Error

Er-10 Motor Direction Error
Er-11 Motor Speed Fault
Troubleshooting
Er-12 Current Detection Error
Er-13 Leakage Inductance Error

Er-18 Induction Voltage Error
Er-19 Inductance Error
5
Er-20 Stator Resistance Error
Er-21 Z Pulse Correction Error
Er-22 Initial Rotor Pole Search Error
Er-23 Non-rotating Encoder Offset Tuning Warning
5 Troubleshooting
◆ Copy Function Related Displays

■ Tasks, Errors, and Troubleshooting
The table below lists the messages and errors that may appear when using the Copy function.
When executing the tasks offered by the Copy function, the operator will indicate the task being performed. When an
error occurs, a code appears on the operator to indicate the error. Note that errors related to the Copy function do not
trigger a multi-function output terminal that has been set up to close when a fault or alarm occurs. To clear an error,
simply press any key on the operator and the error display will disappear.
Table 35 lists the corrective action that can be taken when an error occurs.
Note: 1. Whenever using the copy function, the drive should be fully stopped.
2. The drive will not accept an Up/Down command while the Copy function is being executed.
3. Parameters can only be saved to a drive when the voltage class, capacity, control mode, and software version match.
Table 35 Copy Function Task and Error Displays
Digital Operator Display Task
CoPy Writing Parameter Settings (flashing)
CPEr Control Mode Mismatch
CPyE Error Writing Data
CSEr Copy Unit Error
dFPS Drive Model Mismatch
ECE Copy Error
ECS Checksum Error
EdE Write Impossible
EiF Write Data Error
End Task Complete
EPE ID Mismatch
ErE Data Error
EvE Verify Error
iFEr Communication Error
ndAT Model, Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch
rdEr Error Reading Data
rEAd Reading Parameter Settings (flashing)
vAEr Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch
vFyE Parameter settings in the drive and those saved to the copy function are not the same
vrFy Comparing Parameter Settings (flashing)
5 Troubleshooting
■ Fault Reset Methods

When a fault occurs, the cause of the fault must be removed and the drive must be restarted. The table below lists the
different ways to restart the drive.
After the Fault Occurs Procedure

DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 ALARM
YEA_ - MODE - DRV

oC
Fix the cause of the fault, restart the

Overcurrent
Press on the digital operator when error FWD RESET
drive, and reset the fault F1 F2
code is displayed.
RESET
LO
ESC
RE
RESET ENTER
RUN STOP
Close then open the fault signal digital input via Drive
Resetting via Fault Reset Digital Fault Reset Switch
terminal S4. S4 is set for “Fault Reset” as S4 Fault Reset Digital Input
Input S4
default (H1-04 = 14). SC Digital Input Common
2 ON
If the above methods do not reset the fault, turn off the drive main power supply.
Reapply power after the digital operator display is out.
1 OFF
Note: If the Up/Down command is present, the drive will disregard any attempts to reset the fault. Remove the Up/Down command
before attempting to clear a fault situation.
Troubleshooting
6 Periodic Inspection & Maintenance

◆ Inspection
Power electronics have limited life and may exhibit changes in characteristics or performance deterioration after years of
use under normal conditions. To help avoid such problems, it is important to perform preventive maintenance and
periodic inspection on the drive.
Drives contain a variety of power electronics such as power transistors, semiconductors, capacitors, resistors, fans, and
relays. The electronics in the drive serve a critical role in maintaining proper motor control.
Follow the inspection lists provided in this chapter as a part of a regular maintenance program.
Note: The drive will require more frequent inspection if it is placed in harsh environments, such as:
• High ambient temperatures
• Frequent starting and stopping
• Fluctuations in the AC supply or load
• Excessive vibrations or shock loading
• Dust, metal dust, salt, sulfuric acid, chlorine atmospheres
• Poor storage conditions.
Perform the first equipment inspection one to two years after installation.
■ Recommended Daily Inspection
Table 36 outlines the recommended daily inspection for Magnetek drives. Check the following items on a daily basis to
avoid premature deterioration in performance or product failure. Copy this checklist and mark the “Checked” column
after each inspection.
Table 36 General Recommended Daily Inspection Checklist
Inspection Category Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked
• Check the load coupling.
Inspect for abnormal oscillation or noise coming
Motor • Measure motor vibration.
from the motor.
• Tighten all loose components.
Check for excessive load.
• Excessive load.
Inspect for abnormal heat generated from the drive or
• Loose connections.
motor and visible discoloration.
• Dirty heatsink or motor.
Cooling • Ambient temperature.
Check for the following:
Inspect drive cooling fan and circulation fan
• Clogged or dirty fan.
operation.
• Correct fan operation parameter setting.
Verify the drive environment complies with the
Eliminate the source of contaminants or correct
Environment specifications listed in Installation Environment on
poor environment.
page 17.
The drive output current should not be higher than Check for the following:
Load the motor or drive rating for an extended period of • Excessive load.
time. • Correct motor parameter settings.
• Correct the voltage or power supply to within
Power Supply Voltage Check main power supply and control voltages. nameplate specifications.
• Verify all main circuit phases.
■ Recommended Periodic Inspection

Table 37 outlines the recommended periodic inspections for Magnetek drive installations. Although periodic inspections
should generally be performed once a year, the drive may require more frequent inspection in harsh environments or with
rigorous use. Operating and environmental conditions, along with experience in each application, will determine the
actual inspection frequency for each installation. Periodic inspection will help to avoid premature deterioration in
performance or product failure. Copy this checklist and mark the “Checked” column after each inspection.
Periodic Inspection
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not inspect, connect, or disconnect any wiring while the power is on. Failure to comply can
result in serious personal injury. Before servicing the drive, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains
charged even after the power supply is turned off. After shutting off the power, wait for at least the amount of time specified on the drive
before touching any components.
Table 37 Periodic Inspection Checklist

Inspection Area Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked
Main Circuit Periodic Inspection
• Inspect equipment for discoloration from • Replace damaged components as required.
overheating or deterioration. • The drive has few serviceable parts and may
• Inspect for damaged or deformed parts. require complete drive replacement.
General • Inspect enclosure door seal if used.
• Remove foreign particles and dust by sucking
Inspect for dirt, foreign particles, or dust collection
them out with a vacuum cleaner to avoid
on components.
touching parts.
• Replace components if cleaning is not possible.
• Inspect wiring and connections for discoloration,
Conductors and
damage, or heat stress. Repair or replace damaged wiring.
Wiring
• Inspect wire insulation and shielding for wear.
Inspect terminals for stripped, damaged, or loose Tighten loose screws and replace damaged
Terminals
connections. screws or terminals.
• Inspect contactors and relays for excessive noise • Check coil voltage for overvoltage or
Relays and during operation. undervoltage conditions.
Contactors • Inspect coils for signs of overheating such as • Replace damaged removable relays contactors
melted or cracked insulation. or circuit board.
• Minor discoloration may be acceptable.
Inspect for discoloration of heat stress on or around
Braking Resistors • Check for loose connections if discoloration
resistors.
exists.
• Inspect for leaking, discoloration, or cracks.
Electrolytic The drive has few serviceable parts and may
• Check if the cap has come off, for any swelling, or
Capacitor require complete drive replacement.
if the sides have burst open.
Remove foreign particles and dust by sucking
Diode, IGBT Inspect for dust or other foreign material collected on
them out with a vacuum cleaner to avoid touching
(Power Transistor) the surface.
parts.
Motor Periodic Inspection
Periodic Inspection &
Stop the motor and contact qualified maintenance

Operation Check Check for increased vibration or abnormal noise.
personnel as required.
Control Circuit Periodic Inspection
Maintenance
• Inspect terminals for stripped, damaged, or loose • Tighten loose screws and replace damaged
connections. screws or terminals.
General
• Make sure all terminals have been properly • If terminals are integral to a circuit board, then
tightened. board or drive replacement may be required.
6
Inspection Area Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked

• Fix any loose connections.
• If an antistatic cloth or vacuum plunger cannot
be used, replace the board.
Check for any odor, discoloration, and rust. Make
• Do not use any solvents to clean the board.
sure connections are properly fastened and that no
Circuit Boards • Remove foreign particles and dust by sucking
dust or oil mist has accumulated on the surface of the
them out with a vacuum cleaner to avoid
board.
touching parts.
• The drive has few serviceable parts and may
require complete drive replacement.
Cooling System Periodic Inspection
Cooling Fan,
Circulation Fan, • Check for abnormal oscillation or unusual noise.
• Clean or replace the fan.
Control Board • Check for damaged or missing fan blades.
Cooling Fan
Remove foreign particles and dust by sucking
Inspect for dust or other foreign material collected on
Heatsink them out with a vacuum cleaner to avoid touching
the surface.
parts.
• Visually inspect the area.
Inspect air intake and exhaust openings. They must
Air Duct • Clear obstructions and clean air duct as
be free from obstruction and properly installed.
required.
Display Periodic Inspection
• Make sure data appears on the operator properly. • Contact a Magnetek representative if there is
Digital Operator • Inspect for dust or other foreign material that may any trouble with the display or keypad.
have collected on surrounding components. • Clean the digital operator.
◆ Periodic Maintenance
The drive has Maintenance Monitors that keep track of component wear. This feature provides advance maintenance
warning and eliminates the need to shut down the entire system for unexpected problems. The drive allows the user to
check predicted maintenance periods for the components listed below.
• Cooling Fan, Circulation Fan, Control Board Cooling Fan
• Electrolytic Capacitors
• Inrush Prevention Circuit
• IGBTs
For replacement parts, contact the distributor where the drive was purchased or contact Magnetek directly.
■ Replacement Parts
Table 38 contains the estimated performance life of components that require replacement during the life of the drive. Only
use Magnetek replacement parts for the appropriate drive model and revision.
Table 38 Estimated Performance Life
Component Estimated Performance Life
Cooling Fan, Circulation Fan 10 years
Electrolytic Capacitors 10 years <1>
<1> The drive has few serviceable parts and may require complete drive replacement.
NOTICE: Estimated performance life based on specific usage conditions. These conditions are provided for the purpose of replacing
parts to maintain performance. Some parts may require more frequent replacement due to poor environments or rigorous use. Usage
conditions for estimated performance life:
Ambient temperature: Yearly average of 40°C (IP00 enclosure)
Load factor: 80% maximum
Operation time: 24 hours a day
Performance Life Monitors Maintenance Monitors

The drive calculates the maintenance period for components that may require replacement during the life of the drive. A
percentage of the maintenance period is displayed on the digital operator by viewing the appropriate monitor parameter.
When the maintenance period reaches 100%, there is increased risk that the drive may malfunction. Magnetek
recommends checking the maintenance period regularly to ensure maximum performance life.
Refer to Recommended Periodic Inspection on page 121 for more details.
Table 39 Performance Life Monitors Used for Component Replacement
Parameter Component Contents
Displays the accumulated operation time of the fan, from 0 to 99999 hours. This value is
U4-03
Cooling Fan, Circulation Fan, automatically reset to 0 once it reaches 99999.
Control Board Cooling Fan Displays the accumulated fan operation time as a percentage of the specified maintenance
U4-04
period.
Displays the accumulated time the capacitors are used as a percentage of the specified
U4-05 DC Bus Capacitors
maintenance period.
Displays the number of times the drive is powered up as a percentage of the performance life
U4-06 Inrush (pre-charge) Relay
of the inrush circuit.
U4-07 IGBT Displays the percentage of the maintenance period reached by the IGBTs.
Alarm Outputs for Maintenance Monitors

An output can be set up to inform the user when a specific components has neared its expected performance life.
When one of multi-function digital output terminals has been assigned the maintenance monitor function (H2- = 2F),
the terminal will close when the cooling fan, DC bus capacitors, or DC bus pre-charge relay reach 90% of the expected
performance life, or when the IGBTs have reached 50% of their expected performance life. Additionally the digital
operator will display an alarm like shown in Table 40 to indicate the specific components that may need maintenance.
Table 40 Maintenance Alarms
Alarm Display
Function Corrective Action
LED Operator LCD Operator
The cooling fans have reached 90% of their
<1> LT-1 Replace the cooling fan.
designated lifetime.
The DC bus capacitors have reached 90% of their
<1> LT-2 Replace the drive.
The DC bus charge circuit has reached 90% of its
<1> LT-3 Replace the drive.
The IGBTs have reached 50% of their designated Check the load, carrier frequency, and output
<1> LT-4
lifetime. frequency.
The IGBTs have reached 90% of their designated
<2> TrPC Replace the drive.
lifetime.
<1> This alarm message will be output only if the Maintenance Monitor function is assigned to one of the digital outputs (H2- = 2F). The alarm
will also trigger a digital output that is programmed for alarm indication (H2- = 10).
<2> This alarm message will always be output, even if the Maintenance Monitor function is not assigned to any of the digital outputs (H2- =
2F). The alarm will also trigger a digital output that is programmed for alarm indication (H2- = 10).
Maintenance
Related Drive Parameters

Use parameters o4-03, o4-05, o4-07, and o4-09 to reset a Maintenance Monitor to zero after replacing a specific
component. Refer to Parameter Table on page 141 for details on parameter settings.
6
NOTICE: If these parameters are not reset after the corresponding parts have been replaced, the Maintenance Monitor function will
continue to count down the performance life from the value that was reached with the old part. If the Maintenance Monitor is not reset,
the drive will not have the correct value of the performance life for the new component.
◆ Drive Replacement
■ Serviceable Parts
The drive contains some serviceable parts. The following parts can be replaced over the life span of the drive:
• Terminal board I/O PCBs
• Cooling fan(s)
• Front cover
Replace the drive if the main power circuitry is damaged. Contact your local Magnetek representative before replacing
parts if the drive is still under warranty. Magnetek reserves the right to replace or repair the drive according to Magnetek
warranty policy.
■ Terminal Board
CAUTION! Crush Hazard. Carrying the drive by the front cover may cause the main body of the drive to fall, resulting in minor or
moderate injury. Always hold the case when carrying the drive.
NOTICE: Correctly set parameter o2-04 when replacing the control terminal board. Failure to comply may result in drive damage due to
lack of protective functions and poor drive performance.
The drive has a modular I/O terminal block that facilitates quick drive replacement. The terminal board contains on-board
memory that stores all drive parameter settings and allows the parameters to be saved and transferred to the replacement
drive. To transfer the terminal board, disconnect the terminal board from the damaged drive then reconnect it to the
replacement drive. Once transferred, there is no need to manually reprogram the replacement drive.
Note: If the damaged drive and the new replacement drive are have different capacities, the data stored in the control terminal board
cannot be transferred to the new drive and an oPE01 error will appear on the display. The control terminal board can still be used,
but parameter setting from the old drive cannot be transferred. The replacement drive must be initialized and manually
programmed.
Figure 62
YEA_comm
on
A E
C D
A – Removable terminal board D – Bottom cover screws

B – Charge LED E – Control terminal board locking screws
C – Bottom cover
Figure 67 Terminal Board
■ Replacing the Drive

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Failure to comply can result in serious
personal injury. Before servicing the drive, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after
the power supply is turned off. After shutting off the power, wait for at least the amount of time specified on the drive before touching
any components.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not allow unqualified personnel to perform work on the drive. Failure to comply could result in
serious injury. Installation, maintenance, inspection and servicing must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with
installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards.
Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
The following procedure explains how to replace a drive. This section provides instructions for drive replacement only.
To install option cards or other types of options, refer to the specific manuals for those options.
NOTICE: When transferring a braking transistor, braking resistor, or other type of option from a damaged drive to a new replacement
drive, make sure they are working properly before reconnecting them to the new drive. Replace broken options to prevent immediate
break down of the replacement drive.
1. Remove the terminal cover. Refer to Terminal Cover on page 25 for details.
Note: The shape of the terminal covers and the numbers of the screws differ depending on the drive models.
Figure 63
YEA_
comm
on
Figure 68 Drive Replacement: Removing the Terminal Cover

2. Loosen the screws holding the terminal board in place. Remove the screw securing the bottom cover and remove
the bottom cover from the drive.
Figure 64
YEA_com
mon
Figure 69 Drive Replacement: Removing the Control Terminal Board

Maintenance
3. Slide the terminal board as illustrated by the arrows to remove it from the drive along with the bottom cover.
Figure 65
YEA_
comm
on
Figure 70 Drive Replacement: Remove the Control Terminal Board

Figure 66
Y EA _ c
ommon
Figure 71 Drive Replacement: Removable Control Terminal Board

Disconnected from the Drive
4. Disconnect all option cards and options. Make sure they are intact before reusing them.
5. Replace the drive and wire the main circuit.
Installing the Drive
1. After wiring the main circuit, connect the terminal block to the drive as shown in Figure 72. Use the installation
screw to fasten the terminal block into place.
Figure 67
YEA_
comm
on
Figure 72 Drive Replacement: Installing the Control Terminal Board

2. Reconnect all options to the new drive in the same way they were installed in the old drive. Connect option
boards to the same option ports in the new drive that were used in the old drive.
3. Put the terminal cover back into its original place.
4. After powering on the drive, all parameter settings are transferred from the terminal board to the drive memory. If
an oPE04 error occurs, load the parameter settings saved on the terminal board to the new drive by setting
parameter A1-03 to 5550. Reset the Maintenance Monitor function timers by setting parameters o4-01 through
o4-12 to 0, and parameter o4-13 to 1.
7 Option Card Installation

This section provides instructions on installing the option cards listed in Table 41.
◆ Prior to Installing the Option

Prior to installing the option, wire the drive, make the necessary connections to the drive terminals, and verify that the
drive functions normally. Refer to the Table 41 for information on wiring and connecting the drive.
Table 41 below lists the number of option cards that can be connected to the drive and the drive connectors for connecting
those option cards.
Table 41 Option Card Installation
Option Card Connector Number of Cards Possible
PG-B3, PG-X3 CN5-C 2 <1>
DO-A3, AO-A3 CN5-A, B, C 1
PG-F3, PG-E3 CN5-C 1
SI-S3, DI-A3 <2> CN5-A 1
<1> If two PG option cards are connected, use both CN5-B and CN5-C. If only one PG option card is connected to the drive, use the CN5-C
connector.
<2> When DI-A3 is to be used as monitors, the card can be connected to any of CN5-A, B or C. The input status of DI-A3 can then be
viewed using U1-17.
Figure 73 shows an exploded view of the drive with the option and related components for reference.
Figure 68
A
B
C
L
D
J E
F
H G
YEA_common
A – Insertion point for CN5 G – Removable tabs for wire routing

B – Option card H – Ground wire
C – Included screws I – Drive grounding terminal (FE)
D – Front cover J – Connector CN5-A
E – Digital operator K – Connector CN5-B
F – Terminal cover L – Connector CN5-C
Figure 73 Installing an Option Card
Option Card
Installation
◆ Installing the Option

Refer to the instructions below to install the option.
DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. Disconnect all power to the drive and wait at least the amount of time specified on the drive front
cover safety label. After all indicators are off, measure the DC bus voltage to confirm safe level, and check for unsafe voltages before
servicing to prevent electric shock. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not allow unqualified personnel to perform work on the drive. Failure to comply could result in
death or serious injury. Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar
with installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives and Option Cards.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the option, drive, and circuit
boards. Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to circuitry.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque. Failure to comply may cause the
application to operate incorrectly or damage the drive.
1. Shut off power to the drive, wait the appropriate amount of time for voltage to dissipate, then remove the digital
operator (E) and front covers (D, F). Refer to Digital Operator and Front Cover on page 27.
Figure 69
YEA_common
Figure 74 Remove the Front Covers and Digital Operator

2. Insert the option card (B) into the CN5-A (J), CN5-B (K) or CN5-C (L) connectors located on the drive and fasten
it into place using one of the included screws (C).
Figure 70
YEA_common
A
B
C
L
Figure 75 Insert the Option Card
3. Connect one end of the ground wire (H) to the ground terminal (I) using one of the remaining screws (C). Connect
the other end of the ground wire (H) to the remaining ground terminal and installation hole on the option (B) using
the last remaining provided screw (C).
Figure 71
B
YEA_common
Figure 76 Connect the Ground Wire

Note: 1. The option package includes two ground wires. Use the longer wire when plugging the option into connector CN5-C on the drive side.
Use the shorter wire when plugging the option into connector CN5-B. Refer to the option card instruction manual for more
information.
2. There are two screw holes on the drive for use as ground terminals (I). When connecting three options, two ground wires will need to
share the same drive ground terminal.
4. Prepare and connect the wire ends as shown in Figure 77 and Figure 78. Refer to Wire Gauges, Tightening
Torque, and Crimp Terminals on page 135 to confirm that the proper tightening torque is applied to each
terminal. Take particular precaution to ensure that each wire is properly connected and wire insulation is not
accidentally pinched into electrical terminals.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Tighten all terminal screws according to the specified tightening torque. Loose electrical connections could
result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating electrical connections. Tightening screws beyond the specified tightening
torque may result in erroneous operation, damage to the terminal block, or cause a fire.
NOTICE: Heat shrink tubing or electrical tape may be required to ensure that cable shielding does not contact other wiring. Insufficient
insulation may cause a short circuit and damage the option or drive.
Figure 72
Shield Insulation
PG option terminal PG at motor
Ground Terminal
FE/SD Shield sheath
B3 (Insulate with electrical tape
or shrink tubing)
Figure 77 Preparing Ends of Shielded Cable
Figure 73
Preparing wire ends: Screwdriver blade size

Pull back the shielding and lightly
twist the end with fingers, keeping
the ends from fraying.
Blade depth of
0.4 mm or less
about 5.5 mm (7/32”)
When not using Blade width of
crimped insulated 2.5 mm or less
Option Card
Installation
sleeves
Loosen the screws and

insert the wire into the Option terminal block
opening on the terminal block.
Shielded cable
7
(do not solder ends)
Figure 78 Preparing and Connecting Cable Wiring
5. For the PG-B3 and PG-X3 Option, wire the motor PG encoder to the terminal block. Refer to Figure 79 and
Figure 80 for wiring instructions.
Refer to Terminal Functions of PG-B3 and PG-X3 Option on page 136 for a detailed description of the option
terminal functions.
Connection Diagram of PG-B3
Refer to Table 48 for a detailed description of the option board terminal functions.
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 V/T2 M
T/L3 W/T3
YASKAWA TB1
Drive PGB3 3
A+
Option 4
A
5
B+
6 PG
B
Z+
Z
SD
NC
FE E
TB2
1
IP
IG 2
CN5-B
AO
or A pulse monitor signal
IG
CN5-C
BO
B pulse monitor signal
IG
ZO Z pulse monitor signal
FE IG
Ground wire
Twisted-pair shielded line

Main circuit terminal Control circuit terminal
B3
<1> The PG-B3 Option reads a maximum input frequency from the PG encoder of 50 kHz. Be sure to select an PG encoder with a maximum output
pulse frequency of 50 kHz when operating at maximum speed.
Figure 79 PG-B3 Option and Encoder Connection Diagram
Connection Diagram of PG-X3

Refer to Table 49 for a detailed description of the option board terminal functions.
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 V/T2 M
T/L3 W/T3
TB1
YASKAWA
Drive PGX3 A+
Option A
B+
PG
B
Z+
Z
SD
NC
FE
CN3
IP12 TB2
IP5 IP
IG IG
SG
a+
A pulse monitor signal
CN5-C a
b+
B pulse monitor signal
b
z+
Z pulse monitor signal
FE z
Ground wire
X3
twisted-pair shielded line
main circuit terminal control circuit terminal
<1> The PG-X3 Option reads a maximum input frequency from the PG of 300 kHz. Be sure to select a PG with a maximum output pulse frequency
of 300 kHz when operating at maximum speed.
Figure 80 PG-X3 Option and PG Encoder Connection Diagram
Option Card
Installation
PG Encoder Cables for PG-B3 Option

Magnetek recommends using a LMA-B-S185Y (complementary output) for cables running between the PG-B3
Option and the PG as show in Figure 81.
For instructions on wiring the terminal block, refer to Table 48.
Figure 74
TB1 TB2
A+ A- B+ B- Z+ Z- SD FE IP IG AO IG BO IG ZO IG
3 4 5 6 E 1 2
TA1 A G
B H F
PG encoder side
C E
D
Ｌ
B3
（Pin）
Figure 81 Wiring PG Encoder Cable
Table 42 Connecting the PG Encoder Cable Specification
PG Encoder Cable
Option Terminal
Wire Color Pin
IP 1 Blue C
IG 2 White H
A+ 3 Yellow B
A– 4 White G
B+ 5 Green A
B– 6 White F
FE E N/A (shield) D
Table 43 PG Encoder Cable Types

Length Type Length Type
10 m (32 ft.) W5010 50 m (164 ft.) W5050
30 m (98 ft.) W5030 100 m (328 ft.) W5100
6. For the PG-X3 Option, set the voltage for the PG encoder power supply using jumper CN3 located on the option.
Position the jumper as shown in Table 44 to select the voltage level.
NOTICE: The positioning of jumper CN3 selects the PG encoder power supply voltage (5.5 V or 12 V). Select the voltage level for the
PG encoder connected to the option and motor. If the wrong voltage is selected, the PG encoder may not operate properly or may
become damaged as a result.
Table 44 Setting the PG Encoder Power Supply Voltage (IP) with Jumper CN3
Voltage Level 5.5 V ± 5% (default) 12.0 V ± 5%
5.5 V 12 V 5.5 V 12 V
CN3 CN3
Jumper CN3
7. Route the option wiring.

Depending on the drive model, some drives may require routing the wiring through the side of the front cover to
the outside. For drive models CIMR-LU2A0008 through 2A0033 and 4A0005 through 4A0018, cut out the
perforated openings on the left side of the drive front cover as shown in Figure 82-A and leave no sharp edges to
damage wiring.
Route the wiring inside the enclosure as shown in Figure 82-B for drive models CIMR-LU2A0047 through
2A0415 and 4A0024 through 4A0260 that do not require routing through the front cover.
Figure 75
A – Route wires through the openings B – Use the open space provided
provided on the left side of the inside the drive to route option
front cover. <1> wiring.
(CIMR-LU2A0008 to 2A0033, (CIMR-LU2A0047 to 2A0415,
4A0005 to 4A0018) 4A0024 to 4A0260)
<1> The drive will not meet NEMA Type 1 requirements if wiring is exposed outside the enclosure.
Figure 82 Wire Routing Examples
8. Replace and secure the front covers of the drive (D, F) and replace the digital operator (E).
Figure 76
YEA_common
D
Figure 83 Replace the Front Covers and Digital Operator

Note: Take proper precautions when wiring the option so that the front covers will easily fit back onto the drive. Make sure cables are
not pinched between the front covers and the drive when replacing the covers.
Option Card
Installation
9. For the PG-B3 and PG-X3 Option, set drive parameters A1: Initialization Parameters on page 141 and F1: PG
Speed Control Card on page 154 for proper motor rotation.
With a two-pulse or three-pulse PG encoder, the leading pulse determines the motor rotation direction. A PG
encoder signal with leading A pulse is considered to be rotating forward (counter-clockwise when viewing rotation
from motor load side).
Figure 77
The A pulse leads, followed

by the B pulse displaced at 90 degrees
A pulse
B pulse
Time →
Figure 84 Displacement of A and B Pulses
10. After connecting the PG encoder outputs to the option, apply power to the drive and manually rotate the motor
and check the rotation direction by viewing monitor U1-05 on the digital operator.
Reverse motor rotation is indicated by a negative value for U1-05; forward motor rotation is indicated by a
positive value.
If monitor U1-05 indicates that the forward direction is opposite of what is intended, set F1-05 to 1, or reverse the
two A pulse wires with the two B pulse wires on option terminal TB1 as shown in Figure 85.
Figure 78
B3
A+ A- B+ B- Z+ Z- A+ A- B+ B- Z+ Z-
3 4 5 6 5 6 3 4
Figure 85 A Channel and B Channel Wire Switching

11. If switching the wires is inconvenient, set drive parameter F1-05 to 1 to switch the direction of how the option
reads pulses from the PG encoder output.
Please note that when the drive is initialized using A1-03 =1110, 2220, 3330, the value for F1-05 will reset to
factory default and the parameter will need to be adjusted again to switch the direction.
◆ Wire Gauges, Tightening Torque, and Crimp Terminals

■ Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques of PG-B3 and PG-X3 Option
Wire gauge and torque specifications are listed in Table 45 and Table 46.
Table 45 Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques of PG-B3 Option
Tightening Bare Cable Crimp Terminals
Screw Torque Applicable Recomm. Applicable Recomm.
Terminal Signal Size Nm Wire Type
Gauges Gauge Gauges Gauge
(inlb) mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
A+, A–, B+, Stranded wire: Shielded
B–, Z+, Z–, 0.25 to 1.0 twisted pair,
FE, IP, IG 0.22 to 0.25 (24 to 17 AWG) 0.75 0.25 to 0.5 0.5 etc.
M2
(1.95 to 2.21) Solid wire: (18 AWG) (24 to 20 AWG) (20 AWG)
AO, IG, BO, 0.25 to 1.5 Shielded
IG, ZO, IG cable, etc.
(24 to 16 AWG)
Table 46 Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques of PG-X3 Option

Tightening Bare Cable Crimp Terminals
Screw Torque Applicable Recomm. Applicable Recomm.
Terminal Signal Size Nm Wire Type
Gauges Gauge Gauges Gauge
(inlb) mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
A+, A–, B+, Stranded wire: Shielded
B–, Z+, Z–, 0.25 to 1.0 twisted pair,
SD, FE, IP, IG 0.22 to 0.25 (24 to 17 AWG) 0.75 0.25 to 0.5 0.5 etc.
M2
(1.95 to 2.21) Solid wire: (18 AWG) (24 to 20 AWG) (20 AWG)
a+, a–, b+, Shielded
0.25 to 1.5
b–, z+, z–, SG (24 to 16 AWG) cable, etc.
■ Crimp Terminals
Magnetek recommends using CRIMPFOX 6 by Phoenix Contact or equivalent crimp terminals with the specifications
listed in Table 47 for wiring to ensure proper connections.
Note: Properly trim wire ends so loose wire ends do not extend from the crimp terminals.
Table 47 Crimp Terminal Sizes
Wire Gauge L d1 d2
mm2 Phoenix Contact Model mm (in) mm (in) mm (in)
0.25 (24 AWG) AI 0.25 - 6YE 10.5 (13/32) 0.8 (1/32) 2 (5/64)
0.34 (22 AWG) AI 0.34 - 6TQ 10.5 (13/32) 0.8 (1/32) 2 (5/64)
d1 6 mm d2
L 0.5 (20 AWG) AI 0.5 - 6WH 14 (9/16) 1.1 (3/64) 2.5 (3/32)
Option Card
Installation
◆ Terminal Functions of PG-B3 and PG-X3 Option

Table 48 PG-B3 Option Terminal Functions
Terminal Terminal Function Description
Block
A+ A+ pulse signal input
A– A– pulse signal input • Pulse signal inputs from the PG.
• Signal inputs from complementary and open-collector outputs
B+ B+ pulse signal input
• Signal level
B– B– pulse signal input
TB1 H level: 8 to 12 V
Z+ Z+ pulse signal input L level: 2.0 V or less
Z– Z– pulse signal input
SD NC pin (open) For use when cables shields should not be grounded
FE Ground Used for grounding shielded lines
IP PG power supply • Output voltage: 12.0 V ± 5%
IG PG power supply common • Max output current: 200 mA <1>
AO A pulse monitor signal • Outputs the monitor signal for the A, B, and Z pulses from the PG
TB2 BO B pulse monitor signal speed control card
ZO Z pulse monitor signal • For open collector outputs from the option
• Max voltage: 24 V
IG Monitor signal common • Max current: 30 mA
<1> A separate UL-listed class 2 power supply is necessary when the PG requires more than 200 mA to operate.
Table 49 PG-X3 Option Terminal Functions
Terminal Terminal Function Description
Block
A+ A+ pulse signal input
A– A– pulse signal input
• Inputs for the A channel, B channel, and Z pulses from the PG
B+ B+ pulse signal input
encoder
B– B– pulse signal input
• Signal level matches RS-422
TB1 Z+ Z+ pulse signal input
Z– Z– pulse signal input
Open connection connectors for use when cable shields should not
SD NC pin (open)
be grounded
FE Ground Used as the shield ground termination point.
IP PG encoder power supply • Output voltage: 12.0 V ± 5% or 5.5 V ± 5%
IG PG encoder power supply common • Max. output current: 200 mA <1>
SG Monitor signal common
a+ A+ pulse monitor signal
TB2 a– A- pulse monitor signal • Output signal for monitoring A channel, B channel, and Z pulses
b+ B+ pulse monitor signal from the PG encoder
b– B- pulse monitor signal • Signal level matches RS-422
z+ Z+ pulse monitor signal
z– Z- pulse monitor signal
<1> A separate UL-listed class 2 power supply is necessary when the PG requires more than 200 mA to operate.
A Specifications
A Specifications
◆ Three-Phase 200 V Class Drives
Table 50 Power Ratings (Three-Phase 200 V Class)
Item Specification
CIMR-LU2A 0008 0011 0014 0018 0025 0033 0047 0060 0075 0085 0115 0145 0180 0215 0283 0346 0415
Maximum Applicable Motor 3.7
2 3 4 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150
Capacity (HP) <1> (5)
Input Current (A) <2> 7.5 11 15.6 18.9 28 37 52 68 80 82 111 136 164 200 271 324 394
Rated Voltage
Three-phase 200 to 240 Vac 50/60 Hz/270 to 340 Vdc <3>
Rated Frequency
Input Allowable Voltage Fluctuation -15 to 10%
Allowable Frequency
±5%
Fluctuation
Input Power (kVA) 4.1 5.8 7.8 9.5 14 18 27 36 44 37 51 62 75 91 124 148 180
Rated Output Capacity 3 4.2 5.3 6.7 9.5 12.6 17.9 23 29 32 44 55 69 82 108 132 158
(kVA) <4> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <6> <6> <6> <6> <6> <6>
8 11 14 17.5 25 33 47 60 75 85 115 145 180 215 283 346 415

Rated Output Current (A)
<5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <6> <6> <6> <6> <6> <6>
Output Overload Tolerance 150% of rated output current for 60 s

User adjustable between 2 and
Carrier Frequency User adjustable between 2 and 15 kHz
10 kHz
Maximum Output Voltage (V) Three-phase 200 to 240 V (proportional to input voltage)
Maximum Output Speed (Hz) 120 Hz (user-set)
<1> The motor capacity (HP) refers to a NEC rated 4-pole motor. The rated output current of the drive output amps should be equal to or greater than
the motor current. Select the appropriate capacity drive if operating the motor continuously above motor nameplate current.
<2> Assumes operation at the rated output current. Input current rating varies depending on the power supply transformer, input reactor, wiring
connections, and power supply impedance.
<3> DC is not available for UL standards.
<4> Rated motor capacity is calculated with a rated output voltage of 220 V.
<5> Carrier frequency can be set up to 8 kHz while keeping this current rating. Higher carrier frequency settings require derating.
Specifications
A Specifications
◆ Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives

Table 51 Power Ratings (Three-Phase 400 V Class)
Item Specification
CIMR-LU4A 0005 0006 0007 0009 0015 0018 0024 0031 0039 0045 0060 0075 0091 0112 0150 0180 0216 0260
Maximum Applicable
125-
Motor Capacity 2 3 4 5 7.5 10 15 20 25-30 25-30 40 50-60 50-60 75 100 150 200
150
(HP) <1>
Input Current
4.4 6 8.2 10.4 15 20 29 39 44 43 58 71 86 105 142 170 207 248
(A) <2>
Rated Voltage
Rated Three-phase 380 to 480 Vac 50/60 Hz 510 to 680 Vdc <3>
Frequency
Allowable
Input Voltage -15 to 10%
Fluctuation
Allowable
Frequency ±5%
Fluctuation
Input Power
4.3 6.1 8.1 10.0 14.6 19.2 28.4 37.5 46.6 39.3 53.0 64.9 78.6 96.0 129.9 155 189 227
(kVA)
Rated Output
3.7 4.2 5.5 7 11.3 13.7 18.3 24 30 34 48 57 69 85 114 137 165 198
Capacity
<5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <6> <6> <6> <6> <6>
(kVA) <4>
Rated Output 4.8 5.5 7.2 9.2 14.8 18 24 31 39 45 60 75 91 112 150 180 216 260
Current (A) <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <6> <6> <6> <6> <6>
Overload
150% of rated output current for 60 s
Tolerance
Output Carrier User adjustable between 2 and
User adjustable between 2 and 15 kHz
Frequency 10 kHz
Maximum
Output Three-phase 380 to 480 V (proportional to input voltage)
Voltage (V)
Maximum
Output Speed 120 Hz (user-adjustable)
(Hz)
<1> The motor capacity (HP) refers to a NEC rated 4-pole motor. The rated output current of the drive output amps should be equal to or greater than
the motor current. Select the appropriate capacity drive if operating the motor continuously above motor nameplate current.
<2> Assumes operation at the rated output current. Input current rating varies depending on the power supply transformer, input reactor, wiring
conditions, and power supply impedance.
<4> Rated motor capacity is calculated with a rated output voltage of 440 V.
A Specifications
◆ Drive Specifications
Note: 1. Perform rotational Auto-Tuning to obtain the performance specifications given below.
2. For optimum performance life of the drive, install the drive in an environment that meets the required specifications.
Item Specification
The following control methods can be set using drive parameters:
• V/f Control (V/f)
Control Method • Open Loop Vector Control (OLV)
• Closed Loop Vector Control (CLV)
• Closed Loop Vector Control for PM (CLV/PM)
Frequency Control Range 0.01 to 120 Hz
Frequency Accuracy Digital input: within ±0.01% of the max output speed (-10 to +40°C)
(Temperature Fluctuation) Analog input: within ±0.1% of the max output speed (25°C ±10°C)
Digital inputs: 0.01 Hz
Frequency Setting Resolution
Analog inputs: 1/2048 of the maximum output speed setting (11 bit plus sign)
Output Speed Resolution 0.001 Hz
Main speed frequency reference: DC -10 to +10 V (20 kΩ), DC 0 to +10 V (20 kΩ), 4 to 20 mA
Frequency Setting Signal
(250 Ω), 0 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
V/f: 150% at 3 Hz
Starting Torque <1> OLV: 200% at 0.3 Hz
CLV, CLV/PM: 200% at 0 r/min
V/f: 1:40
Control Speed Control Range <1> OLV: 1:200
Characteristics CLV, CLV/PM: 1:1500
OLV: ±0.2% (25°C ±10°C)
Speed Control Accuracy <1>
CLV: ±0.02% (25°C ±10°C)
OLV: 10 Hz (25°C ±10°C)
Speed Response <1>
CLV: 50 Hz (25°C ±10°C)
Torque Limit Parameters setting allow separate limits in four quadrants (available in OLV, CLV, CLV/PM)
0.0 to 6000.0 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings,
Accel/Decel Ramp
unit changeable to m/s2 or ft/s2)
Braking Transistor Models CIMR-LU2A0008 to 2A0115, 4A0005 to 4A0060 have a built-in braking transistor.
V/f Characteristics Freely programmable
Inertia Compensation, Position Lock at Start and Stop/Anti-Rollback Function, Overtorque/
Undertorque Detection, Torque Limit, Speed Reference, Accel/decel Switch, 5 Zone Jerk
Settings, Auto-Tuning (Stationary and Rotational Motor/Encoder Offset Tuning), Dwell, Cooling
Fan on/off Switch, Slip Compensation, Torque Compensation, DC Injection Braking at Start and
Main Control Functions
Stop, MEMOBUS/Modbus Comm. (RS-422/485 max, 115.2 kbps), Fault Reset, Removable
Terminal Block with Parameter Backup Function, Online Tuning, High Frequency Injection,
Short Floor, Rescue Operation (Light Load Direction Search Function), Inspection Run, Brake
Sequence, Speed related parameters with elevator units display, etc.
Motor Protection Electronic thermal overload relay
Momentary Overcurrent
Drive stops when output current exceeds 200% of rated output current
Protection
Overload Protection Drive stops after 60 s at 150% of rated output current <2>
200 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage exceeds approx. 410 V
Overvoltage Protection
400 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage exceeds approx. 820 V
Protection
200 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage falls below approx. 190 V
Functions Undervoltage Protection
400 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage falls below approx. 380 V
Heatsink Overheat
Thermistor
Specifications
Protection
Stall Prevention Stall Prevention is available during acceleration, and during run.
Ground Protection Electronic circuit protection <3>
DC Bus Charge LED Remains lit until DC bus voltage falls below 50 V
A Specifications
Item Specification
Area of Use Indoors
Ambient Temperature
Humidity 95 RH% or less (no condensation)
Environment Storage Temperature -20 to 60°C (short-term temperature during transportation)
Altitude Up to 1000 meters without derating, up to 3000m with output current and voltage derating
10 to 20 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Vibration/Shock 20 to 55 Hz: 5.9 m/s2 (2A0008 to 2A0180, 4A0005 to 4A0150) or 2.0 m/s2 (2A0215 to 2A0415,
4A0180 to 4A0260)
• UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc:
UL508C Power Conversion Equipment
• CE European Conformity:
EN61800-3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - EMC requirements and specific
test methods
EN61800-5-1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Safety requirements -
Electrical, thermal and energy
• ISO International Organization for Standardization:
ISO13849-1 Cat. 3 PLd Safety of machinery - Safety-related parts of control systems
• IEC International Electrotechnical Commission:
IEC61508 SIL2 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-
related systems safety integrity level 2
• CSA Canadian Standards Association International:
Standards
2411-02 Elevator Equipment - Enclosed Elevator-and Escalator Electrical Equipment
3211-06 Industrial Control Equipment - Motor Controllers - Miscellaneous
C22.2 No.04-04 Bonding and Grounding of Electrical Equipment
C22.2 No.14-05 Industrial Control Equipment
B44.1/ASME-A17.5-2004 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalator Electrical Equipment used
by CSA to evaluate the L1000 to Class 2411 (Elevator Equipment)
• ANSI/ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers/American National Standards
Institute:
ANSI/ASME A17.1-2007/B44-04 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, Dumbwaiters,
Moving Walks, Material Lifts, and Dumbwaiters with Automatic Transfer Devices using EN
12016:2004 immunity requirements.
ANSI/ASME-A17.5-2004/CSA B44.1 - Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment, used by
CSA to evaluate the L1000 to Class 2411 (Elevator Equipment)
Protection Design IP00 enclosure with top protective cover, IP00
<1> The accuracy of these values depends on motor characteristics, ambient conditions, and drive settings. Specifications may vary with different
motors and with changing motor temperature. Contact Magnetek for consultation.
<2> Overload protection may be triggered when operating with 150% of the rated output current if the output speed is less than 6 Hz.
<3> Ground protection cannot be provided when the impedance of the ground fault path is too low, or when the drive is powered up while a ground
fault is present at the output.
■ Altitude Derating
The drive standard ratings are valid for an installation altitude up to 1000 m. If the altitude exceeds 1000 m both the drive
rated voltage and the rated output current must be derated for 1% per 100 m. The maximum altitude is 3000 m.
B Parameter Table
B Parameter Table
◆ A: Initialization Parameters
The A parameter group creates the operating environment for the drive. This includes the parameter Access Level, Motor
Control Method, Password, User Parameters and more.
: Indicates that the parameter setting can be changed while the drive is operating the motor
Motor 2: Refers the second motor when the drive is operating two motors (use input terminals to switch between motors).
■ A1: Initialization Parameters
No. Name Description Setting
0: English
1: Japanese
A1-00 2: German
Default: 0
3: French
Language Selection Min: 0
4: Italian
Max: 7
<1> 5: Spanish
6: Portuguese
7: Chinese
0: View and set A1-01 and A1-04. U- parameters can also be viewed.
A1-01 Default: 2
1: User Parameters (access to a set of parameters selected by the user, A2-01 to A2-
Access Level Selection Min: 0
32)
Max: 2
2: Advanced Access (access to view and set all parameters)
0: V/f Control
Default: 2
A1-02 2: Open Loop Vector Control
Control Method Selection Min: 0
<1> 3: Closed Loop Vector Control
Max: 7
7: Closed Loop Vector Control for PM Motors
0: No initialization
Default: 0
1110: User Initialize (parameter values must be stored using parameter o2-03)
A1-03 Initialize Parameters Min: 0
2220: 2-wire initialization
Max: 5550
5550: oPE04 error reset
A1-04 Password Default: 0000
When the value set into A1-04 does not match the value set into A1-05, parameters
Min: 0000
A1-01 through A1-03, and A2-01 through A2-33 cannot be changed.
A1-05 Password Setting Max: 9999
<1> Parameter setting value is not reset to the default value when the drive is initialized.
■ A2: User Parameters

Default: <5>
A2-01 to Parameters that were recently edited are listed here. The user can also select
User Parameters 1 to 32 Min: A1-00
A2-32 parameters to appear here for quick access.
Max: o4-16
0: Parameters A2-01 through A2-32 are reserved for the user to create a list of User
Default: 1
User Parameter Automatic Parameters.
A2-33 Min: 0
Selection 1: Save history of recently viewed parameters. Recently edited parameters will be
Max: 1
saved to A2-17 through A2-32 for quick access.
<5> Default setting is determined by the control mode (A1-02).
Parameter Table
B
B Parameter Table
◆ b: Application
Application parameters configure the source of the Up/Down command, timer functions, the Dwell function, the Droop
Control function, Energy Savings, and a variety of other application-related settings.
■ b1: Operation Mode Selection

0: Digital operator
Default: 0
1: Analog input terminals
b1-01 Speed Reference Selection Min: 0
Max: 3
3: Option card
0: Digital operator
Default: 1
Up/Down Command 1: Digital input terminals
b1-02 Min: 0
Selection 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
Max: 3
3: Option card
Default: 0
0: Ramp to stop
b1-03 Stopping Method Selection Min: 0
1: Coast to stop
Max: 1
0: Input status is read once and processed immediately (for quick response) Default: 1
b1-06 Digital Input Reading 1: Input is read twice and processed only if the status is the same in both readings Min: 0
(robust against noisy signals) Max: 1
Up/Down Command 0: Up/Down command not accepted while in the Programming Mode. Default: 0
b1-08 Selection while in 1: Up/Down command accepted while in the Programming Mode. Min: 0
Programming Mode 2: Prohibit entering Programming Mode during run. Max: 2
Default: 0
0: U-V-W
b1-14 Phase Order Selection Min: 0
1: U-W-V
Max: 1
■ b2: Magnetic Flux Compensation

Default: 0%
Magnetic Flux Sets the magnetic flux compensation as a percentage of the no-load current value
b2-08 Min: 0%
Compensation Value (E2-03).
Max: 1000%
■ b4: Delay Timers

Default: 0.0 s
Timer Function On-Delay
b4-01 Min: 0.0 s
Time
Used to set the on-delay and off-delay times for a digital timer output (H2-=12). Max: 3000.0 s
The output is triggered by a digital input programmed to H1-=18) Default: 0.0 s
Timer Function Off-Delay
b4-02 Min: 0.0 s
Time
Max: 3000.0 s
B Parameter Table
■ b6: Dwell Function

Default: 0.0%
b6-01 Dwell Speed at Start Min: 0.0%
Max: 100.0%
Default: 0.0 s
b6-02 Dwell Time at Start Parameters b6-01 and b6-02 set the speed to hold and the time to maintain that speed Min: 0.0 s
at start. Max: 10.0 s
Parameters b6-03 and b6-04 set the speed to hold and the time to maintain that speed Default: 0.0%
b6-03 Dwell Speed at Stop at stop. Min: 0.0%
Max: 100.0%
Default: 0.0 s
b6-04 Dwell Time at Stop Min: 0.0 s
Max: 10.0 s
■ b7: Droop Control

b7-01 Default: 0.0%
Sets the speed reduction gain applied at a torque reference of 100%. Set as a
Droop Control Gain Min: 0.0%
percentage of motor base speed.
Max: 100.0%
b7-02 Default: 0.05 s
Droop Control Delay Time Used to adjust the responsiveness of Droop Control. Min: 0.03 s
Max: 2.00 s
■ b8: Energy Saving

Default: 0
Energy Saving Control 0: Disabled
b8-01 Min: 0
Selection 1: Enabled
Max: 1
Default: 0.10
Energy Saving Control Enter the Energy Saving value (Ki) as specified on the motor name plate. (for IPM
b8-16 Min: 0.00
Constant (Ki) motors only)
Max: 2.00
Default: 1.00
Energy Saving Control Enter the Energy Saving value (Kt) as specified on the motor name plate. (for IPM
b8-17 Min: 0.00
Constant (Kt) motors only)
Max: 2.00
Parameter Table
B
B Parameter Table
◆ C: Tuning
C parameters are used to adjust the acceleration and deceleration ramps, jerk settings, slip compensation, torque
compensation, and carrier frequency selections.
■ C1: Acceleration and Deceleration Ramps

C1-01
Acceleration Ramp 1 Sets the ramp to accelerate from 0 to maximum speed.
C1-02
Deceleration Ramp 1 Sets the ramp to decelerate from maximum speed to 0.
C1-03
Acceleration Ramp 2 Sets the ramp to accelerate from 0 to maximum speed.
C1-04
Deceleration Ramp 2 Sets the ramp to decelerate from maximum speed to 0. Default:
1.50 s <6> <8>
C1-05 Acceleration Ramp 3 Min: 0.00 s
Sets the ramp to accelerate from 0 to maximum speed. Max:
(Motor 2 Accel Time 1)
600.00 s <6> <8>
C1-06 Deceleration Ramp 3
Sets the ramp to decelerate from maximum speed to 0.
(Motor 2 Decel Time 1)
C1-07 Acceleration Ramp 4
Sets the ramp to accelerate from 0 to maximum speed.
(Motor 2 Accel Time 2)
Sets the ramp to decelerate from maximum speed to 0.
(Motor 2 Decel Time 2)
C1-09 Fast Stop Ramp Sets the ramp for the Fast Stop function.
Default: 0
Accel/Decel Setting 0: 0.01 s unit
C1-10 Min: 0
Resolution 1: 0.1 s unit
Max: 1
Default: 0.0%
Accel/Decel Switching
C1-11 Sets the speed to switch between accel/decel ramp settings. Min: 0.0%
Speed
Max: 100.0%
Sets the acceleration time for motor 2. Default: 1.0 s
C1-12 Motor 2 Acceleration Time Note: Parameter C1-12 determines the acceleration time for motor 2 as long as d1-27 Min: 0.0 s
is not set to 0.00 Hz. Max: 600.0 s
Default: 1.0 s
C1-13 Motor 2 Acceleration Time Sets the deceleration time for motor 2. Min: 0.0 s
Max: 600.0 s
Default:
Inspection Deceleration 0.00 s <6> <8>
C1-15 Sets the deceleration ramp used for inspection run.
Ramp Min: 0.00 s
Max: 2.00 s <6> <8>
<6> Setting ranges and defaults vary by the setting units determined by parameter o1-03.
Refer to Defaults and Setting Ranges by Display Unit Selection (o1-03) on page 187
<8> Setting range value is dependent on parameter C1-10, Accel/Decel Setting Resolution. When C1-10 = 0 (units of 0.01 seconds), the setting
range becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
B Parameter Table
■ C2: Jerk Settings

Default: 0.50 s <6>
C2-01 Jerk at Accel Start Min: 0.00 s
Max: 10.00 s <6>
Five different jerk values can be set. They are automatically applied as shown in the
Default: 0.50 s <6>
figure below.
C2-02 Jerk at Accel End Min: 0.00 s
Up/Down command
ON OFF Max: 10.00 s <6>
Output speed
C2-02 C2-03 Default: 0.50 s <6>
C2-03 Jerk at Decel Start C2-01 C2-04
C2-05
Min: 0.00 s
C2-05
Time
Max: 10.00 s <6>
Default: 0.50 s <6>
C2-04 Jerk at Decel End Min: 0.00 s
Max: 10.00 s <6>
Default: 0.50 s <6>
C2-05 Jerk below Leveling Speed Sets the jerk used when the speed reference is lower than the leveling speed setting Min: 0.00 s
Max: 10.00 s <6>
■ C3: Slip Compensation

C3-01 Default: 1.0
Slip Compensation Gain Sets the gain for the motor slip compensation function. Min: 0.0
Max: 2.5
C3-02 Default: 2000 ms
Slip Compensation
Adjusts the slip compensation function delay time. Min: 0 ms
Primary Delay Time
Max: 10000 ms
Default: 200%
Sets an upper limit for the slip compensation function as a percentage of motor rated
C3-03 Slip Compensation Limit Min: 0%
slip for motor 1 (E2-02).
Max: 250%
Slip Compensation 0: Disabled. Default: 0
C3-04 Selection during 1: Enabled above 6 Hz. Min: 0
Regeneration 2: Enabled whenever slip compensation is possible. Max: 2
0: Disabled. Default: <5>
Output Voltage Limit
C3-05 1: Enabled. Automatically decreases motor flux when output voltage saturation is Min: 0
Operation Selection
reached. Max: 1
Parameter Table
B
B Parameter Table
■ C4: Torque Compensation

C4-01 Default: 1.00
Torque Compensation Sets the gain for the automatic torque (voltage) boost function and helps to produce
Min: 0.00
Gain better starting torque.
Max: 2.50
C4-02 Default: <5>
Torque Compensation
Sets the torque compensation filter time. Min: 0 ms
Primary Delay Time
Max: 60000 ms
Default: 0.0%
Torque Compensation at
C4-03 Sets torque compensation at forward start as a percentage of motor torque. Min: 0.0%
Forward Start
Max: 200.0%
Default: 0.0%
Torque Compensation at
C4-04 Sets torque compensation at reverse start as a percentage of motor torque. Min: -200.0%
Reverse Start
Max: 0.0%
Default: 10 ms
Torque Compensation Sets the time constant for torque compensation at forward start and reverse start (C4-
C4-05 Min: 0 ms
Time Constant 03 and C4-04).
Max: 200 ms
■ C5: Speed Control Loop Settings

C5-01 Default: <5>
Speed Control Loop
Sets the proportional gain 1 of the speed control loop. Min: 0.00
Proportional Gain 1
Max: 300.00
C5-02 Default: <5>
Speed Control Loop
Sets the integral time 1 of the speed control loop. Min: 0.000 s
Integral Time 1
Max: 10.000 s
C5-03 Default: <5>
Speed Control Loop
Proportional Gain 2
Max: 300.00
C5-04 Default: 0.500 s
Speed Control Loop
Integral Time 2
Max: 10.000 s
Speed Control Loop Default: 0.004 s
Sets the filter time constant for the time from the speed loop to the torque command
C5-06 Primary Delay Time Min: 0.000 s
output.
Constant Max: 0.500 s
Default: <5>
Speed Control Settings Sets the speed for switching between proportional gain 1, 2, 3 and integral time 1, 2,
C5-07 Min: 0.0%
Switching Speed 3.
Max: 100.0%
Default: 400%
Speed Control Loop
C5-08 Sets the speed control loop integral upper limit as a percentage of rated torque. Min: 0%
Integral Limit
Max: 400%
C5-13 Default: <5>
Speed Control Loop
Proportional Gain 3
Max: 300.00
C5-14 Default: <5>
Speed Control Loop
Integral Time 3
Max: 10.000 s
Default: 0.000 s
Speed Control Loop Delay Sets a delay to the torque command output from speed control loop during Position
C5-16 Min: 0.000 s
Time during Position Lock Lock.
Max: 0.500 s
Default: <4>
C5-17 Motor Inertia Sets the motor inertia. Min: 0.0001 kgm2
Max: 600.00 kgm2
B Parameter Table

Default: 1.0
C5-18 Load Inertia Ratio Sets the ratio between the motor and load inertia. Min: 0.0
Max: 6000.0
C5-19 Speed Control Loop Default: <5>
Proportional Gain Time Sets the Speed Control Loop Proportional gain used during Position Lock Min: 0.00
during Position Lock Max: 300.00
C5-20 Speed Control Loop Default:0.100 s
Integral Time during Sets the Speed Control Loop Integral time used during Position Lock. Min: 0.000 s
Position Lock Max: 10.000 s
<4> Default setting value varies by the drive model (o2-04).
■ C6: Carrier Frequency

Default: <4>
C6-03 Carrier Frequency Sets the carrier frequency. Min: 1.0 kHz
Max: 15.0 kHz
Selects PWM modulation method.
Default: 0
0: 2-phase/3-phase conversion
C6-06 PWM Method Min: 0
1: 2-phase modulation
Max: 2
2: 3-phase modulation
Default: 0
Carrier Frequency during 0: Carrier Frequency = 5 kHz
C6-09 Min: 0
Rotational Auto-Tuning 1: Setting value for C6-03
Max: 1
Sets the carrier frequency during Inspection Run. Default: 1
Inspection Operation
C6-21 0: Setting value for C6-03 Min: 0
Carrier Frequency
1: Carrier Frequency = 2 kHz Max: 1
Sets the carrier frequency when estimating the initial polarity. Default: 0
Carrier Frequency during
C6-23 0: Carrier Frequency = 2 kHz Min: 0
Initial Motor Pole Search
1: Setting value for C6-03 Max: 1
Sets the carrier frequency during Rescue Operation. Default: 0
C6-31 Carrier Frequency during
0: C6-03 setting Min: 0
<39> Rescue Operation
1: 2 kHz Max: 1
<39> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7016 and later.
Parameter Table
B
B Parameter Table
◆ d: Speed References
Speed Reference parameters are used to set the various speed reference values during operation.
■ d1: Speed Reference

d1-01
Speed Reference 1
d1-02
Speed Reference 2
d1-03
Speed Reference 3
d1-04
Speed Reference 4
Default: 0.00% <6>
Sets the Speed reference for the drive when d1-18 is set to 0 or 3. Setting units are
Min: 0.00%
d1-05 determined by parameter o1-03.
Max: 100.00% <6>
Speed Reference 5
d1-06
Speed Reference 6
d1-07
Speed Reference 7
d1-08
Speed Reference 8
Sets the mode of speed reference selection by digital inputs.

0: Use multi-speed references (d1-01 to d1-08)
1: High speed reference has priority (d1-19 to d1-23, d1-26) Default: 0
Speed Reference Selection
d1-18 2: Leveling speed reference has priority (d1-19 to d1-23, d1-26) Min: 0
Mode
3: Use multi-speed references d1-02 to d1-08, no speed selection stops the drive. Max: 3
Drive will stop when all input terminals programmed for speed references (H1- =
3, 4, 5) are open.
Default:
d1-19 100.00% <6>
Nominal Speed Sets the nominal speed reference when d1-18 = 1 or 2.
Min: 0.00%
Max: 100.00% <6>
d1-20 Default: 0.00% <6>
Intermediate Speed 1 Sets intermediate speed reference 1 when d1-18 = 1 or 2. Min: 0.00%
Max: 100.00% <6>
d1-21 Default: 0.00% <6>
Max: 100.00% <6>
d1-22 Default: 0.00% <6>
Max: 100.00% <6>
d1-23 Default: 0.00% <6>
Releveling Speed Sets speed reference for releveling when d1-18 = 1 or 2. Min: 0.00%
Max: 100.00% <6>
Default:
d1-24 Inspection Operation 50.00% <6>
Sets speed reference when inspection operation is enabled.
Speed Min: 0.00%
Max: 100.00% <6>
B Parameter Table

Default:
d1-25 10.00% <6>
Rescue Operation Speed Sets the speed reference during inspection operation.
Min: 0.00%
Max: 100.00% <6>
d1-26 Default: 8.00% <6>
Leveling Speed Sets leveling speed reference when d1-18 = 1 or 2. Min: 0.00%
Max: 100.00% <6>
Sets the speed reference for motor 2.
Default: 0.00 Hz
Note: 1. If set to 0.00, the drive will control motor 1 instead.
d1-27 Motor 2 Speed Reference Min: 0.00 Hz
2. When using motor 2, be sure that the accel/decel times are set in parameters C1-12
Max: 120.00 Hz
and C1-13.
Default: 0.0%
Leveling Speed Detection Used when d1-18 = 0 or 3. If the speed reference selected is lower than d1-28, then
d1-28 Min: 0.0%
Level the drive uses the leveling speed as the speed reference.
Max: 100.0%
Default: 0.0%
Inspection Speed Detection Used when d1-18 = 0 or 3. If the speed reference selected is higher than d1-28 but
d1-29 Min: 0.0%
Level lower or equal to d1-29, then the drive uses inspection speed as the speed reference.
Max: 100.0%
■ d6: Field Forcing

Default: 0
0: Disabled
d6-03 Field Forcing Selection Min: 0
1: Enabled
Max: 1
Sets the upper limit of the excitation current command during magnetic field forcing. Default: 400%
d6-06 Field Forcing Limit A setting of 100% is equal to motor no-load current. Disabled only during DC Min: 100%
Injection Braking. Max: 400%
Parameter Table
B
B Parameter Table
◆ E: Motor Parameters
■ E1: V/f Pattern

This parameter must be set to the power supply voltage.
Default: 230 V <9>
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Drive input voltage (not motor voltage) must
E1-01 Input Voltage Setting Min: 155 V
be set in E1-01 for the protective features of the drive to function properly. Failure to
Max: 255 V <9>
do so may result in equipment damage and/or death or personal injury.
Default: F
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection F: Custom V/f, E1-04 through E1-13 settings define the V/f pattern Min: –
Max: F
Default: <5>
Maximum Output
E1-04 Min: <23>
Frequency
Max: 120.0 Hz
Default:
230.0 V <9>
E1-05 Maximum Voltage
Min: 0.0 V
To set linear V/f characteristics, set the same values for E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, Max: 255.0 V <9>
the setting for E1-08 will be disregarded. Ensure that the five frequencies are set
Default: <5>
according to these rules:
E1-06 Base Frequency Min: 0.0 Hz
E1-09 ≤ E1-07 < E1-06 ≤ Ε1−11 ≤ E1-04
Max: 120.0 Hz
Note that if E1-11 = 0, then both E1-11 and E1-12 are disabled, and the above
conditions do not apply. Default: 3.0 Hz
E1-07 Middle Output Frequency Min: 0.0 Hz
Output Voltage (V)
E1-05
Max: 120.0 Hz
E1-12 Default: <2> <9>
Middle Output Frequency
E1-08 E1-13 Min: 0.0 V
Voltage
Max: 255.0 V <9>
Default: <5>
Minimum Output E1-08
E1-09 Min: 0.0 Hz
Frequency
E1-10 Max: 120.0 Hz
Default: <2> <9>
Minimum Output E1-09 E1-07 E1-06 E1-11 E1-04
E1-10 Frequency (Hz) Min: 0.0 V
Frequency Voltage Note: Some parameters may not be available depending on the control mode. Max: 255.0 V <9>
• E1-07, E1-08 and E-10 are available only in the V/f control and Open Loop Vector
Default: 0.0 Hz
E1-11 Middle Output Frequency control modes.
Min: 0.0 Hz
<11> 2 • E1-11, E1-12 and E-13 are available only in the V/f control and Closed Loop
Max: 120.0 Hz
Vector control modes.
Default: 0.0 V <9>
E1-12 Middle Output Frequency
Min: 0.0 V
<11> Voltage 2
Max: 255.0 V <9>
Default: 0.0 V <9>
E1-13
Base Voltage Min: 0.0 V
<13>
Max: 255.0 V <9>
<2> Default setting is dependent on the control mode (A1-02) and the drive model (o2-04).
<9> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. The default is 400 V when using a 400 V class drive.
<11> Parameter is ignored when E1-11 and E1-12 are set to 0.0.
<13> When E1-13 (Base Voltage) is set to 0.0, output voltage is controlled with E1-05 (Maximum Voltage) = E1-13. When Auto-Tuning is
performed, E1-05 and E1-13 are automatically set to the same value.
<23> Setting range depends on the type of motor being used. CLV allows a setting range of 10.0 to 120.0 Hz, while CLV/PM allows a setting range
of 4.0 to 120.0 Hz.
B Parameter Table
■ E2: Motor Parameters

Default: <4>
Min: 10% of drive
Sets the motor nameplate full load current in Amps. Automatically set during rated current
E2-01 Motor Rated Current
Auto-Tuning. Max: 200% of
drive rated
current <10>
Default: <4>
E2-02 Motor Rated Slip Sets the motor rated slip. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Min: 0.00 Hz
Max: 20.00 Hz
Default: <4>
E2-03 Motor No-Load Current Sets the no-load current for the motor. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Min: 0 A
Max: E2-01 <10>
Default: 4
E2-04 Number of Motor Poles Sets the number of motor poles. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Min: 2
Max: 48
Default: <4>
Motor Line-to-Line
E2-05 Sets the phase-to-phase motor resistance. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Min: 0.000 Ω
Resistance
Max: 65.000 Ω
Default: <4>
Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of motor rated
E2-06 Motor Leakage Inductance Min: 0.0%
voltage. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Max: 40.0%
Default: 0.50
Motor Iron-Core Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 50% of magnetic flux. Automatically set
E2-07 Min: 0.00
Saturation Coefficient 1 during Auto-Tuning.
Max: 0.50
Default: 0.75
Motor Iron-Core Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 75% of magnetic flux. Automatically set
E2-08 Min: E2-07
Saturation Coefficient 2 during Auto-Tuning.
Max: 0.75
Default: 0.0%
E2-09 Motor Mechanical Loss Sets the motor mechanical loss as a percentage of motor rated power (kW). Min: 0.0%
Max: 10.0%
Default: <4>
Motor Iron Loss for Torque
E2-10 Sets the motor iron loss. Min: 0 W
Compensation
Max: 65535 W
Default: <4>
Sets the motor rated power in kilowatts (1 HP = 0.746 kW). Automatically set during
E2-11 Motor Rated Power Min: 0.00 kW
Auto-Tuning.
Max: 650.00 kW
<10> The display resolution depends on the rated output power of the drive. Models CIMR-LU2A0008 to 2A0033 and CIMR-LU4A0005 to
4A0018 display values in 0.01 A units, while models CIMR-LU2A0047 to 2A0415 and CIMR-LU4A0024 to 4A0260 display values in 0.1 A
units.
Parameter Table
B
B Parameter Table
■ E3: V/f Pattern for Motor 2

These parameters are hidden when a PM motor control mode has been selected for motor 1 (A1-02 = 7).

Default: 60.0 Hz
Motor 2 Maximum Output
E3-04 Min: 10.0 Hz
Frequency
Max: 120.0 Hz
Default: 230.0 V
These parameters are only applicable when E1-03 is set to F.
E3-05 Motor 2 Maximum Voltage Min: 0.0 V
To set linear V/f characteristics, set the same values for E3-07 and E3-09. In this case,
Max: 255.0 V <9>
the setting for E3-08 will be disregarded. Ensure that the three frequencies are set
according to these rules or an oPE10 fault will occur: Default: 60.0 Hz
E3-06 Motor 2 Base Frequency E3-09 ≤ E3-07 < E3-06 ≤ E3-04 Min: 0.0 Hz
Max: 120.0 Hz
Default: 3.0 Hz
Motor 2 Mid Output Output Voltage (V)
E3-07 E3-05 Min: 0.0 Hz
Frequency
Max: 120.0 Hz
Default: <4>
Motor 2 Mid Output
E3-08 Min: 0.0 V
Frequency Voltage E3-08
Max: 255.0 V <9>
E3-10
Default: 1.5 Hz
Motor 2 Minimum Output E3-09 E3-07 E3-04
E3-09 Frequency (Hz) Min: 0.0 Hz
Frequency
Max: 120.0 Hz
Default: <4>
Motor 2 Minimum Output
E3-10 Min: 0.0 V
Frequency Voltage
Max: 255.0 V <9>
<4> Default setting value is dependent on the drive model (o2-04).
<9> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double the value when using a 400 V class drive.
■ E4: Motor 2 Parameters

These parameters are hidden when a PM motor control mode has been selected for motor 1 (A1-02 = 7).

Default: <4>
Min: 10% of drive
rated current
E4-01 Motor 2 Rated Current Sets the full load current for motor 2. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Max:
200% of drive
rated current <10>
Default: <4>
E4-02 Motor 2 Rated Slip Sets the rated slip for motor 2. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Min: 0.00 Hz
Min: 20.00 Hz
Default: <4>
Motor 2 Rated No-Load
E4-03 Sets the no-load current for motor 2. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Min: 0 A
Current
Min: [E4-01] <10>
Default: 4
E4-04 Motor 2 Motor Poles Sets the number of poles of motor 2. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Min: 2
Max: 48
Default: <4>
Motor 2 Line-to-Line
E4-05 Sets the phase-to-phase resistance for motor 2. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Min: 0.000 Ω
Resistance
Max: 65.000 Ω
Default: <4>
Motor 2 Leakage Sets the voltage drop for motor 2 due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of
E4-06 Min: 0.0%
Inductance rated voltage. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Max: 40.0%
units.
B Parameter Table
■ E5: PM Motor Settings

Default: <4>
E5-02
Motor Rated Power Sets the rated capacity of the motor. Min: 0.10 kW
<1>
Max: 650.00 kW
Default: <4>
Min: 10% of drive
E5-03 rated current
Motor Rated Current Sets the motor rated current.
<1> Max: 200% of
drive rated
current <10>
Default: 12
E5-04
Number of Motor Poles Sets the number of motor poles. Min: 2
<1>
Max: 48
Default: <4>
E5-05 Motor Stator Resistance
Sets the stator resistance (1 phase value). Min: 0.000 Ω
<1> (Single Phase)
Max: 65.000 Ω
Default: <4>
E5-06
Motor d-Axis Inductance Sets the d-axis inductance. Min: 0.00 mH
<1>
Max: 600.00 mH
Default: <4>
E5-07
Motor q-Axis Inductance Sets the q-axis inductance. Min: 0.00 mH
<1>
Max: 600.00 mH
Default: <4>
Min:
E5-09 Motor Induction Voltage Sets the induced phase peak voltage in units of 0.1 mV (rad/s) [electrical angle].
0.0 mV/(rad/s)
<1> Constant 1 When setting this parameter, E5-24 should be set to 0.0.
Max:
6500.0 mV/(rad/s)
Default: 0.0 deg
Sets the offset between the rotor magnetic axis and the encoder zero position. Set
E5-11 Encoder Offset Min: -180 deg
during Encoder Offset Tuning.
Max: 180 deg
Default:
0.0 mV/(r/min)
Sets the induced phase-to-phase rms voltage in units of 0.1 mV/(r/min) [mechanical
Motor Induction Voltage Min:
E5-24 angle].
Constant 2 0.0 mV/(r/min)
When setting this parameter, E5-09 should be set to 0.0.
Max:
6500.0 mV/(r/min)
<4> Default setting value is determined by the drive model (o2-04).
units.
Parameter Table
B
B Parameter Table
◆ F: Option Settings
F parameters are used to program the drive for Encoder and PG feedback from the motor and to function with option
cards.
■ F1: PG Speed Control Card

Default: <5>
Min: 1 ppr
F1-01 Encoder 1 Resolution Sets the encoder resolution (number of pulses per revolution)
Max:
60000 ppr <34>
0: Ramp to stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-02.
Default: 1
Operation Selection at PG 1: Coast to stop.
F1-02 Min: 0
Open Circuit (PGo) 2: Fast Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09.
Max: 3
3: Alarm only.
Default: 1
Operation Selection at 1: Coast to stop.
F1-03 Min: 0
Overspeed (oS) 2: Fast Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09.
Max: 3
3: Alarm only.
Default: 3
Operation Selection at 1: Coast to stop.
F1-04 Min: 0
Deviation 2: Fast Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09.
Max: 3
3: Alarm only.
Default: <5>
Encoder 1 Rotation 0: A phase leads B in up direction
F1-05 Min: 0
Direction Selection 1: B phase leads A in up direction
Max: 1
Sets the division ratio for the pulse monitor used of the PG option card installed to
Default: 1
PG 1 Pulse Monitor Output connector CN5-C. By setting “xyz”, the division ratio becomes = [(1 + x) / yz]. If only
F1-06 Min: 1
Division Ratio using the A pulse for one track input, then the input ratio will be 1:1, regardless of
Max: 132
what F1-06 is set to.
Default: 115%
F1-08 Overspeed Detection Level Sets the overspeed detection level as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. Min: 0%
Max: 120%
Default: 0.0 s
Overspeed Detection
F1-09 Sets the time in seconds for an overspeed situation to trigger a fault (oS). Min: 0.0 s
Delay Time
Max: 2.0 s
Default: 10%
Excessive Speed Deviation Sets the speed deviation detection level as a percentage of the maximum output
F1-10 Min: 0%
Detection Level frequency.
Max: 50%
Default: 0.5 s
Excessive Speed Deviation
F1-11 Sets the time in seconds for a speed deviation situation to trigger a fault (dEv). Min: 0.0 s
Detection Delay Time
Max: 10.0 s
Default: 2.0 s
PG Open-Circuit Detection
F1-14 Sets the time required to trigger a PG Open fault (PGo). Min: 0.0 s
Time
Max: 10.0 s
0: Disabled Default: 10
F1-18 dv3 Detection Selection n: Sets the number of dv3 situations that may be detected before triggering an actual Min: 0
dv3 fault. Max: 10
Default: 128
0: Disabled
F1-19 dv4 Detection Selection Min: 0
n: Number of pulses that the A and B pulse are reversed that triggers dv4 detection.
Max: 5000
Default: 1
PG Option Card 0: Disabled
F1-20 Min: 0
Disconnect Detection 1 1: Enabled
Max: 1
B Parameter Table

Selects when DEV is active.
Default: 2
dEv Detection Condition 0: After speed reference, soft starter output and motor speed have matched once.
F1-29 Min: 0
Selection 1: After speed reference and soft starter output have matched once.
Max: 2
2: Always during Run
Selects the encoder connected the PG-F3 option.
Default: 0
F1-50 0: EnDat 2.1/01, 2.2/01 Serial Communication + Sin/Cos
Encoder Selection Min: 0
<39> 1: EnDat 2.2/22 Serial Communication
Max: 2
2: Hiperface
Default: 80%
F1-51 PGoH Detection Level Sets the level for detecting PG Hardware Fault (PGoH). Available when F1-20 = 1 Min: 1%
Max: 100%
Selects the communication speed between the PG-F3 option and serial encoder.
0: 1M bps/9600 bps Default: 0
F1-52 Communication Speed of
1: 500k bps/19200 bps Min: 0
<39> Serial Encoder Selection
2: 1M bps/38400 bps Max: 3
3: 1M bps/38400 bps
Default: 0
0: Disabled
F1-63 PG-E3 R Track Selection Min: 0
1: Enabled
Max: 1
<34> Setting range is 1 to 15000 ppr when the drive is set for CLV/PM.
■ F3: Digital Input Card (DI-A3)

0: BCD, 1% units
1: BCD, 0.1% units
2: BCD, 0.01% units
3: BCD, 1 Hz units
4: BCD, 0.1 Hz units
5: BCD, 0.01 Hz units
Default: 0
DI-A3 Option Card Input 6: BCD customized setting (5 digit), 0.02 Hz units
F3-01 Min: 0
Selection 7: Binary input
Max: 7
The unit and the setting range are determined by F3-03.
F3-03 = 0: 255/100% (-255 to +255)
F3-03 = 1: 40961/100% (-4095 to +4095)
F3-03 = 2: 30000/100% (-33000 to +33000)
When the digital operator units are set to be displayed in Hertz or user-set units (o1-03
= 2 or 3), the units for F3-01 are determined by parameter o1-03.
0: 8 bit Default: 2
DI-A3 Option Card Data
F3-03 1: 12 bit Min: 0
Length Selection
2: 16 bit Max: 2
■ F4: Analog Monitor Card (AO-A3)

Sets the monitor signal for output from terminal V1. Set this parameter to the last Default: 102
Terminal V1 Function
F4-01 three digits of the desired U- monitor. Some U parameters are available only in Min: 000
Selection
certain control modes. Max: 999
F4-02 Default: 100.0%
Terminal V1 Gain Sets the gain for voltage output via terminal V1. Min: -999.9%
Max: 999.9%
Parameter Table
Sets the monitor signal for output from terminal V2. Set this parameter to the last Default: 103
Terminal V2 Function
F4-03 three digits of the desired U- monitor. Some U parameters are available only in Min: 000
Selection
certain control modes. Max: 999
F4-04 Default: 50.0%
Terminal V2 Gain Sets the gain for voltage output via terminal V2. Min: -999.9%
Max: 999.9%
B
B Parameter Table

F4-05 Default: 0.0%
Terminal V1 Bias Sets the amount of bias added to the voltage output via terminal V1. Min: -999.9%
Max: 999.9%
F4-06 Default: 0.0%
Terminal V2 Bias Sets the amount of bias added to the voltage output via terminal V2. Min: -999.9%
Max: 999.9%
Default: 1
Terminal V1 Signal Level
F4-07 Min: 0
Selection
0: 0 to 10 V Max: 1
1: -10 to 10 V Default: 1
Terminal V2 Signal Level
F4-08 Min: 0
Selection
Max: 1
■ F5: Digital Output Card (DO-A3)

Default: 0
Terminal P1-PC Output
F5-01 Min: 0
Selection
Max: 161
Default: 1
F5-02 Min: 0
Selection
Max: 161
Default: 2
F5-03 Min: 0
Selection
Max: 161
Default: 4
F5-04 Min: 0
Selection
Sets the function for contact output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and photocoupler Max: 161
output terminals P1 through P6. Default: 6
F5-05 Min: 0
Selection
Max: 161
Default: 37
F5-06 Min: 0
Selection
Max: 161
Default: F
Terminal M1-M2 Output
F5-07 Min: 0
Selection
Max: 161
Default: F
Terminal M3-M4 Output
F5-08 Min: 0
Selection
Max: 161
0: Output terminals are each assigned separate output functions. Default: 0
DO-A3 Output Mode
F5-09 1: Binary code output Min: 0
Selection
2: Use output terminal functions selected by parameters F5-01 through F5-08. Max: 2
B Parameter Table
■ F6: Communication Option Card

For more details on a specific option card, refer to the instruction manual for the option card.

Default: 1
Operation Selection after 1: Coast to stop.
F6-01 Min: 0
Communications Error 2: Fast Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09.
Max: 3
3: Alarm only.
External Fault from Default: 0
0: Always detected
F6-02 Communication Option Min: 0
1: Detection during run only
Detection Selection Max: 1
External Fault from Default: 1
1: Coast to stop.
F6-03 Communication Option Min: 0
2: Fast Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09.
Operation Selection Max: 3
3: Alarm only.
Default: 2.0 s
F6-04 bUS Error Detection Time Sets the delay time for error detection if a bus error occurs. Min: 0.0 s
Max: 5.0 s
Torque Limit Selection Default: 0
0: Disabled. Torque limit from option card disabled.
F6-06 from Communications Min: 0
1: Enabled. Torque limit from option card enabled.
Option Max: 1
0: Communication-related parameters (F6-) are not reset when the drive is
Default: 0
F6-08 Reset Communication initialized using A1-03.
Min: 0
<1> Parameter 1: Reset all communication-related parameters (F6-) when the drive is initialized
Max: 1
using A1-03.
Default: 0
F6-35 CANopen Node ID Sets the node address. Min: 0
Max: 126
0: Auto-detection
1: 10 kbps
2: 20 kbps
3: 50 kbps Default: 6
CANopen Communication
F6-36 4: 125 kbps Min: 0
Speed
5: 250 kbps Max: 8
6: 500 kbps
7: 800 kbps
8: 1 Mbps
Parameter Table
B
B Parameter Table
◆ H: Multi-Function Terminals
H parameters assign functions to the multi-function input and output terminals.
■ H1: Multi-Function Digital Inputs

Default: <19>
Terminal S3 Function
H1-03 Min: 3
Selection
Max: 79
Default: <19>
H1-04 Min: 3
Selection
Max: 79
Default: <19>
H1-05 Min: 3
Selection Assigns a function to the multi-function digital inputs.
Max: 79
Refer to page 158 to page 159 for a description of setting values.
Default: <19>
Terminal S6 Function Note: Unused terminals should be set to F.
H1-06 Min: 3
Selection
Max: 79
Default: <19>
H1-07 Min: 3
Selection
Max: 79
Default: F
H1-08 Min: 3
Selection
Max: 79
<19> With the speed reference priority d1-18 is set to 0 or 3, the default settings for parameters H1-03 to H1-07 governing input terminals S3 to S7
are: 24, 14, 3, 4, and 5 respectively. When d1-18 is set to 1 or 2, the default settings for H1-03 to H1-07 become 50, 54, 51, 53, and F
respectively.
H1 Multi-Function Digital Input Settings

H1- Function Description
Setting
3 Multi-Step Speed Reference 1 When input terminals are set to Multi-Step Speed References 1 through 3, switching combinations
4 Multi-Step Speed Reference 2 of those terminals will create a multi-step speed sequence using the speed references set in d1-01
5 Multi-Step Speed Reference 3 through d1-08.
Closed: Jog frequency reference (d1-17) selected.
The Jog frequency can be used when the speed reference selection is not assigned to input terminals
6 Jog reference selection
(b1-01 ≠ 1) and the speed reference priority is set to use the multi-step speed reference (d1-18 = 0 or
3).
Used to switch between accel/decel ramp 1 (set in C1-01, C1-02) and accel/decel ramp 2 (set in C1-
03, C1-04).
7 Accel/decel Ramp Selection 1 When combined with another input terminal set for "Accel/Decel ramp 2" (H1- = 1A), the drive
can also switch between accel/decel ramp 3 (set in C1-05, C1-06) and accel/decel ramp 4 (set in C1-
07, C1-08).
8 Baseblock Command (N.O.) Closed: No drive output
9 Baseblock Command (N.C.) Open: No drive output
Select this setting when the terminal is not used or when using the terminal in the pass-through
F Not Used (Through Mode) mode. The terminal does not trigger a drive function but can be used as digital input for the
controller the drive is connected to.
14 Fault Reset Closed: Resets faults if the cause is cleared and the Up/Down command is removed.
15 Fast Stop (N.O.) Closed: Decelerates to stop at the Fast Stop ramp set to C1-09.
Open: Motor 1(E1-, E3-)
16 Motor 2 Selection
Closed: Motor 2 (E2-, E4-)
17 Fast Stop (N.C.) Open: Decelerates to stop at the Fast Stop ramp set to C1-09.
Triggers the timer set up by parameters b4-01 and b4-02. Must be set in conjunction with the timer
18 Timer Function Input
function output (H2- = 12).
B Parameter Table
H1 Multi-Function Digital Input Settings

H1-
Setting Function Description
Used in conjunction with an input terminal set for “Accel/decel ramp selection 1” (H1- = 7), and
1A Accel/decel Ramp Selection 2
allows the drive to switch between accel/decel ramp 3 and 4.
20: N.O., Always detected, ramp to stop
21: N.C., Always detected, ramp to stop
22: N.O., During run, ramp to stop
23: N.C., During run, ramp to stop
24: N.O., Always detected, coast to stop
25: N.C., Always detected, coast to stop
26: N.O., During run, coast to stop
27: N.C., During run, coast to stop
20 to 2F External Fault
28: N.O., Always detected, Fast Stop
29: N.C., Always detected, Fast Stop
2A: N.O., During run, Fast Stop
2B: N.C., During run, Fast Stop
2C: N.O., Always detected, alarm only (continue running)
2D: N.C., Always detected, alarm only (continue running)
2E: N.O., During run, alarm only (continue running)
2F: N.C., During run, alarm only (continue running)
50 Nominal Speed Closed: Activates the nominal speed (d1-19).
51 Intermediate Speed Closed: Activates the Intermediate Speed (d1-20).
52 Releveling Speed Closed: Activates the Releveling Speed (d1-23).
53 Leveling Speed Closed: Activates the Leveling Speed (d1-26).
54 Inspection Operation Closed: Activates Inspection operation using the speed set in d1-24.
55 Rescue Operation Closed: Activates rescue operation.
56 Motor Contactor Feedback Used for motor contactor supervision and fault detection.
57 High Speed Limit (Up) Closed: Uses the leveling speed as the maximum speed when going up.
58 High Speed Limit (Down) Closed: Uses the leveling speed as the maximum speed when going down.
5C Floor Sensor Closed: Initiate Direct Landing (S5-10 = 1)
Tests the MEMOBUS/Modbus RS-485/422 interface. Displays “PASS” if the test completes
67 Communications Test Mode
successfully.
79 Brake Feedback Used for brake supervision and detection of incorrect operation.
■ H2: Multi-Function Digital Outputs

Default: 50
Terminals M1-M2
H2-01 Min: 0
Function Selection (relay)
Max: 161
Default: 51
Terminals M3-M4
H2-02 Min: 0
Function Selection (relay)
Max: 161
Default: 6
Terminals M5-M6 Refer to H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings on page 160 for a description of
H2-03 Min: 0
Function Selection (relay) setting values.
Max: 161
Default: 37
Terminal P1-C1 Function
H2-04 Min: 0
Selection (photocoupler)
Max: 161
Default: F
Terminal P2-C2 Function
H2-05 Min: 0
Selection (photocoupler)
Max: 161
Parameter Table
B
B Parameter Table
H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings

H2-
Setting Function Description
0 During Run Closed: An Up/Down command is active or voltage is output.

Open: Output speed is greater than the value of E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency) or S1-01 (Zero
Speed Level at Stop).
1 Zero Speed
Closed: Output frequency is less than or equal to the value of E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency) or
S1-01 (Zero Speed Level at Stop).
2 Speed Agree 1 Closed: Output speed equals the speed reference (plus or minus the hysteresis set to L4-02).
3 User-set Speed Agree 1 Closed: Output speed and speed reference equal L4-01 (plus or minus the hysteresis set to L4-02).
4 Speed Detection 1 Closed: Output speed is less than or equal to the value in L4-01 with hysteresis determined by L4-02.
5 Speed Detection 2 Closed: Output speed is greater than or equal to the value in L4-01 with hysteresis determined by L4-02.
6 Drive Ready (READY) Closed: Power up is complete and the drive is ready to accept an Up/Down command.
7 DC Bus Undervoltage Closed: DC bus voltage is below the Uv trip level set in L2-05.
8 During Baseblock (N.O.)Closed: Drive has entered the baseblock state (no output voltage).
Open: The speed reference is supplied by an external reference (set in b1-01).
9 Speed Reference Source
Closed: Digital operator supplies the speed reference.
Open: The Up/Down command is supplied by an external reference (set in b1-02).
A Up/Down Command Source
Closed: Digital operator supplies the Up/Down command.
B Torque Detection 1 Closed: An overtorque or undertorque situation has been detected.
E Fault Closed: Fault occurred. (excluding CPF00 and CPF01)
F Not used (Through Mode) Set this value when the terminal is not used or when using the terminal in the pass-through mode.
10 Minor Fault Closed: An alarm has been triggered, or the IGBTs have reached 90% of their expected life span.
Fault Reset Command Closed: The drive has received a reset command from the multi-function input terminals or from serial
11
Active network, or the digital operator’s RESET key has been pressed.
12 Timer Output Closed: Timer output.
13 Speed Agree 2 Closed: When drive output frequency equals the speed reference ±L4-04.
14 User-set Speed Agree 2 Closed: When the drive output speed is equal to the value in L4-03 ±L4-04.
15 Speed Detection 3 Closed: When the drive output speed is less than or equal to the value in L4-03 ±L4-04.
16 Speed Detection 4 Closed: When the output speed is greater than or equal to the value in L4-03 ±L4-04.
18 Torque Detection 2 Closed: Overtorque or undertorque has been detected.
1A During Down Direction Closed: Drive is running in the down direction.
1B During Baseblock 2 (N.C.) Open: Drive has entered the baseblock state (no output voltage).
Open: Motor 1 is selected
1C Motor 2 Selection
Closed: Motor 2 is selected
1D During Regeneration Closed: Motor is operated in regenerative mode.
1E Reset Enabled Closed: An automatic reset is performed
Motor Overload Alarm
1F Closed: oL1 is at 90% of its trip point or greater. An oH3 situation also triggers this alarm.
(oL1)
Drive Overheat Pre-alarm
20 Closed: Heatsink temperature exceeds the parameter L8-02 value.
(oH)
Closed: Cooling fan, electrolytic capacitors, IGBTs, or the soft charge bypass relay may require
2F Maintenance Period
maintenance.
30 During Torque Limit Closed: When the torque limit has been reached.
Within Position Lock
33 Closed: Position deviation is within the Position Lock Bandwidth.
Bandwidth
Open: No frequency output from drive when stopped with baseblock, stopped with DC injection
37 During Frequency Output braking during initial excitation, or stopped with short circuit braking.
Closed: Drive is outputting a frequency.
Closed: Input phase loss has occurred
47 Input Phase Loss
Open: Normal operation (no phase loss detected)
Closed: The built-in dynamic braking transistor failed.
4E Braking Transistor Fault (rr)
Note: This function is not available in models CIMR-LU2A0145 to 2A0415, 4A0075 to 4A0216.
B Parameter Table
H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings

H2- Function Description
Setting
Close: Release brake
50 Brake Control
Open: Apply brake
51 Output Contactor Control Closed: Close output contactor
52 Door Zone Reached Closed: Indicates that the door zone has been reached.
Closed: Speed is greater than the zero speed level set to S1-01
53 Not Zero Speed
Open: Operating at zero speed level
Closed: Light load direction is up
54 Light Load Direction
Open: Light load direction is down
Light Load Direction Closed: Ready for Light Load Direction Search
55
Detection Status Open: Light Load Detection in progress
Closed: Safe Disable terminals H1-HC and H2-HC are open, drive is in a baseblock state
58 Safe Disable Status
Open: Safe Disable terminals H1-HC and H2-HC are closed (normal operation)
60 Internal Cooling Fan Alarm Closed: Internal cooling fan alarm
61 Motor Pole Search Status Closed: Motor pole search successful
Function 0 to 61 with Inverse Inverts the output switching of the multi-function output functions.
100 to 161
Output Sets the last two digits of 1 to reverse the output signal of that specific function.
■ H3: Multi-Function Analog Inputs

Default: 0
Terminal A1 Signal Level 0: 0 to 10 V
H3-01 Min: 0
Selection 1: –10 to 10 V
Max: 1
Default: 0
Terminal A1 Function
H3-02 Sets the function of terminal A1. Min: 0
Selection
Max: 1F
H3-03 Default: 100.0%
Terminal A1 Gain Setting Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-02 when 10 V is input at terminal A1. Min: -999.9%
Max: 999.9%
H3-04 Default: 0.0%
Terminal A1 Bias Setting Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-02 when 0 V is input at terminal A1. Min: -999.9%
Max: 999.9%
0: 0 to 10 V
Default: 0
Terminal A2 Signal Level 1: –10 to 10 V
H3-09 Min: 0
Selection Note: Use DIP switch S1 to set input terminal A2 for a current or a voltage input
Max: 0
signal.
Default: 0
Terminal A2 Function
H3-10 Sets the function of terminal A2. Min: 0
Selection
Max: 1F
H3-11 Default: 100.0%
Terminal A2 Gain Setting Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-10 when 10 V is input at terminal A2. Min: -999.9%
Max: 999.9%
H3-12 Default: 0.0%
Terminal A2 Bias Setting Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-10 when 0 V is input at terminal A2. Min: -999.9%
Max: 999.9%
Default: 0.03 s
Analog Input Filter Time Sets a primary delay filter time constant for terminals A1 and A2. Used for noise
H3-13 Min: 0.00 s
Constant filtering.
Max: 2.00 s
Default: 0
Applies an offset to analog input A1. Can be used for zero adjustment of the analog
Parameter Table
H3-16 Offset for Terminal A1 Min: -500

input.
Max: 500
Default: 0
Applies an offset to analog input A2. Can be used for zero adjustment of the analog
H3-17 Offset for Terminal A2 Min: -500
input.
Max: 500
B
B Parameter Table
H3 Multi-Function Analog Input Settings (H3-02 and H3-10)

Setting Function Description (For when output is 100%)
Speed Reference Bias
(value added to input signal when
0 E1-04 (maximum output frequency)
multiple analog terminals supply the
speed reference)
Auxiliary Speed Reference 1 (used
as a second speed reference)
Auxiliary Speed Reference 2 (used
as third speed reference)
Torque Compensation (load cell
14 10 V = Motor rated torque
input)
Sets this value when the terminal is not used or when using the terminal in the pass-through
1F Not used (Through Mode)
mode.
■ H4: Analog Outputs

Selects the data to be output through multi-function analog output terminal FM. Default: 102
Terminal FM Monitor
H4-01 Set the desired monitor parameter to the digits available in U-. For example, Min: 000
Selection
enter “103” for U1-03. Max: 999
H4-02 Default: 100.0%
Sets the signal level at terminal FM that is equal to 100% of the selected monitor
Terminal FM Gain Min: -999.9%
value.
Max: 999.9%
H4-03 Default: 0.0%
Terminal FM Bias Sets the bias value added to the terminal FM output signal. Min: -999.9%
Max: 999.9%
Selects the data to be output through multi-function analog output terminal AM. Default: 103
Terminal AM Monitor
H4-04 Set the desired monitor parameter to the digits available in U-. For example, Min: 000
Selection
enter “103” for U1-03. Max: 999
H4-05 Default: 50.0%
Sets the signal level at terminal AM that is equal to 100% of the selected monitor
Terminal AM Gain Min: -999.9%
value.
Max: 999.9%
H4-06 Default: 0.0%
Terminal AM Bias Sets the bias value added to the terminal AM output signal. Min: -999.9%
Max: 999.9%
Default: 0
Terminal FM Signal Level 0: 0 to 10 V
H4-07 Min: 0
Max: 1
Default: 0
Terminal AM Signal Level 0: 0 to 10 V
H4-08 Min: 0
Max: 1
B Parameter Table
■ H5: MEMOBUS/Modbus Serial Communication

Note: The settings for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications become effective when the drive is restarted.

Default: 1
H5-01 Selects drive station node number (address) for MEMOBUS/Modbus terminals R+,
Drive Node Address Min: 0
<14> R-, S+, S-. Cycle power for the setting to take effect.
Max: FF
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
Default: 3
Communication Speed 4: 19200 bps
H5-02 Min: 0
Selection 5: 38400 bps
Max: 8
6: 57600 bps
7: 76800 bps
8: 115200 bps
Cycle power for the setting to take effect.
0: No parity
Default: 0
Communication Parity 1: Even parity
H5-03 Min: 0
Selection 2: Odd parity
Max: 2
Cycle power for the setting to take effect.
0: Ramp to stop
Default: 3
Stopping Method After 1: Coast to stop
H5-04 Min: 0
Communication Error (CE) 2: Fast Stop
Max: 3
3: Alarm only
Default: 1
Communication Fault 0: Disabled
H5-05 Min: 0
Detection Selection 1: Enabled. If communication is lost for more than two seconds, a CE fault will occur.
Max: 1
Default: 5 ms
H5-06 Drive Transmit Wait Time Sets the wait time between receiving and sending data. Min: 5 ms
Max: 65 ms
Default: 1
0: Disabled. RTS is always on.
H5-07 RTS Control Selection Min: 0
1: Enabled. RTS turns on only when sending.
Max: 1
Default: 2.0 s
Communication Fault Sets the time required to detect a communications error. Adjustment may be needed
H5-09 Min: 0.0 s
Detection Time when networking several drives.
Max: 10.0 s
Unit Selection for Default: 0
0: 0.1 V units
H5-10 MEMOBUS/Modbus Min: 0
1: 1 V units
Register 0025H Max: 1
0: Drive requires an Enter command before accepting any changes to parameter Default: 0
Communications ENTER
H5-11 settings. Min: 0
Function Selection
1: Parameter changes are activated immediately without the Enter command. Max: 1
<14> If this parameter is set to 0, the drive will be unable to respond to MEMOBUS/Modbus commands.
Parameter Table
B
B Parameter Table
◆ L: Protection Functions
L parameters provide protection to the drive and motor, including control during momentary power loss, Stall Prevention,
frequency detection, fault reset, overtorque detection, torque limits, and other types of hardware protection.
■ L1: Motor Protection

0: Disabled
1: General purpose motor (standard fan cooled) Default: <5>
Motor Overload Protection
L1-01 2: Drive dedicated motor with a speed range of 1:10 Min: 0
Selection
3: Vector motor with a speed range of 1:100 Max: 5
5: PM motor with constant torque characteristics
Default: 1.0 min
Motor Overload Protection
L1-02 Sets the motor thermal overload protection (oL1) time. Min: 0.1 min
Time
Max: 5.0 min
Default: 1
Continuous Electrothermal 0: Disabled
L1-13 Min: 0
Operation Selection 1: Enabled
Max: 1
■ L2: Undervoltage Detection

Default: <9> <15>
Undervoltage Detection
L2-05 Sets the DC bus undervoltage trip level. Min: 150 Vdc
Level (Uv)
Max: 210 Vdc <9>
<15> Default setting value is dependent on the setting for the input voltage (E1-01).
■ L3: Stall Prevention

0: Disabled.
1: General purpose. Acceleration is paused as long as the current is above the L3-02 Default: 1
Stall Prevention Selection
L3-01 setting. Min: 0
during Acceleration
2: Intelligent. Accelerate in the shortest possible time without exceeding the L3-02 Max: 2
level.
Default: <16>
Stall Prevention Level
L3-02 Used when L3-01 = 1 or 2. 100% is equal to the drive rated current. Min: 0%
during Acceleration
Max: 150% <16>
0: Disabled. Drive runs at a set frequency. A heavy load may cause speed loss.
1: Decel time 1. Uses the deceleration ramp set to C1-02 while Stall Prevention is Default: 1
Stall Prevention Selection
L3-05 performed. Min: 0
during Run
2: Decel time 2. Uses the deceleration ramp set to C1-04 while Stall Prevention is Max: 2
performed.
Default: <16>
Stall Prevention Level
L3-06 Enabled when L3-05 is set to 1 or 2. 100% is equal to the drive rated current. Min: 30%
during Run
Max: 150% <16>
<16> The setting value is dependent on the setting for the carrier frequency reduction (L8-38).
B Parameter Table
■ L4: Speed Detection

Default: 0.0%
Speed Agreement
L4-01 Min: 0.0%
Detection Level
L4-01 sets the speed detection level for digital output functions H2- = 3, 4, 5. Max: 100.0%
L4-02 sets the hysteresis or allowable margin for speed detection. Default: 4.0%
Speed Agreement
L4-02 Min: 0.0%
Detection Width
Max: 40.0%
Default: 0.0%
Speed Agreement
L4-03 Min: –100.0%
Detection Level (+/-) L4-03 sets the speed detection level for digital output functions H2- = 13, 14, 15,
Max: 100.0%
16.
Default: 4.0%
Speed Agreement L4-04 sets the hysteresis or allowable margin for speed detection.
L4-04 Min: 0.0%
Detection Width (+/-)
Max: 40.0%
Default: 0
Speed Reference Loss 0: Stop. Drive stops when the speed reference is lost.
L4-05 Min: 0
Detection Selection 1: Run. Drive runs at a reduced speed when the speed reference is lost.
Max: 1
Default: 80%
Speed Reference at Sets the percentage of the speed reference that the drive should run with when the
L4-06 Min: 0.0%
Reference Loss speed reference is lost.
Max: 100.0%
Default: 0.0%
Sets the door zone speed level. The "door zone" multi-function digital output is closed
L4-13 Door Zone Level Min: 0.0%
when the speed falls below this level.
Max: 100.0%
■ L5: Automatic Fault Reset

Default: 0
Number of Auto Reset Sets the number of times the drive may attempt to reset after the following faults
L5-01 Min: 0
Attempts occur: GF, LF, oC, ov, rr, oH1, oL1, oL2, oL3, oL4, UL3, UL4.
Max: 10
Default: 0
Fault Output Operation 0: Fault output not active.
L5-02 Min: 0
during Auto Reset 1: Fault output active during reset attempt.
Max: 1
Default: 0
Undervoltage Fault Reset 0: Same as L5-01 condition
L5-06 Min: 0
Selection 1: Always automatically reset UV1
Max: 1
■ L6: Torque Detection

0: Disabled
1: oL3 detection only active during speed agree, operation continues after detection
2: oL3 detection always active during run, operation continues after detection
3: oL3 detection only active during speed agree, output shuts down on an oL3 fault Default: 0
Torque Detection Selection
L6-01 4: oL3 detection always active during run, output shuts down on an oL3 fault Min: 0
1
5: UL3 detection only active during speed agree, operation continues after detection Max: 8
6: UL3 detection always active during run, operation continues after detection
7: UL3 detection only active during speed agree, output shuts down on an oL3 fault
8: UL3 detection always active during run, output shuts down on an oL3 fault
Default: 150%
L6-02 Torque Detection Level 1 Sets the overtorque and undertorque detection level. Min: 0%
Max: 300%
Parameter Table
Default: 0.1 s
Sets the time an overtorque or undertorque condition must exist to trigger torque
L6-03 Torque Detection Time 1 Min: 0.0 s
detection 1.
Max: 10.0 s
B
B Parameter Table

0: Disabled
1: oL4 detection only active during speed agree, operation continues after detection
2: oL4 detection always active during run, operation continues after detection
3: oL4 detection only active during speed agree, output shuts down on an oL4 fault Default: 0
Torque Detection Selection
L6-04 4: oL4 detection always active during run, output shuts down on an oL4 fault Min: 0
2
5: UL4 detection only active during speed agree, operation continues after detection Max: 8
6: UL4 detection always active during run, operation continues after detection
7: UL4 detection only active during speed agree, output shuts down on an oL4 fault
8: UL4 detection always active during run, output shuts down on an oL4 fault
Default: 150%
L6-05 Torque Detection Level 2 Sets the overtorque and undertorque detection level. Min: 0%
Max: 300%
Default: 0.1 s
Sets the time an overtorque or undertorque condition must exist to trigger torque
L6-06 Torque Detection Time 2 Min: 0.0 s
detection 2.
Max: 10.0 s
■ L7: Torque Limit

Default: 200%
L7-01 Forward Torque Limit Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor rated torque. Four individual Min: 0%
quadrants can be set. Max: 300%
Output Torque Default: 200%
L7-02 Reverse Torque Limit Positive Torque Min: 0%
L7-01
L7-04 Max: 300%
Motor
Regeneration r/min Default: 200%
Forward Regenerative
L7-03 REV FWD Min: 0%
Torque Limit Regeneration
Max: 300%
L7-03
L7-02 Default: 200%
Reverse Regenerative Negative Torque
L7-04 Min: 0%
Torque Limit
Max: 300%
Default: 1
Torque Limit Process at 0: Disabled
L7-16 Min: 0
Start 1: Enabled
Max: 1
■ L8: Drive Protection

Default: <4>
An overheat alarm will occur if the heatsink temperature exceeds the level set in L8-
L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level Min: 50°C
02.
Max: 150°C
0: Ramp to stop. A fault is triggered.
1: Coast to stop. A fault is triggered. Default: 3
Overheat Pre-Alarm
L8-03 2: Fast Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09. A fault is Min: 0
Operation Selection
triggered. Max: 3
3: Continue operation. An alarm is triggered.
Selects the detection of input current phase loss, power supply voltage imbalance, or
main circuit electrolytic capacitor deterioration.
Default: 1
Input Phase Loss 0: Disabled
L8-05 Min: 0
Protection Selection 1: Enabled always
Max: 3
2: Enabled during operation
3: Enabled during constant speed
When ripple is observed in the DC bus, expansion of the input bias is calculated and
Default: <4>
Input Phase Loss Detection becomes the input phase if the difference between the max and minimum values of the
L8-06 Min: 0.0%
Level ripple are greater than L8-06.
Max: 50.0%
Detection Level = 100% = Voltage class × 2 (determines standards for setting values)
B Parameter Table

Output Phase Loss
L8-07 1: Enabled (triggered by a single phase loss) Min: 0
Protection Selection
2: Enabled (triggered when two phases are lost) Max: 2
Default: 1
Output Ground Fault 0: Disabled
L8-09 Min: 0
Detection Selection 1: Enabled
Max: 1
0: Run with timer (Fan operates only during run and for L8-11 seconds after stop.)
Default: 0
Heatsink Cooling Fan 1: Run always (Cooling fan operates whenever the drive is powered up.)
L8-10 Min: 0
Operation Selection 2: Temperature controlled (Cooling fan operated depending on the temperature of the
Max: 2
drives heatsink.)
Default: 60 s
Heatsink Cooling Fan Off Sets a delay time to shut off the cooling fan after the Up/Down command is removed
L8-11 Min: 0 s
Delay Time when L8-10 = 0.
Max: 300 s
Default: 40°C
Ambient Temperature
L8-12 Enter the ambient temperature. This value adjusts the oL2 detection level. Min: -10°C
Setting
Max: 50°C
oL2 (drive overload) Default: 1
0: No oL2 level reduction below 6 Hz.
L8-15 Characteristics Selection at Min: 0
1: oL2 level is reduced linearly below 6 Hz. It is halved at 0 Hz.
Low Speeds Max: 1
Sets the gain for overcurrent detection as a percentage of the motor rated current. Default: 300.0%
Overcurrent Detection
L8-27 Overcurrent is detected using the drive’s overcurrent level or the value set to L8-27, Min: 0.0%
Gain
whichever is lower. Max: 300.0%
Default: 1
Current Unbalance 0: Disabled
L8-29 Min: 0
Detection (LF2) 1: Enabled
Max: 1
Default: <4>
L8-35 0: IP00 enclosure drive
Installation Selection Min: 0
<1> 2: IP00 enclosure drive with top protective cover
Max: 2
Torque Boost increases the output current limit while decreasing the carrier frequency
Default: 0
Automatic Torque Boost when the output current exceeds a certain value.
L8-38 Min: 0
Selection 0: Disabled
Max: 3
3: Enabled
Default: 3.0 kHz
Reduced Carrier
L8-39 Sets the reduced carrier frequency used by the Torque Boost function. Min: 1.0 kHz
Frequency
Max: 15.0 kHz
0: Disabled. L8-55 should be disabled when using a regen converter or an optional Default: 1
Internal Braking Transistor
L8-55 braking unit. Min: 0
Protection
1: Protection enabled. Max: 1
Sets stopping method when a Input phase loss fault (PF) occurs. See parameter L8-05.
0: Ramp to Stop - Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-02. Default: 1
Operation Selection at
L8-62 1: Coast to Stop Min: 0
Input Phase Loss
2: Fast Stop - Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09. Max: 3
3: Alarm only - Drive continues operation.
Default: 0
Used to suppress speed oscillations that occur with an unloaded motor and that have
L8-77 Oscillation Suppression Min: -100
the same frequency as the output frequency.
Max: 100
Default: 1
Safe Disable Operation 0: Mode 0
L8-88 Min: 0
Mode 1: Mode 1
Max: 1
<4> Default setting is determined by the drive model (o2-04).
Parameter Table
B
B Parameter Table
◆ n: Advanced Performance Set-Up

The n parameters are used to adjust more advanced performance characteristics such as speed feedback detection, Online
Tuning for motor line-to-line resistance, and PM motor control tuning.
■ n2: Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Tuning

Sets the internal speed feedback detection control gain in the automatic frequency Default: 1.00
Speed Feedback Detection
n2-01 regulator (AFR). Min: 0.00
Control (AFR) Gain
If hunting occurs, increase the set value. If response is low, decrease the set value. Max: 10.00
Speed Feedback Detection Default: 50 ms
n2-02 Control (AFR) Time Sets the time constant used for speed feedback detection control (AFR). Min: 0 ms
Constant 1 Max: 2000 ms
Speed Feedback Detection Default: 750 ms
n2-03 Control (AFR) Time Sets the AFR time constant to be used during regen. Min: 0 ms
Constant 2 Max: 2000 ms
■ n5: Inertia Compensation

Default: 0
Inertia Compensation 0: Disabled
n5-01 Min: 0
Selection 1: Enabled
Max: 1
Default: <4>
Sets the time required to accelerate the motor at 100% torque from 0 to the nominal
n5-02 Motor Acceleration Time Min: 0.001 s
speed.
Max: 10.000 s
Default: 1.00
Sets the ratio between motor and load inertia. Lower this setting if overshoot occurs at
n5-03 Inertia Compensation Gain Min: 0.00
the end of acceleration.
Max: 100.00
Speed Feedback
n5-07 1: Enabled Min: 0
Compensation Selection
2: Test Mode Max: 2
Default: 12.00
Speed Feedback
n5-08 Sets the proportional gain for the Speed Feedback Compensation. Min: 0.00
Compensation Gain (P)
Max: 300.00
■ n6: Online Tuning

n6-01 Online Tuning Selection 1: Line-to-line resistance tuning Min: 0
2: Voltage correction. Max: 2
Default: 1.0
Decrease this setting for motors with a relatively large rotor time constant.
n6-05 Online Tuning Gain Min: 0.1
If overload occurs, increase this setting slowly in increments of 0.1.
Max: 50.0
■ n8: PM Motor Control Tuning

Sets the current used for initial rotor position estimation as a percentage of the motor Default: 50%
Initial Polarity Estimation
n8-01 rated current (E5-03). If the motor nameplate lists an “Si” value, that value should be Min: 0%
Current
entered here. Max: 100%
Default: 80%
Sets the current during initial polar attraction as a percentage of the motor rated
n8-02 Pole Attraction Current Min: 0%
current. Enter a high value when attempting to increase starting torque.
Max: 150%
B Parameter Table

Default:
q-Axis Current Control
1000 rad/s
n8-29 Gain during Normal Sets the q axis proportional gain for the normal control range.
Min: 0 rad/s
Operation
Max: 2000 rad/s
q-Axis Current Control Default: 10.0 ms
n8-30 Integral Time during Sets the q axis integral time for the normal control range. Min: 0.0 ms
Normal Operation Max: 100.0 ms
Default:
d-Axis Current Control
1000 rad/s
n8-32 Gain during Normal Sets the d axis proportional gain for the normal control range.
Min: 0 rad/s
Operation
Max: 2000 rad/s
d-Axis Current Control Default: 10.0 ms
n8-33 Integral Time during Sets the d axis integral time for the normal control range. Min: 0.0 ms
Normal Operation Max: 100.0 ms
Default: 1
Initial Rotor Position 1: High frequency injection
n8-35 Min: 1
Detection Selection 2: Pulse injection
Max: 2
Default: 500 Hz
High Frequency Injection Sets the frequency in Hz for the superimposed signal used for superimposed
n8-36 Min: 25 Hz
Level harmonics.
Max: 1000 Hz
Sets the amplitude for superimposed harmonics according to the voltage class of the Default: 20.0%
High Frequency Injection
n8-37 motor. Adjust this value when there is too much or too little current as a result of the Min: 0.0%
Amplitude
settings assigned to motor parameters. Max: 99.9%
Default:
Prevents output voltage saturation. Should be set just below the voltage provided by 200.0 V <9>
n8-62 Output Voltage Limit
the input power supply. Min: 0.0 V
Max: 230.0 V <9>
Default: 90 Hz
High Frequency Injection
n8-81 Sets the frequency used for Polar Detection Method 1 during Rescue Operation. Min: 25 Hz
during Rescue Operation
Max: 1000 Hz
High Frequency Injection Default: 15.0%
Sets the amplitude for High Frequency Injection during Rescue Operation as a
n8-82 Amplitude during Rescue Min: 0.1%
percentage of the voltage (200 V or 400 V).
Operation Max: 99.9%
Default: 100%
Sets the current level (E5-03) as a percentage for detecting polarity during Initial
n8-84 Polarity Detection Current Min: 0%
Polarity Estimation.
Max: 150%
Default: 0
Magnet Pole Search Error 0: Disabled
n8-86 Min: 0
Detection Selection 1: Enabled
Max: 1
■ n9: Current Detection Adjustments

Default: <4>
A/D Conversion Start Sets a delay time for starting the current signal A/D conversion. This value seldom
n9-60 Min: 0.0 μs
Delay needs to be changed.
Max: 40.0 μs
<4> Default setting is determined by the drive model (o2-04).
Parameter Table
B
B Parameter Table
◆ o: Operator Related Parameters

The o parameters set up the digital operator displays.
■ o1: Digital Operator Display Selection

Switches the display after the power has been turned on. When using an LED Default: 106
o1-01 Drive Mode Unit Monitor operator, pressing the up arrow key will display the following data: (Monitor U1-06)
Selection frequency reference → rotational direction → output frequency → output current → Min: 105
output voltage → U1-. Max: 699
o1-02 selects the information that is displayed when the power is turned on.
1: Speed reference (U1-01)
o1-02 Default: 1
User Monitor Selection 2: Direction
Min: 1
after Power Up 3: Output speed (U1-02)
Max: 5
4: Output current (U1-03)
5: User-selected monitor (set by o1-01)
Sets the units the drive should use to display the frequency reference and motor speed
monitors.
0: 0.01 Hz
1: 0.01% (100% = E1-04)
Default: 1
Digital Operator Display 2: r/min (calculated using the number of motor poles setting in E2-04, E4-04,
o1-03 Min: 0
Unit Selection or E5-04)
Max: 6 <21>
3: User-selected units (set by o1-10 and o1-11)
4: Elevator units 1 (speed in m/s, accel/decel rate and jerk in s)
5: Elevator units 2 (speed in m/s, accel/decel rate in m/s2, jerk in m/s3)
6: Elevator units 3 (speed in ft/min, accel/decel rate in ft/s2, jerk in ft/s3)
Default: <5>
0: Hz
o1-04 V/f Pattern Setting Units Min: 0
1: r/min
Max: 1
Default: <20>
User-Set Display Units
o1-10 Min: 1
Maximum Value These settings define the display values when o1-03 is set to 3.
Max: 60000
o1-10 sets the display value that is equal to the maximum output frequency.
Default: <20>
User-Set Display Units o1-11 sets the position of the decimal position.
o1-11 Min: 0
Decimal Display
Max: 3
Default: 0
0: Millimeter unit
o1-12 Length Units Min: 0
1: Inch unit
Max: 1
Default:
400 mm <38>
o1-20 Traction Sheave Diameter Sets the traction sheave diameter for display unit calculations. Min: 100 mm
Max:
2000 mm <38>
Sets the roping ratio.
1: 1:1 Default: 2
o1-21 Roping Ratio 2: 1:2 Min: 1
3: 1:3 Max: 4
4: 1:4
Default: <5>
o1-22 Mechanical Gear Ratio Sets the ratio of the gear installed for display unit calculations. Min: 0.10
Max: 50.00
<20> This parameter appears when the drive displays user-set units (o1-03 = 3).
<21> The control mode determines the selections available. In V/f Control, only settings 1 through 3 are permitted.
<38> Default setting and setting range changes when inches are selected for the length units (o1-12 = 1). The setting range becomes 3.70 to 78.00
inches, and the default becomes 15.70 inches.
B Parameter Table
■ o2: Digital Operator Keypad Functions

Default: 0
LO/RE Key Function 0: Disabled
o2-01 Min: 0
Selection 1: Enabled. LO/RE key switches between LOCAL and REMOTE operation.
Max: 1
Default: 0
STOP Key Function 0: Disabled. STOP key is disabled in REMOTE operation.
o2-02 Min: 0
Selection 1: Enabled. STOP key is always enabled.
Max: 1
0: No change. Default: 0
User Parameter Default
o2-03 1: Set defaults. Saves parameter settings as default values for a User Initialization. Min: 0
Value
2: Clear all. Clears the default settings that have been saved for a User Initialization. Max: 2
Default:
Determined by
o2-04
Drive Model Selection Enter the drive model. Setting required only if installing a new control board. drive capacity
<1>
Min: –
Max: –
0: ENTER key must be pressed to enter a speed reference. Default: 0
Speed Reference Setting
o2-05 1: ENTER key is not required. The speed reference can be adjusted using the up and Min: 0
Method Selection
down arrow keys only. Max: 1
Operation Selection when Default: 0
0: The drive continues operating if the digital operator is disconnected.
o2-06 Digital Operator is Min: 0
1: A fault is triggered (oPr) and the motor coasts to stop.
Disconnected Max: 1
o2-09 Reserved – –
■ o3: Copy Function

0: Copy select
1: INV → OP READ (Read parameters from the drive, saving them onto the digital
operator.)
2: OP → INV WRITE (Copy parameters from the digital operator, writing them to the Default: 0
o3-01 Copy Function Selection drive.) Min: 0
3: OP → INV VERIFY (Verify parameter settings on the drive to check if they match Max: 3
the data saved on the operator.)
To read the drive’s parameter settings into the digital operator, set o3-02 to 1 (to allow
reading).
Selects whether the read operation (o3-01 = 1) is enabled or disabled. Default: 0
o3-02 Copy Allowed Selection 0: Read operation prohibited Min: 0
1: Read operation allowed Max: 1
Parameter Table
B
B Parameter Table
■ o4: Maintenance Monitor Settings

Default: 0
Cumulative Operation
o4-01 Sets the value for the cumulative operation time of the drive in units of 10 h. Min: 0
Time Setting
Max: 9999
Default: 0
Cumulative Operation 0: Logs power-on time
o4-02 Min: 0
Time Selection 1: Logs operation time when the drive output is active (output operation time).
Max: 1
Default: 0 h
Cooling Fan Operation
o4-03 Sets the value of the fan operation time monitor U4-03 in units of 10 h. Min: 0 h
Time Setting
Max: 9999 h
Default: 0%
Capacitor Maintenance Sets the value of the Maintenance Monitor for the capacitors. See U4-05 to check
o4-05 Min: 0%
Setting when the capacitors may need to be replaced.
Max: 150%
Default: 0%
DC bus Pre-charge Relay Sets the value of the Maintenance Monitor for the soft charge bypass relay. See U4-06
o4-07 Min: 0%
Maintenance Setting to check when the bypass relay may need to be replaced.
Max: 150%
Default: 0%
Sets the value of the Maintenance Monitor for the IGBTs. See U4-07 to check when
o4-09 IGBT Maintenance Setting Min: 0%
the IGBTs may need to be replaced.
Max: 150%
0: U2- and U3- monitor data is not reset when the drive is initialized (A1-03). Default: 0
o4-11 U2, U3 Initialization 1: Resets the data for the U2- and U3- monitors. Once o4-11 is set to 1 and Min: 0
the ENTER key is pressed, fault data is erased and the display returns to 0. Max: 1
0: U4-10 and U4-11 monitor data is not reset when the drive is initialized (A1-03).
Default: 0
1: Resets the kWh counter. The monitors U4-10 and U4-11 will display "0" after they
o4-12 kWh Monitor Initialization Min: 0
are initialized. Once o4-12 is set to 1 and the ENTER key is pressed, kWh data is
Max: 1
erased and the display returns to 0.
0: Keep the number of travels counter value. The counter is not reset when the drive is
initialized (A1-03). Default: 0
Number of Travels
o4-13 1: Resets the number 0 travels counter. The monitor U4-24/25 will show 0. Once o4- Min: 0
Counter Reset
13 is set to 1 and the ENTER key is pressed, the counter value is erased and the Max: 1
display returns to 0.
After a maintenance alarm output has been triggered, o4-15 determines the level that Default: 2%
o4-15 Maintenance Alarm
will trigger the next alarm for the same component. The same alarm will be triggered Min: 0%
<1> Snooze Period
by the detection level that triggered the original alarm plus the level set in o4-15. Max: 20%
Selects the Maintenance Monitor using bits 0 to 3.
0: LT1 (cooling fan) Default: 1000
o4-16 Maintenance Monitoring
1: LT2 (DC bus capacitors) Min: 0000
<1> Selection
2: LT3 (soft-charge bypass relay) Max: 1111
3: LT4 (IGBTs have passed 90% of the their life expectancy)
<1> Parameter setting value is not reset to the default value during drive initialization (A1-03).
B Parameter Table
◆ S: Elevator Parameters
This section describes various functions and faults needed to operate an elevator application: braking sequence, slip
compensation for elevators, start/stop optimization, Rescue Operation, and elevator-related faults.
■ S1: Brake Sequence

Determines the speed to begin applying DC Injection (or Position Lock) when the Default: <5>
S1-01 Zero Speed Level at Stop drive is ramping to stop (b1-03 = 0). Set as a percentage of the maximum output Min: 0.000%
frequency (E1-04). Max: 9.999%
Default: 50%
DC Injection Current at Determines the amount of current to use for DC Injection at start. Set as a percentage
S1-02 Min: 0%
Start of the drive rated current.
Max: 100%
Default: 50%
DC Injection Current at Determines the amount of current to use for DC Injection at stop. Set as a percentage
S1-03 Min: 0%
Stop of the drive rated current.
Max: 100%
Determines how long the drive should perform DC Injection at start. In CLV and Default: 0.40s
DC Injection/Position
S1-04 CLV/PM, S1-04 determines how long Position Lock should be performed. A setting Min: 0.00 s
Lock Time at Start
of 0.00 disables S1-04. Max: 10.00 s
Determines how long the drive should perform DC Injection at stop. In CLV and Default: 0.60s
DC Injection/Position
S1-05 CLV/PM, S1-05 determines how long Position Lock should be performed. A setting Min: 0.00 s
Lock Time at Stop
of 0.00 disables S1-05. Max: 10.00 s
Determines the delay time between the start of DC injection/Position Lock and setting Default: 0.20s
S1-06 Brake Release Delay Time the brake control command (H2-=50) in order to release the brake at the Min: 0.00 s
beginning of the ride. Max: 10.00 s
Determines the delay time between reaching Zero Speed (S1-01) and resetting the Default: 0.10s
S1-07 Brake Close Delay Time brake control command (H2- = 50) in order to apply the brake at the end of the Min: 0.00 s
ride. Max: [S1-05]
Default: 0.10s
Run Command Delay Sets the time that must pass after the Up/Down command is entered until the drive
S1-10 Min: 0.00 s
Time internal Run command is set and the ride is started.
Max: 1.00 s
Determines the delay time between shutting off the output of the drive and resetting Default: 0.10s
Output Contactor Open
S1-11 the contactor control command (H2- = 51) in order to release the motor contactor Min: 0.00 s
Delay Time
after a ride has finished. Max: 1.00 s
Determines the state of the output contactor control command (H2- = 51) during
Default: 0
S1-12 Motor Contactor Control Auto-Tuning.
Min: 0
<39> During Auto-Tuning 0: Disabled
Max: 1
1: Enabled
■ S2: Slip Compensation for Elevators

Default: 1380 rpm
S2-01 Motor Rated Speed Sets the motor rated speed. Min: 300 rpm
Max: 1800 rpm
S2-02 Default: 0.7
Slip Compensation Gain in
Min: 0.0
Motoring Mode
Slip compensation for leveling speed can be set separately for motoring and Max: 5.0
S2-03 regenerative states. This can help improve the accuracy of leveling. Default: 1.0
Slip Compensation Gain in
Min: 0.0
Parameter Table
Regenerative Mode
Max: 5.0
Default: 1000 ms
Slip Compensation Torque
S2-05 Sets a delay time before detecting torque for slip compensation. Min: 0 ms
Max: 10000 ms
B
B Parameter Table

Slip Compensation Torque Default: 500 ms
Sets the filter time constant applied to the torque signal used for the slip compensation
S2-06 Detection Filter Time Min: 0 ms
value calculation.
Constant Max: 2000 ms
■ S3: Start/Stop Optimization

S3-01 Default: 5
Position Lock Gain at Start
Min: 0
1
Sets gain levels 1 and 2 for the Position Lock function. Position Lock at start attempts Max: 100
S3-02 to keep the car position when opening the brake in order to avoid roll back. Default: 0.00
Position Lock Gain at Start
Min: 0.00
2 (Anti Rollback Gain)
Max: 100.00
S3-03 Default: 5
Sets the Position Lock gain at stop. Position Lock at stop keeps the car in position
Position Lock Gain at Stop Min: 0
until the brake has been applied entirely.
Max: 100
Default: 10
Determines the bandwidth around the stop position in which a digital output
S3-04 Position Lock Bandwidth Min: 0
programmed for "Within Position Lock Bandwidth" (H2- = 33) is closed.
Max: 16383
Starting Torque Default: 500 ms
Sets a time constant for the torque reference to reach 300%. Enabled by setting an
S3-10 Compensation Increase Min: 0 ms
analog input terminal for torque compensation (H3- = 14).
Time Max: 5000 ms
Starting Torque Default: 0
Adds a bias to torque compensation value from the load cell when moving in down
S3-12 Compensation Bias in Min: -40.0%
direction.
Down Direction Max: 40.0%
Sets the speed level for torque compensation to fade out during the time determined Default: 0.0%
Torque Compensation
S3-14 by S3-15. Sets as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04). A setting Min: 0.0%
Fade Out Speed
of 0.0% essentially disables this function. Max: 100%
Default: 1000 ms
Torque Compensation Sets the time for torque compensation to fade out once motor speed reaches the level
S3-15 Min: 0 ms
Fade Out Time set in S3-14.
Max: 5000 ms
Determines the reduction rate used bring the internal torque reference value down to
Default: 100 ms
Torque Limit Reduction zero after Position Lock at Stop has finished.
S3-16 Min: 0 ms
Time Rate = Torque 300% Max: 10000 ms
S3-16
Default: 0.00%
Sets the speed reference for the Dwell 2 function.
S3-20 Dwell 2 Speed Reference Min: 0.00%
Note: A setting of 0.00 essentially disables the Dwell 2 function.
Max: 100.00%
The Dwell 2 function will end when the drive reaches this speed. Default: 0.00%
S3-21 Dwell 2 End Speed Note: A setting of 0.00 will disable the acceleration rate switch that occurs at the end Min: 0.00%
of Dwell 2. Max: 100.00%
Sets the gain level applied to the DC injection current at stop (S1-03) for when the Default: 100%
DC Injection Gain in
S3-25 load is 100% regenerative. The current applied during DC Injection at stop is Min: 0%
Regenerative Operation
determined as S1-03 × S3-25. Max: 400%
Sets the gain level applied to the DC injection current at stop (S1-03) for when the Default: 20%
DC Injection Gain in
S3-26 load is 100% motoring. The current applied during DC Injection at stop is determined Min: 0%
Motoring Operation
as S1-03 × S3-26. Max: 400%
Torque Compensation Default: –50%
Used for starting torque compensation utilizing a load cell signal. Sets the torque
S3-27 Value with Load Condition Min: –100%
compensation value for load condition 1.
1 Max: 100%
Torque Compensation Default: 50%
Used for starting torque compensation utilizing a load cell signal. Sets the torque
S3-28 Value with Load Condition Min: –100%
compensation value for load condition 2.
2 Max: 100%
Default: 0.0%
Analog Input from Load Used for starting torque compensation utilizing a load cell signal. Sets the analog
S3-29 Min: –100%
Cell with Load Condition 1 signal level from the load cell for load condition 1.
Max: 100%
B Parameter Table

Default: 100.0%
Analog Input from Load Used for starting torque compensation utilizing a load cell signal. Sets the analog
S3-30 Min: –100.0%
Cell with Load Condition 2 signal level from the load cell for load condition 2.
Max: 100%
Default: 0.0%
Anti-Rollback Torque Bias Sets the Anti-Rollback Bias applied at small position deviations during Position Lock
S3-34 Min: 0.0%
1 at start.
Max: 100.0%
Default: 0.0%
Anti-Rollback Torque Bias Sets the Anti-Rollback Bias applied at large position deviations during Position Lock
S3-35 Min: 0.0%
2 at start.
Max: 100.0%
Default: 0
Position Deviation Level to
S3-37 Sets the position deviation level to active at Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 1 (S3-34). Min: 0
Apply ARB Torque Bias 1
Max: 32767
Default: 0
Position Deviation Level to Determines the position deviation level for when the drive should switch from the
S3-38 Min: 0
Apply ARB Torque Bias 2 torque bias set in S3-34 to the torque bias set in S3-35.
Max: 32767
Default: 0.00
Anti-Rollback Integral
S3-39 Determines the drive’s responsiveness for Anti-Rollback during Position Lock. Min: –30.00
Gain
Max: 30.00
Default: 1 pulse
Anti-Rollback Movement
S3-40 Sets the amount of pulses for movement detection during Anti-Rollback. Min: 0 pulse
Detection
Max: 100 pulses
Default: 0.50
Position Lock Gain at Start Sets a reduction factor for the Position Lock Gain at Start 2 (Anti-Rollback Gain) set
S3-41 Min: 0.00
2 Reduction in parameter S3-02.
Max: 1.00
■ S4: Rescue Operation

Light Load Direction
S4-01 1: Enabled Min: 0
Search Selection
2: Enabled for Motor 1 only Max: 2
Determines how the drive detects the light load direction. Default: 1
S4-02 0: Output Current Min: 0
Search Method
1: Regenerative direction detection Max: 1
Default: 1.0 s
S4-03 Sets the time to perform Light Load Direction Search. Min: 0.0 s
Search Time
Max: 5.0 s
Default: <5>
S4-04 Sets the speed reference to use during Light Load Direction Search. Min: 0.00%
Search Speed Reference
Max: 20.00%
Default: 100%
Rescue Operation Torque
S4-05 Sets the torque limit used during Rescue Operation. Min: 0%
Limit
Max: 300%
0: Battery Default: 0
Rescue Operation Power
S4-06 1: UPS (single-phase) Min: 0
Supply Selection
2: UPS (3-phase) Max: 2
Default: 0.0 kVA
S4-07 UPS Power Sets the capacity of the UPS. Min: 0.0 kVA
Max: 100.0 kVA
Determines how a speed limit should be applied to the Rescue Operation speed (d1-
25) when operating from a UPS. Default: 2
UPS Operation Speed
S4-08 0: Disabled Min: 0
Limit Selection
Parameter Table
1: Enabled until Light Load Direction Search is complete Max: 2

2: Enabled until stop
Default: 0 V
DC Bus Voltage during
S4-12 Sets the DC bus voltage during Rescue Operation. Min: 0 V
Rescue Operation
Max: 800 V
B
B Parameter Table

Rescue Operation Power Default: 80%
Determines at which level of backup power supply deterioration a PF5 fault is
S4-13 Supply Deterioration Min: 10%
triggered.
Detection Level Max: 100%
Default: 0
S4-15 Speed Reference Selection
Selects the speed reference used for Rescue Operation. Min: 0
<39> for Rescue Operation
Max: 1
■ S5: Short Floor Operation

Short Floor Operation
S5-01 1: Enabled (Short Floor) Min: 0
Selection
2: Enabled (Advance Short Floor) Max: 2
Default: 0.0%
Nominal Speed for Short When d1-18 (Speed Priority Selection) is set to 0 or 3, S5-02 determines the rated
S5-02 Min: 0.0%
Floor Calculation speed used during Short Floor.
Max: 100.0%
Default: 0.0 s
Short Floor Minimum Sets the minimum operation time when the Advanced Short Floor function is enabled
S5-03 Min: 0.0 s
Constant Speed Time (S5-01 = 2).
Max: 2.0 s
Default: 150.0%
Distance Calculation
S5-04 Set for acceleration jerk compensation in Distance Calculation. Min: 50.0%
Acceleration Time Gain
Max: 200.0%
Default: 150.0%
Distance Calculation
S5-05 Set for deceleration jerk compensation in Distance Calculation. Min: 50.0%
Deceleration Time Gain
Max: 200.0%
S5-10 Stopping Method Selection 1: Direct Landing Min: 0
2: Leveling Distance Control Max: 2
Default: 0 mm
Min: 0 mm
S5-11 Deceleration Distance Sets the deceleration distance when Stop Distance Control is enabled.
Max:
32767 mm <36>
Default: 0 mm
Min: 0 mm
S5-12 Stop Distance Sets the stopping distance when Stop Distance Control is enabled.
Max:
10000 mm <37>
Sets the speed level for the start of Direct Landing. Default: 20%
Direct Landing Minimum
S5-13 Direct Landing is essentially disabled if the starting speed for Direct Landing is less Min: 0%
Speed Level
than the maximum output speed multiplied by this parameter (E1-04 × S5-13). Max: 100%
<36> When the length units are set for inches (o1-12 = 1), the setting range becomes 0.00 to 650.00 inches.
<37> When the length units are set for inches (o1-12 = 1), the setting range becomes 0.00 to 393.00 inches.
B Parameter Table
■ S6: Error Detection

Motor Contactor Response 0: Detect during stop, SE1 must be manually reset Default: 0
S6-01 Error (SE1) Detection/ 1: Detect during stop, SE1 can be automatically reset Min: 0
Reset Selection 2: No SE1 detection Max: 2
Default: 200 ms
Starting Current Error
Min: 0.00 ms
S6-02 (SE2) Detection Delay Sets a delay time for detecting SE2.
Max:
Time
[S1-04]-[S1-06]
Default: 200 ms
Output Current Error (SE3)
S6-04 Sets a delay time for detecting SE3. Min: 0 ms
Max: 5000 ms
Default: 500 ms
Brake Response Error
S6-05 Sets a delay time for detecting SE4. Min: 0 ms
(SE4) Detection Time
Max: 10000 ms
If the elevator car accelerates at an abnormal rate, the drive triggers an overspeed fault Default: <7>
S6-10 (dv6) and has the motor coast to stop. Parameter S6-10 determines the acceleration Min: 0.0 m/s2
Level
rate that triggers a fault. Max: 20.0 m/s2 <7>
Default: 50 ms
S6-11 Sets a primary delay for detecting overacceleration. Min: 0 ms
Time
Max: 5000 ms
Default: 0
Overacceleration Detection 0: Always enabled
S6-12 Min: 0
Selection 1: During run only
Max: 1
Enabled or disables detection for speed reference missing (FrL). Default: 1
Speed Reference Loss
S6-15 0: Disabled Min: 0
Detection
1: Enabled Max: 1
Default: 0
Restart after Baseblock 0: No restart after Baseblock/Safe Torque-Off
S6-16 Min: 0
Selection 1: Restart after Baseblock/Safe Torque-Off
Max: 1
<7> Default setting value is determined by the digital operator display unit selection (o1-03). The default is normally 1.5 m/s2, but when o1-03 = 6,
the default becomes 5.0 ft/s2 (Setting Range: 0.0 to 50.0 ft/s2).
◆ T: Motor Tuning
Enter data into the following parameters to tune the motor and drive for optimal performance.
■ T1: Induction Motor Auto-Tuning

0: Rotational Auto-Tuning
Default: 0 <5>
Auto-Tuning Mode 1: Stationary Auto-Tuning 1
T1-01 Min: 0
Selection 2: Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance
Max: 4 <18>
4: Stationary Auto-Tuning 2
Sets the motor rated power as specified on the motor nameplate. Default: <4>
T1-02 Motor Rated Power Note: Use the following formula to convert horsepower into kilowatts: Min: 0.00 kW
kW = HP × 0.746. Max: 650.00 kW
Default:
200.0 V <9>
T1-03 Motor Rated Voltage Sets the motor rated voltage as specified on the motor nameplate.
Min: 0.0 V
Max: 255.0 V <9>
Parameter Table
Default: <4>
Min: 10% of drive
rated current
T1-04 Motor Rated Current Sets the motor rated current as specified on the motor nameplate.
Max: 200% of
drive rated
current <10>
B
B Parameter Table

Default: 50.0 Hz
T1-05 Motor Base Frequency Sets the rated frequency of the motor as specified on the motor nameplate. Min: 0.0 Hz
Max: 120.0 Hz
Default: 4
T1-06 Number of Motor Poles Sets the number of motor poles as specified on the motor nameplate. Min: 2
Max: 48
Default:
1450 r/min
T1-07 Motor Base Speed Sets the rated speed of the motor as specified on the motor nameplate.
Min: 0 r/min
Max: 24000 r/min
Default: 1024 ppr
Encoder Resolution Set the number of pulses per revolution for the PG being used (pulse generator or
T1-08 Min: 0 ppr
(pulses per revolution) encoder).
Max: 60000 ppr
Sets the no-load current for the motor. Default: –
Motor No-Load Current
After setting the motor capacity to T1-02 and the motor rated current to T1-04, this Min: 0 A
T1-09 (Stationary Auto-Tuning 1
parameter will automatically display the no-load current for a standard 4 pole Max:
and 2)
Magnetek motor. Enter the no-load current as indicated on the motor test report. Up to T1-04 <10>
Sets the motor rated slip.
Default: –
Motor Rated Slip After setting the motor capacity to T1-02, this parameter will automatically display
T1-10 Min: 0.00 Hz
(Stationary Auto-Tuning 2) the motor slip for a standard 4 pole Magnetek motor. Enter the motor slip as indicated
Max: 20.00 Hz
on the motor test report.
units.
<18> The variety of Auto-Tuning methods depends on the control mode setting. V/f Control allows T1-01 to be set to 2 or 3, while vector control
modes (OLV and CLV) allow T1-01 to be set to 0 through 4.
■ T2: PM Motor Auto-Tuning

0: Motor Data input
1: Stationary Auto-Tuning
2: Stationary stator resistance Auto-Tuning Default: 0
Motor Auto-Tuning Mode
T2-01 3: Initial magnet pole search parameters Auto-Tuning Min: 0
Selection
4: Encoder offset stationary Auto-Tuning Max: 11
10: Encoder offset rotational Auto-Tuning
11: Rotational back EMF constant Auto-Tuning
Default: <4>
T2-04 Motor Rated Power Sets the motor rated power as indicated on the motor nameplate. Min: 0.00 kW
Max: 650.00 kW
Default:
200.0 V <9>
T2-05 Motor Rated Voltage Enter the motor rated voltage as indicated on the motor nameplate.
Min: 0.0 V
Max: 255.0 V <9>
Default: <4>
Min: 10% of drive
rated current
T2-06 Motor Rated Current Enter the motor rated current as indicated on the motor nameplate.
Max: 200% of
drive rated
current <10>
Default: 6
T2-08 Number of Motor Poles Enter the number of motor poles for the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. Min: 2
Max: 48
Default: 150 r/min
T2-09 Motor Base Speed Enter the base speed for the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. Min: 0 r/min
Max: 24000 r/min
B Parameter Table

Default: –
Single Phase Stator
T2-10 Enter the 1-phase resistance of the stator winding. Min: 0.000 Ω
Resistance
Max: 65.000 Ω
Default: –
T2-11 Motor d-Axis Inductance Enter the d-axis inductance for the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. Min: 0.00 mH
Max: 600.00 mH
Default: –
T2-12 Motor q-Axis Inductance Enter the q-axis inductance for the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. Min: 0.00 mH
Max: 600.00 mH
Default: 1
Induced Voltage Constant 0: mV/(r/min). E5-09 will automatically be set to 0.0, and E5-24 will be used.
T2-13 Min: 0
Unit Selection 1: mV/(rad/sec). E5-24 will automatically be set to 0.0, and E5-09 will be used.
Max: 1
Default: –
Motor Induced Voltage Enter the induced voltage coefficient for the motor as indicated on the motor
T2-14 Min: 0.0
Constant nameplate.
Max: 6500.0 <30>
Default: 1024 ppr
Sets the number of pulses per revolution for the PG being used (pulse generator or
T2-16 Encoder Resolution Min: 1 ppr
encoder).
Max: 15000 ppr
Default: 0.0 deg
T2-17 Encoder Offset Sets the offset between encoder offset and the rotor magnetic axis. Min: -180.0 deg
Max: 180.0 deg
units.
<30> Setting units are determined by the induced voltage constant unit selection for PM motors set to T2-13.
◆ U: Monitors
Monitor parameters allow the user to view drive status, fault information, and other data concerning drive operation.
■ U1: Operation Status Monitors
Analog Output
No. Name Description Level Unit
10 V:
0.01%
U1-01 Speed Reference Monitors the speed reference. Max frequency
<31>
(-10 to +10 V)
10 V:
0.01%
U1-02 Output Speed Displays the output speed. Max frequency
<31>
(-10 to +10 V)
10 V: Drive
U1-03 Output Current Displays the output current. <10> <40>
rated current
0: V/f Control
2: Open Loop Vector Control No signal output
U1-04 Control Method –
3: Closed Loop Vector Control available
7: Closed Loop Vector Control for PM
10 V:
0.01%
U1-05 Speed Feedback Displays the motor speed feedback. Max Frequency
<31>
(-10 to +10 V)
Output Voltage 10 V:
U1-06 Displays the output voltage. 0.1 Vac
Reference 200 Vrms <9>
Parameter Table
U1-07 DC Bus Voltage Displays the DC bus voltage. 10 V: 400 V <9> 1 Vdc
10 V: Drive
rated power
U1-08 Output Power Displays the output power (this value is calculated internally). <12>
(kW)
(-10 to +10 V)
B
B Parameter Table
No. Name Description Analog Output Unit

Level
10 V: Motor
U1-09 Torque Reference Monitors the internal torque reference. rated torque 0.1%
(-10 to +10 V)
Displays the input terminal status.
U1 - 10= 00000000
1 Digital input 1
(terminal S1 enabled)
1 Digital input 2
1 Digital input 3
YEA_co No signal output
U1-10 Input Terminal Status 1 Digital input 4 –
available
mmon (terminal S4 enabled)
1 Digital input 5
1 Digital input 6
1 Digital input 7
1 Digital input 8
Displays the output terminal status.
U1 - 11= 00000000
1 Multi-Function
Digital Output
(terminal M1-M2)
1 Multi-Function
Digital Output
YEA_co (terminal M3-M4)
mmon 1 Multi-Function
Digital Output No signal output
U1-11 Output Terminal Status –
(terminal M5-M6) available
1 Multi-Function
Digital Output
(terminal P1-C1)
1 Multi-Function
Digital Output
(terminal P2-C2)
Not Used
1Fault Relay
(terminal MA-MC closed
MA-MC open)
Displays the drive operation status.
U1 - 12= 00000000
1 During run
1 During zero-speed
YEAco 1 During down direction No signal output
U1-12 Drive Status mmon 1 During fault reset –
signal input available
1 During speed agree
1 Drive ready
1 During alarm
detection
1 During fault detection
Terminal A1 Input 10 V: 100%
U1-13 Displays the voltage input to terminal A1. 0.1%
Voltage (-10 to +10 V)
Terminal A2 Input 10 V: 100%
U1-14 Displays the voltage input to terminal A2. 0.1%
Voltage (-10 to +10 V)
10 V:
Output Speed after Soft Displays output speed with ramp time and jerk settings. Units determined by 0.01%
U1-16 Max frequency
Start o1-03. <31>
(-10 to +10 V)
B Parameter Table

Level
Displays the reference value input from the DI-A3 option card.
DI-A3 Option Card Display will appear in hexadecimal as determined by the digital card input No signal output
U1-17 –
Input Status selection in F3-01. available
3FFFF: Set (1 bit) + sign (1 bit) + 16 bit
No signal output
U1-18 oPE Fault Parameter Displays the parameter number that caused the oPE02 or oPE08 (Operation error). –
available
Displays the contents of a MEMOBUS/Modbus error.
U1 - 19= 00000000
1 CRC Error
1 Data Length Error
MEMOBUS/Modbus YEAcom 0 Not Used No signal output
U1-19 –
Error Code available
mon 1 Parity Error
1 Overrun Error
1 Framing Error
1 Timed Out
0 Not Used
Software Number No signal output
U1-25 FLASH ID –
(Flash) available
No signal output
U1-26 Software No. (ROM) ROM ID –
available
units.
4A0018 display values in 0.01 kW units, while models CIMR-LU2A0047 to 2A0415 and CIMR-LU4A0024 to 4A0260 display values in 0.1
kW units.
<31> Setting units are determined by the digital operator display unit selection (o1-03). When o1-03 = 0, the value is set in Hertz. When o1-03 = 4 or
5, the value is displayed in m/s. When o1-03 = 6, the value is displayed in ft/min.
<40> When checking the values of U1-03, U2-05 and U4-13 with the digital operator they are displayed in units of amperes, but when they are
checked using MEMOBUS communications, the monitor value in MEMOBUS communications is: displayed numeric value / 8192 × drive’s
rated current (A), from the condition “8192 (maximum value) = drive’s rated current (A)”.
Parameter Table
B
B Parameter Table
■ U2: Fault Trace

Level
No signal output
U2-01 Current Fault Displays the current fault. –
available
No signal output
U2-02 Previous Fault Displays the previous fault. –
available
Speed Reference at No signal output 0.01%
U2-03 Displays the speed reference at the previous fault.
Previous Fault available <31>
Output Speed at No signal output 0.01%

U2-04 Displays the output speed at the previous fault.
Output Current at No signal output

U2-05 Displays the output current at the previous fault. <10> <40>
Previous Fault available
Motor Speed at No signal output 0.01%
U2-06 Displays the motor speed at the previous fault.
Output Voltage at No signal output

U2-07 Displays the output voltage at the previous fault. 0.1 Vac
DC Bus Voltage at No signal output
U2-08 Displays the DC bus voltage at the previous fault. 1 Vdc
Output Power at No signal output
U2-09 Displays the output power at the previous fault. 0.1 kW
Torque Reference at No signal output
U2-10 Displays the torque reference at the previous fault. 0.1%
Input Terminal Status at No signal output
U2-11 Displays the input terminal status at the previous fault. Displayed as in U1-10. –
Output Terminal Status No signal output
U2-12 Displays the output status at the previous fault. Displayed as in U1-11. –
at Previous Fault available
Drive Operation Status Displays the operation status of the drive at the previous fault. Displayed as in No signal output
U2-13 –
at Previous Fault U1-12. available
Cumulative Operation No signal output
U2-14 Displays the cumulative operation time at the previous fault. 1h
Time at Previous Fault available
Soft Starter Output at Displays the run speed after a soft start when a previous fault occurred. Displayed No signal output 0.01%
U2-15
Previous Fault as in U1-16. available <31>
Motor q-Axis Current at Displays the q-axis current for the motor at the previous fault. Displayed as in U6- No signal output
U2-16 0.1%
Previous Fault 01. available
Motor d-Axis Current at Displays the d-axis current for the motor at the previous fault. Displayed as in U6- No signal output
U2-17 0.1%
Previous Fault 02. available
Heatsink Temperature Displays the temperature of the heatsink when the most recent fault occurred. No signal output
U2-20 1°C
at Previous Fault Displayed as in U4-08. available
Peak Hold Current No signal output
U2-21 Displays the peak current that occurred just prior to the previous fault. 0.01 A
during Fault available
Peak Hold Frequency Displays the output frequency when the peak current displayed in U2-21 No signal output
U2-22 0.01 Hz
during Fault occurred. available
units.
B Parameter Table
■ U3: Fault History

Level
U3-01 to First to 4th Most Recent No signal output
Displays the first to the fourth most recent faults. –
U3-04 Fault available
Displays the fifth to the tenth most recent faults.
U3-05 to 5th to 10th Most Recent After ten faults have occurred in the drive, data for the oldest fault is deleted. The No signal output
–
U3-10 Fault most recent fault appears in U3-01, with the next most recent fault appearing in available
U3-02. The data is moved to the next monitor parameter every time a fault occurs.
U3-11 to Displays the cumulative operation time when the first to the fourth most recent No signal output
Time at 1st to 4th Most 1h
U3-14 faults occurred. available
Recent Fault
U3-15 to Displays the cumulative operation time when the fifth to the tenth most recent No signal output
Time at 5th to 10th 1h
U3-20 faults occurred. available
Most Recent Fault
■ U4: Maintenance Monitors

Level
Displays the cumulative operation time of the drive. The value for the cumulative
operation time counter can be reset in parameter o4-01. Use parameter o4-02 to
U4-01 Cumulative Operation No signal output
determine if the operation time should start as soon as the power is switched on or 1h
<41> Time available
only while the Up/Down command is present. The maximum number displayed is
99999, after which the value is reset to 0.
Displays the cumulative operation time of the cooling fan. The default value for
U4-03 Cooling Fan Operation No signal output
the fan operation time is reset in parameter o4-03. This value will reset to 0 and 1h
<42> Time available
start counting again after reaching 99999.
Displays main cooling fan usage time in as a percentage of its expected
Cooling Fan No signal output
U4-04 performance life. Parameter o4-03 can be used to reset this monitor. The fan 1%
Maintenance available
should be replaced when this monitor reaches 90%.
Displays main circuit capacitor usage time in as a percentage of their expected
No signal output
U4-05 Capacitor Maintenance performance life. The capacitors should be replaced when this monitor reaches 1%
available
90%. Parameter o4-05 can be used to reset this monitor.
Displays the soft charge bypass relay maintenance time as a percentage of its
Soft Charge Bypass No signal output
U4-06 estimated performance life. The soft charge relay should be replaced when this 1%
Relay Maintenance available
monitor reaches 90%. Parameter o4-07 can be used to reset this monitor.
Displays IGBT usage time as a percentage of the expected performance life. The
No signal output
U4-07 IGBT Maintenance IGBTs should be replaced when this monitor reaches 90%. Parameter o4-09 can 1%
available
be used to reset this monitor.
U4-08 Heatsink Temperature Displays the heatsink temperature. 10 V: 100°C 1°C
No signal output
U4-09 LED Check Lights all segments of the LED to verify that the display is working properly. –
available
Monitors the drive output power. The value is shown as a 9 digit number No signal output
U4-10 kWh, Lower 4 Digits displayed across two monitor parameters, U4-10 and U4-11. 1 kWh
available
Example:
12345678.9 kWh is displayed as:
U4-10: 678.9 kWh No signal output
U4-11 kWh, Upper 5 Digits 1 MWh
U4-11: 12345 MWh available
No signal output 0.01 A

U4-13 Peak Hold Current Displays the highest current value that occurred during a ride.
available <40>
Parameter Table
Peak Hold Output No signal output

U4-14 Displays the output frequency when the current value shown in U4-13 occurred. 0.01 Hz
Frequency available
Motor Overload Shows the value of the motor overload detection accumulator. 100% is equal to
U4-16 10 V: 100% 0.1%
Estimate (oL1) the oL1 detection level.
B
B Parameter Table

Level
Drive Overload Displays the level of the drive overload detection (oL2). A value of 100% is equal
U4-17 10 V = 100% 0.1%
Calculations (OL2) to the oL2 detection level.
Displays the source for the speed reference as XY-nn.
X: indicates which reference is used:
1 = Reference 1 (b1-01)
Y-nn: indicates the reference source
Speed Reference 0-01 = Digital operator No signal output
U4-18 –
Selection Results 1-01 = Analog (terminal A1) available
1-02 = Analog (terminal A2)
2-02 to 8 = Digital Inputs (d1-02 to 8)
3-01 = MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
4-01 = Communication option card
Speed Reference from
No signal output 0.01%
U4-19 MEMOBUS/Modbus Displays the speed reference provided by MEMOBUS/Modbus (decimal).
available <31>
Comm.
Speed Reference From No signal output 0.01%
U4-20 Displays the speed reference input by an option card (decimal).
Option Card available <31>
Displays the source for the Up/Down command as XY-nn.

X: Indicates which Up/Down command source is used:
1 = Reference 1 (b1-02)
Y: Input power supply data
0 = Digital operator
1 = External terminals
3 = MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
4 = Communication option card
nn: Up/Down command limit status data
Up/Down Command 00: No limit status. No signal output
U4-21 –
Source Selection 01: Up/Down command was left on when stopped in the PRG mode available
02: Up/Down command was left on when switching from LOCAL to REMOTE
operation
03: Waiting for soft charge bypass contactor after power up (Uv or Uv1 flashes
after 10 s)
04: Waiting for "Up/Down Command Prohibited" time period to end
05: Fast Stop (multi-function input, operator)
07: During baseblock while coast to stop with timer
08: Speed reference is below minimal reference during baseblock
09: Waiting for Enter command
MEMOBUS/Modbus
Displays the drive control data set by MEMOBUS/Modbus communications No signal output
U4-22 Communications –
register no. 0001H as a four-digit hexadecimal number. available
Reference
Communication Option Displays drive control data set by an option card as a four-digit hexadecimal No signal output
U4-23 –
Card Reference number. available
Number of Travels No signal output
U4-24 Displays the lower four digits for the number of trips the drive has made. 1 time
(Lower 4 digit) available
Number of Travels No signal output
U4-25 Displays the upper four digits for the number of trips the drive has made. 1 time
(Higher 4 digit) available
Max. Current during No signal output
U4-26 Shows the maximum current that occurred during acceleration. 0.1 A
Acceleration available
U4-27 Shows the maximum current that occurred during deceleration. 0.1 A
Deceleration available
U4-28 Shows the maximum current that occurred during ride at top speed. 0.1 A
Constant Speed available
U4-29 Shows the maximum current that occurred during ride at leveling speed. 0.1 A
Leveling Speed available
Slip Compensation No signal output
U4-30 Shows the slip compensation value. 0.01%
Value available
B Parameter Table

Level
No signal output 0.01
U4-31 Car Acceleration Rate Shows the car acceleration rate.
available m/s2
Displays the speed limit for Rescue Operation based on how much power the
Speed Reference Limit No signal output
U4-40 backup battery or UPS has. Displays 0% when Rescue Operation is not being 1%
at Rescue Operation available
performed.
10 V:
U4-42
Remaining Distance Displays the remaining distance according to the stopping method selected. S5-10 = 1: S5-11 1 mm
<35>
S5-10 = 2: S5-12
U4-43 Minimum Deceleration No signal output
Displays the Minimum Deceleration Distance calculated by E1-04. 1 mm
<35> Distance available
U4-44 Minimum Stop No signal output
Displays the Minimum Stop Distance calculated by d1-26. 1 mm
<35> Distance available
<35> o1-12 (Length Units) determines the units. When o1-12 is set to 0, the unit is millimeters. When o1-12 is set to 1, the unit is inch.
<41> The MEMOBUS communications data is in 10 h units. If data in 1 h units are also required, refer to register number 0099H.
<42> The MEMOBUS communications data is in 10 h units. If data in 1 h units are also required, refer to register number 009BH.
Note: Fault trace (i.e., the fault history) is not maintained when CPF00, CPF01, CPF06, CPF24, oFA00, oFb00, oFC00, Uv1, Uv2, or
Uv3 occur.
Parameter Table
B
B Parameter Table
■ U6: Control Monitors

Level
10 V: Motor
Motor Secondary Displays the value of the motor secondary current (Iq). Motor rated secondary secondary rated
U6-01 0.1%
Current (Iq) current is 100%. current
(-10 to +10 V)
10 V: Motor
Motor Excitation Displays the value calculated for the motor excitation current (Id). Motor rated secondary rated
U6-02 0.1%
Current (Id) secondary current is 100%. current
(-10 to +10 V)
10 V:
Speed Control Loop
U6-03 Max frequency
Input
(-10 to +10 V)
Displays the input and output values of the speed control loop. 10 V: Motor 0.01%
Speed Control Loop secondary rated
U6-04
Output current
(-10 to +10 V)
10 V:
Output Voltage
U6-05 Output voltage reference (Vq) for the q-axis. 200 Vrms <9> 0.1 Vac
Reference (Vq)
(-10 to +10 V)
10 V:
Output Voltage
U6-06 Output voltage reference (Vd) for the d-axis. 200 Vrms <9> 0.1 Vac
Reference (Vd)
(-10 to +10 V)
10 V:
q-Axis Current Displays the output value for current control relative to motor secondary current
U6-07 200 Vrms <9> 0.1%
Controller Output (q-axis).
(-10 to +10 V)
10 V:
d-Axis Current Displays the output value for current control relative to motor secondary current
U6-08 200 Vrms <9> 0.1%
Controller Output (d-axis).
(-10 to +10 V)
Flux Position Detection 10 V: 180 deg
U6-13 Monitors the value of the flux position detection (sensor). 0.1 deg
(sensor) -10 V: -180 deg
Speed Detection PG1
U6-18 Monitors the number of pulses for speed detection (PG1). 10 V: 65536 1 pulse
Counter
10 V: No. of
Position Lock Displays how far the rotor has moved from its last position in PG pulses pulses per
U6-22 1 pulse
Deviation Counter (multiplied by 4). revolution
(-10 to +10 V)
10 V: Motor
Feedback Control secondary rated
U6-25 Output monitor for the speed control loop. 0.01%
Output current
(-10 to +10 V)
10 V: Motor
Inertia Compensation secondary rated
U6-26 Output monitor for Inertia Compensation. 0.01%
Output current
(-10 to +10 V)
Speed Feedback 10 V: Max
U6-56 Displays observed speed when n5-07=1 or 2. 0.01%
Compensation Output output frequency
U6-80 No signal output
Option Monitor 1 to 20 Monitors reserved to display data from option cards. –
to U6-99 available
B Parameter Table
◆ Defaults and Setting Ranges by Display Unit Selection (o1-03)

Table 52 shows parameters, default settings, and setting ranges that change according to parameter o1-03, Display Unit
Selection.
Table 52 Defaults and Setting Ranges by Display Unit Selection (o1-03)
o1-03 (Digital Operator Display Unit Selection)
No. Name 4 5 6 Default
0 1 2 3 (Elevator (Elevator (Elevator
(0.01 Hz) (0.01%) (r/min) (User-set) units 1) units 2) units 3)
C1-05 Acceleration Ramp 3 0.00 to <1> 0.00 to <1> 1.50 s
0.00 to 600.00 s
C1-06 Deceleration Ramp 3 m/s2 ft/s2
C1-09 Fast Stop Time
C1-15 Inspection Run Deceleration Ramp 0.00 s
C2-01 Jerk at Accel Start
C2-02 Jerk at Accel End
0.00 to <1> 0.00 to <1>
C2-03 Jerk at Decel Start 0.00 to 10.00 s 0.50 s
m/s3 ft/s3
C2-04 Jerk at Decel End
C2-05 Jerk below leveling speed
C1-11 Accel/Decel Switching Speed 0.0%
d1-01 Speed Reference 1
0.00%
0.00 to 0.00 to 0.00 to <2> 0.00 to <1>
d1-08 Speed Reference 8 User define 0.00 to <1> m/s
[E1-04] Hz 100.00% r/min ft/min
d1-19 Nominal Speed 100.0%
d1-20 Intermediate Speed 1
0.00%
d1-23 Releveling Speed
d1-24 Inspection Operation Speed 50.00%
d1-25 Rescue Operation Speed 10.00%
d1-26 Leveling Speed 8.00%
<1> Automatically calculated according to the values set to o1-20, o1-21, o1-22, and E2-/E5- parameters.
<2> Automatically calculated according to the values set to the E2-/E5- parameters.
Parameter Table
B
C Standards Compliance
◆ European Standards
Figure 79
Figure 86 CE Mark
The CE mark indicates compliance with European safety and environmental regulations. It is required for engaging in
business and commerce in Europe.
European standards include the Machinery Directive for machine manufacturers, the Low Voltage Directive for
electronics manufacturers, and the EMC guidelines for controlling noise.
This drive displays the CE mark based on the EMC guidelines and the Low Voltage Directive.
• Low Voltage Directive: 2006/95/EC
• EMC Guidelines: 2004/108/EC
Devices used in combination with this drive must also be CE certified and display the CE mark. When using drives
displaying the CE mark in combination with other devices, it is ultimately the responsibility of the user to ensure
compliance with CE standards. After setting up the device, verify that conditions meet European standards.
■ CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance
This drive has been tested according to European standard IEC61800-5-1, and it fully complies with the Low Voltage
Directive.
To comply with the Low Voltage Directive, be sure to meet the following conditions when combining this drive with
other devices:
Area of Use
Do not use drives in areas with pollution higher than severity 2 and overvoltage category 3 in accordance with IEC664.
Factory Recommended Branch Circuit Protection

Table 53 Recommended Input Fuse Selection
L1000
Drive Model Time Delay Non-time Bussmann
Nominal AC Drive Input MCCB Rating Fuse Rating Delay Fuse Semi-conductor Fuse
CIMR-LU Output Power Amps
Amps Amps Rating Amps Rating
HP <1>
<2> <3> (Fuse Ampere) <4>
240 V Models
2A0008 2 7.5 15 12 20 FWH-70B (70)
2A0011 3 11 20 17.5 30 FWH-70B (70)
2A0014 3 15.6 25 25 40 FWH-90B (90)
2A0018 5 18.9 35 30 50 FWH-90B (90)
2A0025 7.5 28 50 40 75 FWH-100B (100)
2A0033 10 37 60 60 100 FWH-200B (200)
2A0047 15 52 100 90 150 FWH-200B (200)
2A0060 20 68 125 110 200 FWH-200B (200)
2A0075 25 80 150 125 225 FWH-300A (300)
2A0085 30 82 150 125 225 FWH-300A (300)
2A0115 40 111 200 175 250 FWH-350A (350)
2A0145 50 136 250 225 350 FWH-400A (400)
2A0180 60 164 300 250 450 FWH-400A (400)
2A0215 75 200 400 350 600 FWH-600A (600)
2A0283 100 271 500 450 800 FWH-700A (700)
2A0346 125 324 600 500 900 <5> FWH-800A (800)
2A0415 150 394 700 600 1100 <5> FWH-1000A (1000)
480 V Models
4A0005 3 4.4 15 7 12 FWH-70B (70)
4A0006 3 6 15 10 17.5 FWH-70B (70)
4A0007 5 8.2 15 12 20 FWH-90B (90)
4A0009 5 10.4 20 17.5 30 FWH-90B (90)
4A0015 7.5 15 30 25 40 FWH-80B (80)
4A0018 10 20 40 35 60 FWH-100B (100)
4A0024 15 29 50 50 80 FWH-125B (125)
4A0031 20 39 75 60 110 FWH-200B (200)
4A0039 25 47 75 75 125 FWH-250A (250)
4A0045 30 43 75 75 125 FWH-250A (250)
4A0060 40 58 100 100 150 FWH-250A (250)
4A0075 60 71 125 110 200 FWH-250A (250)
4A0091 60 86 150 150 250 FWH-250A (250)
4A0112 75 105 175 175 300 FWH-350A (350)
4A0150 100 142 225 225 400 FWH-400A (400)
4A0180 125 170 250 250 500 FWH-500A (500)
4A0216 150 207 350 350 600 FWH-600A (600)
4A0260 200 248 400 400 700 FWH-700A (700)
<1> Maximum MCCB Rating is 15 A, or 200% of drive input current rating, whichever is larger. MCCB voltage rating must be 600 VAC or greater.
<2> Maximum Time Delay fuse is 175% of drive input current rating. This covers any Class CC, J or T class fuse.
<3> Maximum Non-time Delay fuse is 300% of drive input current rating. This covers any CC, J or T class fuse.
<4> When using semiconductor fuses, Bussmann FWH and FWP are required for UL compliance. Select FWH for 240 V and 480 V models and
FWP fuses for 600 V models.
<5> Class L fuse is also approved for this rating.
Grounding
The drive is designed to be used in T-N (grounded neutral point) networks. If installing the drive in other types of
Compliance
Standards
grounded systems, contact your Magnetek representative for instructions.
MAGNETEK L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide 189 C
CE Standards Compliance for DC Power Supply Input

To meet CE standards, the following fuses should be installed. For details, refer to Figure 87.
Figure 80
DC power supply
(converter)
Fuse U/ T1
+ +1
_ _ V/ T2 M
W/ T3
Drive
Fuse U/ T1
+1
_ V/ T2 M
W/ T3
YEC_common Drive
Figure 87 Example of DC Power Supply Input (two L1000A drives connected in series)
Note: 1. When connecting multiple drives together, make sure that each drive has its own fuse. If any one fuse blows, all fuses should be
replaced.
2. For an AC power supply, refer to Standard Connection Diagram on page 21.
3. The recommended fuses and fuse holders are made by Fuji Electric.
Table 54 Fuses and Fuse Holders
DC Power Supply Input <1> DC Power Supply Input <1>
Fuse Fuse Holder Fuse Fuse Holder
Rated Rated
Drive Model Short- Drive Model Short-
CIMR-LU circuit CIMR-LU circuit
Type Breaking Qty. Type Qty. Type Breaking Qty. Type Qty.
Current Current
(kA) (kA)
200 V Class 400 V Class
2A0008 4A0005
CR2LS-50
2A0011 4A0006
2 CM-1A 1 CR6L-50 2 CMS-4 2
2A0014 CR2LS-75 4A0007
2A0018 CR2LS-100 4A0009
2A0025 CR2L-125 4A0015
CR6L-75
2A0033 CR2L-150 2 CM-2A 1 4A0018
2A0047 CR2L-175 4A0024 CR6L-100 2 CMS-5 2
2A0060 CR2L-225 100 4A0031 100
CR6L-150
2A0075 CR2L-260 4A0039
2A0085 CR2L-300 4A0045 CR6L-200
2A0115 CR2L-350 4A0060
CR6L-250
2A0145 CR2L-400 4A0075
2 <2>
2A0180 CR2L-450 4A0091 CR6L-300
2A0215 4A0112 CR6L-350 2 <2>
CR2L-600
2A0283 4A0150 CR6L-400
2A0346 CS5F-800 4A0180
200
2A0415 CS5F-1200 4A0216 CS5F-600 200
4A0260

<2> Manufacturer does not recommend a specific fuse holder for this fuse. Contact Magnetek or your nearest sales representative on fuse
dimensions.
Guarding Against Harmful Materials

When installing IP00 enclosure drives, use an enclosure that prevents foreign material from entering the drive from above
or below.
■ EMC Guidelines Compliance
This drive is tested according to European standards EN61800-3: 2004, and complies with the European standards
EN12015 (requires an optional AC reactor) and EN12016.
Note: Make sure the protective earthing conductor complies with technical standards and local safety regulations. Because the leakage
current exceeds 3.5 mA when an EMC filter is installed, IEC 61800-5-1 states that either the power supply must be automatically
disconnected in case of discontinuity of the protective earthing conductor or a protective earthing conductor with a cross-section
of at least 10 mm2 (Cu) or 16 mm2 (Al) must be used.
EMC Filter Installation
The following conditions must be met to ensure continued compliance with European standards EN12015 and EN12016.
Refer to EMC Filters on page 194 for EMC filter selection.
Installation Method
Verify the following installation conditions to ensure that other devices and machinery used in combination with this
drive also comply with EMC guidelines.
1. Install an EMC noise filter to the input side specified by Magnetek for compliance with European standards.
2. Place the drive and EMC noise filter in the same enclosure.
3. Use braided shield cable for the drive and motor wiring, or run the wiring through a metal conduit.
4. Keep wiring as short as possible. Ground the shield on both the drive side and the motor side.
Figure 81
A D C
U/T1 U
V/T2 V
M
W/T3 W
E
A – Drive D – Metal conduit
B – 10 m max cable length between drive and motor E – Ground wire should be as short as possible.
C – Motor
Figure 88 Installation Method
Compliance
Standards
5. Make sure the ground conductor complies with technical standards and local safety rules. When an EMC filter is
installed, the leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA. Therefore according to IEC61800-5-1, at least one of the
conditions below must be satisfied:
a) The cross-section of the protective earthing conductor must be at least 10 mm2 (Cu) or 16 mm2 (Al).
b) The power supply must be disconnected automatically in case of discontinuity of the protective earthing
conductor.
Figure 82
C B
A – Braided shield cable C – Cable clamp (conductive)
B – Metal panel
Figure 89 Ground Area
6. Connect an AC reactor or a DC link choke to minimize harmonic distortion.
Three-Phase 200 V / 400 V Class
Figure 83
L3
L2 Make sure the ground wire is grounded
L1
PE
Enclosure panel
Metal plate
Grounding surface
(remove any paint or sealant)
YEA_common
L3 L2 L1
Drive
EMC noise filter

Grounding surface
(remove any paint or sealant)
Ground plate
(scrape off any visible paint)
Cable clamp Motor cable (braided shield cable, max. 10 m)
Ground the cable shield

Motor
Figure 90 EMC Filter and Drive Installation for CE Compliance (Three-Phase 200 V / 400 V Class)
EMC Filters
Install the drive with the EMC filters to comply with the EN61800-3/EN12015 requirements.
Note: If the Safe Disable function of the drive is part of the safety concept of a machine or installation and used for a safe stop according
to EN60204-1, stop category 0, use these filters recommended by Magnetek. For all other EMC filters, additional measurements
must be performed to prove EMC compatibility. This also applies when using the safe disable function in one motor contactor
installations as described in Safe Disable Input Function on page 205.
Table 55 EN61800-3 Filters
Filter Data (Manufacturer: Schaffner)
Model Dimensions
CIMR-LU Type Rated Current Weight [W x D x H] YxX Figure
(A) (kg) (mm)
2A0008
FS5972-18-07 18 1.3 141 × 330 × 46 115 × 313
2A0011
2A0014 FS5972-35-07 35 2.1 206 × 355 × 50 175 × 336
2A0018 1
FS5972-35-07 35 2.1 206 × 50 × 355 175 × 336
2A0025
2A0033
FS5972-60-07 60 4.0 236 × 65 × 408 205 × 390
2A0047
2A0060
FS5972-100-35 100 3.4 90 × 150 × 330 65 × 255
2A0075
2A0185
FS5972-170-40 170 6.0 120 × 170 × 451 102 × 365 2
2A0115
2A0145
FS5972-250-37 250 11.7 130 × 240 × 610 90 × 498
2A0180
2A0215
FS5972-410-99 410 10.5 260 × 115 × 386 235 × 120
2A0283
3
2A0346
FS5972-600-99 600 11 260 × 135 × 386 235 × 120
2A0415
4A0005
FS5972-10-07 10 1.2 141 × 330 × 46 115 × 313
4A0006
4A0007 FS5972-18-07 18 1.3 141 × 330 × 46 115 × 313
4A0009 FS5972-18-07 18 1.3 141 × 46 × 330 115 × 313
4A0015
1
4A0018 FS5972-35-07 35 2.1 206 × 50 × 355 175 × 336
4A0024
4A0031
4A0039 FS5972-60-07 60 4 236 × 65 × 408 202 × 390
4A0045
4A0060
FS5972-100-35 100 3.4 90 × 150 × 330 65 × 255
4A0075
4A0091
2
4A0112 FS5972-170-35 170 6.0 120 × 170 × 451 102 × 365
4A0150
4A0180 FS5972-250-37 250 11.7 130 × 240 × 610 90 × 498
4A0216
FS5972-410-99 410 10.5 260 × 115 × 386 235 × 120 3
4A0260
Compliance
Standards
Figure 84
Filter Side (LINE) Filter Side (LINE)

W W
Y Y D
D
. . .
PE
Recommended torque: 26 - 30Nm / PE: 15 - 17Nm
L1 L2 L3
LINE
L1 L2 L3
LINE
ZSNFS5972-250-37
ZSN3x480/275V 50/60Hz
250A@45°C 25/100/21
LINE
FS 5972 - 60 - 07
3x480/275VAC 50/60Hz
60A@45°C 25/100/21
MADE IN ........
H
X
X
LOAD
ZSNHigh leakage current,

ZSNfirst connect to earth!
ZSN1234567 / 01 / 0840R
LOAD
L1' L2' L3'
LOAD
L1' L2' L3'
Recommended torque: 26 - 30Nm / PE: 15 - 17Nm
PE
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
Drive Side (LOAD)

Drive Side (LOAD)
Figure 1 Figure 2
Filter Side (LINE)

D
L3 L2 L1
X
LINE
PE
L3 L2 L1
LINE
3x520/300VAC 50/60Hz 600A@45??C 25/100/21
FS 5972 - 600 - 99
HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT
first connect to earth!
MADE IN SWITZERLAND
R
H
YYWWR
Zuerst Erdleiter verbinden!

HOHER ABLEITSTROM
LOAD
X
PE
L3' L2' L1'
LOAD
L3' L2' L1'
Y
Drive Side (LOAD)
W
Figure 3
Figure 91 EMC Filter Dimensions
AC Reactors for EN 12015 Compliance
Contact Magnetek for information about reactors.
◆ UL and CSA Standards

■ UL Standards Compliance
The UL/cUL mark applies to products in the United States and Canada. It indicates that UL has performed product testing
and evaluation, and determined that their stringent standards for product safety have been met. For a product to receive
UL certification, all components inside that product must also receive UL certification.
Figure 85
Figure 92 UL/cUL Mark

This drive is tested in accordance with UL standard UL508C and complies with UL requirements. To ensure continued
compliance when using this drive in combination with other equipment, meet the following conditions:
Installation Area
Do not install the drive to an area greater than pollution severity degree 2 (UL standard).
Ambient Temperature
Main Circuit Terminal Wiring
Magnetek recommends using closed-loop crimp terminals on all drive models. UL/cUL approval requires the use of UL
Listed closed-loop crimp terminals when wiring the drive main circuit terminals on models CIMR-L2A0085 to 2A0415
and 4A0045 to 4A0260. Use only the tools recommended by the terminal manufacturer for crimping.
The wire gauges listed in Table 56 and Table 57 are Magnetek recommendations. Refer to local codes for proper wire
gauge selections.
Note: The mark indicates the terminals for protective ground connection. (as defined in IEC60417-5019)
Grounding impedance;
200 V: 100 Ω or less
400 V: 10 Ω or less
Model Recommended Applicable Gauge Screw Tightening Torque

CIMR-LU Terminal Gauge AWG, kcmil Size Nm (lb.in.)
AWG, kcmil
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
1.2 to 1.5
2A0008 –, +1, +2 – 14 to 10 M4
(10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 12 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
1.2 to 1.5
2A0011 –, +1, +2 – 14 to 10 M4
(10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
Compliance
Standards

AWG, kcmil
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 12 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 14 to 10
1.2 to 1.5
2A0014 –, +1, +2 – 14 to 10 M4
(10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 12 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 12 to 10
1.2 to 1.5
2A0018 –, +1, +2 – 12 to 10 M4
(10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 12 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 8 10 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 10 to 6 1.2 to 1.5
M4
–, +1, +2 – 10 to 6 (10.6 to 13.3)
2A0025
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
2 to 2.5
8 10 to 8 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 8 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 8 to 6 1.2 to 1.5
M4
–, +1, +2 – 6 (10.6 to 13.3)
2A0033
B1, B2 – 12 to 10
2 to 2.5
8 10 to 8 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4 6 to 4
4 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4 6 to 4 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
–, +1, +2 – 6 to 4
2A0047 2 to 2.5
B1, B2 – 10 to 6 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
4 to 6
6 8 to 6 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3 4 to 3
9 to11
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3 4 to 3 M8
(79.7 to 97.4)
–, +1, +2 – 4 to 3
2A0060 2 to 2.5
B1, B2 – 8 to 6 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
4 to 6
6 6 to 4 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2 3 to 2
9 to11
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2 3 to 2 M8
(79.7 to 97.4)
–, +1, +2 – 3 to 2
2A0075 2 to 2.5
B1, B2 – 6 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
4 to 6
6 6 to 4 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 1/0 3 to 1/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1/0 3 to 1/0
2A0085 9 to 11
–, +1 – 2 to 1/0 M8
<1> (79.7 to 97.4)
B1, B2 – 6 to 1/0
6 6 to 4

AWG, kcmil
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2/0 1 to 2/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2/0 1 to 2/0 18 to 23
M10
2A0115 –, +1 – 1/0 to 3/0 (159 to 204)
<1> B1, B2 – 4 to 2/0
9 to 11
4 4 M8
(79.7 to 97.4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4/0 2/0 to 4/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4/0 3/0 to 4/0 18 to 23
2A0145 –, +1 – 1 to 4/0 (159 to 204)
M10
<1> +3 – 1/0 to 4/0
9 to 11
4 4 to 2
(79.7 to 97.4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 1/0 × 2P 1/0 to 2/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1/0 × 2P 1/0 to 2/0 18 to 23
2A0180 –, +1 – 1 to 4/0 (159 to 204)
M10
<1> +3 – 1/0 to 4/0
9 to 11
4 4 to 1/0
(79.7 to 97.4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3/0 × 2P 3/0 to 300
32 to 40
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3/0 × 2P 3/0 to 300 M12
(283 to 354)
–, +1 – 3/0 to 300
2A0215
<1> 18 to 23
+3 – 2 to 300 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
3 3 to 300 M12
(283 to 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4/0 × 2P 3/0 to 300
32 to 40
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3/0 × 2P 3/0 to 300 M12
(283 to 354)
–, +1 – 3/0 to 300
2A0283
<1> 18 to 23
+3 – 3/0 to 300 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
2 2 to 300 M12
(283 to 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 250 × 2P 4/0 to 600
32 to 40
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4/0 × 2P 4/0 to 600 M12
(283 to 354)
–, +1 – 250 to 600
2A0346
<1> 18 to 23
+3 – 3/0 to 600 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
1 1 to 350 M12
(283 to 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 350 × 2P 250 to 600
32 to 40
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 300 × 2P 300 to 600 M12
(283 to 354)
–, +1 – 300 to 600
2A0415
<1> 18 to 23
+3 – 3/0 to 600 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
1 1 to 350 M12
(283 to 354)
<1> Drive models CIMR-LU2A0085 to 2A0415 require the use of closed-loop crimp terminals for UL/cUL compliance. Use only the tools
Note: Use crimp insulated terminals or insulated tubing for wiring these connections. Wires should have a continuous maximum
Compliance
allowable temperature of 75°C 600 V UL approved vinyl sheathed insulation. Ambient temperature should not exceed 40°C.
Standards

AWG, kcmil
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 14 to 10
4A0005 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
1.2 to 1.5
4A0006 –, +1, +2 – 14 to 10 M4
(10.6 to 13.3)
4A0007 B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 12 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
1.2 to 1.5
4A0009 –, +1, +2 – 14 to 10 M4
(10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 12 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 12 to 6 1.2 to 1.5
M4
–, +1, +2 – 12 to 6 (10.6 to 13.3)
4A0015
B1, B2 – 12 to 10
2 to 2.5
10 14 to 10 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 10 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 10 to 6 1.2 to 1.5
M4
–, +1, +2 – 12 to 6 (10.6 to 13.3)
4A0018
B1, B2 – 12 to 10
2 to 2.5
10 12 to 10 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 8 8 to 6
3.6 to 4.0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 10 to 6 M5
(31.8 to 35.4)
–, +1, +2 – 10 to 6
4A0024 2.7 to 3.0
B1, B2 – 10 to 8 M5
(23.9 to 26.6)
4 to 6
8 10 to 8 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 8 to 6
3.6 to 4.0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 8 to 6 M5
(31.8 to 35.4)
–, +1, +2 – 6
4A0031 2.7 to 3.0
B1, B2 – 10 to 8 M5
(23.9 to 26.6)
4 to 6
6 10 to 6 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 6 to 4
4 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 6 to 4 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
–, +1, +2 – 6 to 4
4A0039 2 to 2.5
B1, B2 – 10 to 8 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
4 to 6
6 8 to 6 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4 6 to 4
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4 6 to 4
4A0045 9 to 11
–, +1 – 6 to 1 M8
<1> (79.7 to 97.4)
B1, B2 – 8 to 4
6 8 to 6

AWG, kcmil
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3 4 to 3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3 4 to 3
4A0060 9 to 11
–, +1 – 4 to 1 M8
<1> (79.7 to 97.4)
B1, B2 – 6 to 3
6 6
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2 3 to 1/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2 3 to 1/0
4A0075 9 to 11
–, +1 – 3 to 1/0 M8
<1> (79.7 to 97.4)
+3 – 6 to 1/0
4 6 to 4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 1/0 2 to 1/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1 2 to 1/0
4A0091 9 to 11
–, +1 – 3 to 1/0 M8
<1> (79.7 to 97.4)
+3 – 4 to 1/0
4 6 to 4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3/0 1/0 to 4/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2/0 1/0 to 4/0
4A0112 18 to 23
–, +1 – 1/0 to 4/0 M10
<1> (159 to 204)
+3 – 3 to 4/0
4 4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4/0 3/0 to 4/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4/0 3/0 to 4/0
4A0150 18 to 23
–, +1 – 1 to 4/0 M10
<1> (159 to 204)
+3 – 1/0 to 4/0
4 4 to 2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 300 2 to 300
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 300 2 to 300
4A0180 18 to 23
–, +1 – 1 to 250 M10
<1> (159 to 204)
+3 – 3 to 3/0
4 4 to 300
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 400 1 to 600
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 400 1/0 to 600
4A0216 18 to 23
–, +1 – 3/0 to 600 M10
<1> (159 to 204)
+3 – 1 to 325
2 2 to 350
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 500 2/0 to 600
32 to 40
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 500 2/0 to 600 M12
(283 to 354)
–, +1 – 3/0 to 600
4A0260
<1> 18 to 23
+3 – 1 to 325 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
2 2 to 350 M12
(283 to 354)
<1> Drive models CIMR-LU4A0045 to 4A0260 require the use of closed-loop crimp terminals for UL/cUL compliance. Use only the tools
Note: Use crimp insulated terminals or insulated tubing for wiring these connections. Wires should have a continuous maximum
allowable temperature of 75°C 600 V UL approved vinyl sheathed insulation. Ambient temperature should not exceed 40°C.
Compliance
Standards
Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Recommendations

Magnetek recommends using closed-loop crimp terminals on all drive models. UL approval requires the use of UL Listed
crimp terminals when wiring the drive main circuit terminals on models CIMR-LA0085 to 2A0415 and 4A0045 to
4A0260. Use only crimping tools as specified by the crimp terminal manufacturer. Magnetek recommends crimp
terminals made by JST and Tokyo DIP (or equivalent) for the insulation cap.
Table 58 matches the wire gauges and terminal screw sizes with Magnetek - recommended crimp terminals, tools, and
insulation caps. Refer to the appropriate Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications table for the wire gauge and screw size
for your drive model. Place orders with a Magnetek representative or the Magnetek sales department.
Table 58 Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Size
Terminal Crimp Terminal Tool Insulation Cap

Wire Gauge Code <1>
Screws Model Number Machine No. Die Jaw Model No.
14 AWG M4 R2-4 YA-4 AD-900 TP-003 100-054-028
M4 R5.5-4 YA-4 AD-900 TP-005 100-054-029
12 / 10 AWG
M5 R5.5-5 YA-4 AD-900 TP-005 100-054-030
M4 8-4 YA-4 AD-901 TP-008 100-054-031
8 AWG
M5 R8-5 YA-4 AD-901 TP-008 100-054-032
M4 14-NK4 YA-4 AD-902 TP-014 100-054-033
M5 R14-5 YA-4 AD-902 TP-014 100-054-034
6 AWG
M6 R14-6 YA-5 AD-952 TP-014 100-051-261
M8 R14-8 YA-5 AD-952 TP-014 100-054-035
M6 R22-6 YA-5 AD-953 TP-022 100-051-262
4 AWG
M8 R22-8 YA-5 AD-953 TP-022 100-051-263
M8 R38-8 YA-5 AD-954 TP-038 100-051-264
3/2/1 AWG
M10 R38-10 YA-5 AD-954 TP-038 100-061-114
1/0 AWG M8 R60-8 YA-5 AD-955 TP-060 100-051-265
1/0 AWG × 2P M10 R60-10 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-321, TD-311 TP-060 100-051-266
2/0 AWG
M10 70-10 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-323, TD-312 TP-080 100-054-036
2/0 AWG × 2P
1 AWG × 2P
M10 38-L10 YF-1, YET-150-1 TD-224, TD-212 TP-038 100-051-556
2 AWG × 2P
3/0 AWG M10 80-10 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-323, TD-312 TP-080 100-051-267
M10 80-L10 YF-1, YET-150-1 TD-227, TD-214 TP-080 100-051-557
3/0 AWG × 2P
M12 80-L12 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-323, TD-312 TP-080 100-051-558
YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-324, TD-312
4/0 AWG M10 R100-10 TP-100 100-051-269
YF-1, YET-150-1 TD-228, TD-214
M10 100-L10 YF-1, YET-150-1 TD-228, TD-214 TP-100 100-051-559
4/0 AWG × 2P
M12 100-L12 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-324, TD-312 TP-100 100-051-560
M10 R150-10 YF-1. YET-150-1 TD-229, TD-215 TP-150 100-051-272
250 / 300 kcmil
M12 R150-12 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-325, TD-313 TP-150 100-051-273
250 kcmil × 2P M10 150-L10 YF-1, YET-150-1 TD-229, TD-215 TP-150 100-051-561
350 kcmil M10 180-10 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-326, TD-313 TP-200 100-066-687
600 / 650 kcmil
500 kcmil × 2P M12 325-12 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-328, TD-315 TP-325 100-051-277
600 kcmil × 2P
<1> Codes refer to a set of three crimp terminals and three insulation caps. Prepare input and output wiring using two sets for each connection.
Example 1: Models with 300 kcmil for both input and output require one set for input terminals and one set for output terminals, so the user
should order two sets of [100-051-272].
Example 2: Models with 4/0 AWG × 2P for both input and output require two sets for input terminals and two sets for output terminals, so the
user should order four sets of [100-051-560].
Note: Use crimp insulated terminals or insulated shrink tubing for wiring connections. Wires should have a continuous maximum
allowable temperature of 75°C 600 Vac UL-approved vinyl-sheathed insulation.
Input Fuse Installation
The installation manual specifies that branch circuit protection should be provided by any of the following:
• Non-time delay Class J, T, or CC fuses sized at maximum 300% of the drive input rating
• Time delay Class J, T, or CC fuses sized at maximum 175% of the drive input rating
• MCCB sized at maximum 200% of the drive input rating. If a calculated current for MCCB is less than 15A, MCCB
rated 15A shall be used.
Always install fuses at the drive input side. Refer to Recommended Input Fuse Selection on page 189 for selecting fuses.
Low Voltage Wiring for Control Circuit Terminals
Wire low voltage wires with NEC Class 1 circuit conductors. Refer to national state or local codes for wiring. If external
power supply used, it shall be UL Listed Class 2 power source only or equivalent. Refer to NEC Article 725 Class 1,
Class 2, and Class 3 Remote-Control, Signaling, and Power Limited Circuits for requirements concerning class 1 circuit
conductors and class 2 power supplies.
Table 59 Control Circuit Terminal Power Supply
Input / Output Terminal Signal Power Supply Specifications
Open Collector Outputs P1, C1, P2, C2, DM+, DM- Requires class 2 power supply
Digital inputs S1-S8, SN, SC, SP, HC, H1, H2 Use the internal LVLC power supply of the drive. Use
Analog inputs / outputs +V, -V, A1, A2, AC, AM, FM class 2 for external power supply.
Drive Short Circuit Rating

This drive is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes,
600 Vac maximum (Up to 240 V in 200 V class drives, up to 480 V for 400 V class drives), when protected by Bussmann
Type FWH fuses as specified in Table 53.
Compliance
Standards
■ CSA Standards Compliance

CSA for Industrial Control Equipment
The L1000 is CSA certified as Industrial Control Equipment Class 3211.
Specifically, the L1000 is certified to: CAN/CSA C22.2 No.04-04 and CAN/CSA C22.2 No.14-05.
Figure 86
Figure 93 CSA Mark

CSA for Elevator Equipment
The L1000 is tested and complies with CSA B44.1-04/ASME A17.5-2004 standard. This standard is used by CSA to
evaluate the L1000 to Class 2411 (Elevator Equipment).
Figure 87
CSA B44.1 /
ASME A17.5
Figure 94 CSA B44.1-04/ASME A17.5-2004 Mark
■ Drive Motor Overload Protection

Set parameter E2-01/E5-03 (motor rated current) to the appropriate value to enable motor overload protection. The
internal motor overload protection is UL listed and in accordance with the NEC and CEC.
E2-01/E5-03: Motor Rated Current (IM Motor/PM Motor)
Setting Range: Model Dependent
Default Setting: Model Dependent
Parameter E2-01/E5-03 (motor rated current) protects the motor if parameter L1-01 is not set to 0 (default is 1, enabling
protection for standard induction motors).
If Auto-Tuning has been performed successfully, the motor data entered to T1-04/T2-04 is automatically written into
parameter E2-01/E5-03. If Auto-Tuning has not been performed, manually enter the correct motor rated current to
parameter E2-01/E5-03.
L1-01: Motor Overload Protection Selection

The drive has an electronic overload protection function (oL1) based on time, output current, and output speed, which
protects the motor from overheating. The electronic thermal overload function is UL-recognized, so it does not require an
external thermal relay for single motor operation.
This parameter selects the motor overload curve used according to the type of motor applied.
Table 60 Overload Protection Settings
Setting Description
0 Disabled Disabled the internal motor overload protection of the drive.
Selects protection characteristics for a standard self cooled motor with limited cooling
1 Standard fan-cooled motor (default) capabilities when running below the rated speed. The motor overload detection level (oL1) is
automatically reduced when running below the motor rated speed.
Selects protection characteristics for a motor with self-cooling capability within a speed
Drive duty motor with a speed range of
2 range of 10:1. The motor overload detection level (oL1) is automatically reduced when
1:10
running below 1/10 of the motor rated speed.
Selects protection characteristics for a motor capable of cooling itself at any speed —
3 Vector motor with a speed range of 1:100 including zero speed (externally cooled motor). The motor overload detection level (oL1) is
constant over the entire speed range.
Permanent Magnet motor with constant Selects protection characteristics for a constant torque PM motor. The motor overload
5
torque detection level (oL1) is constant over the whole speed range.
Selects protection characteristics for a standard self cooled motor with limited cooling
6 Standard fan cooled motor (50 Hz) capabilities when running below the rated speed. The motor overload detection level (oL1) is
automatically reduces when running below the motor rated speed.
When connecting the drive to more than one motor for simultaneous operation, disable the electronic overload protection
(L1-01 = 0) and wire each motor with its own motor thermal overload relay.
Enable the motor overload protection (L1-01 = 1 to 3, 5) when connecting the drive to a single motor, unless another
motor overload preventing device is installed. The drive electronic thermal overload function causes an oL1 fault, which
shuts off the output of the drive and prevents additional overheating of the motor. The motor temperature is continually
calculated while the drive is powered up.
L1-02: Motor Overload Protection Time
Setting Range: 0.1 to 5.0 min
Factory Default: 1.0 min
Parameter L1-02 determines how long the motor is allowed to operate before the oL1 fault occurs when the drive is
running at 60 Hz and at 150% of the full load amp rating (E2-01/E5-03) of the motor. Adjusting the value of L1-02 can
shift the set of oL1 curves up the y axis of the diagram below, but will not change the shape of the curves.
Figure 88
Operation time (minutes)
10
7
3
Cold start
(Characteristics when an overload occurs
1 at a complete stop)
0.4
Hot start
(Characteristics when an overload occurs
during continuous operation at 100%)
0.1
Motor current (%)
0 100 150 200
E2-01 = 100% motor current
Compliance
Standards
Figure 95 Protection Operation Time for General Purpose Motors at the Rated Output Frequency
◆ Safe Disable Input Function

This section explains the Safe Disable function and how to use it in an elevator installation. Contact Magnetek if more
information is required.
■ Specifications
The Safe Disable inputs provide a stop function in compliance with “Safe Torque Off” as defined in the IEC61800-5-2.
Safe Disable inputs have been designed to meet the requirements of the ISO13849-1, Cat. 3 PLd and IEC61508, SIL2.
A Safe Disable Status Monitor for error detection in the safety circuit is also provided.
Two Safe Disable inputs and one EDM output according to ISO13849-1 Cat.3 PLd,
Inputs / Outputs
IEC61508 SIL2.
Operation Time Time from input open to drive output stop is less than 1 ms.
Demand Rate Low PFD = 5.15E-5
Failure Probability Demand Rate High or
PFH = 1.2E-9
Continuous
The Safe Disable inputs satisfy all requirements of Performance Level (PL) d according to
Performance Level
ISO13849-1 (DC from EDM considered).
■ Precautions
DANGER! Sudden Movement Hazard. Improper use of the Safe Disable function will result in serious injury or death. Make sure the
entire system or machinery uses the Safe Disable function in compliance with safety requirements. When implementing the Safe
Disable function into the safety system of a machine, a thorough risk assessment for the whole system must be carried out to ensure it
complies with relevant safety norms (e.g., EN954/ISO13849, IEC61508, EN/IEC62061).
DANGER! Sudden Movement Hazard. When using a PM motor, even if the drive output is shut off by the Safe Disable function, a
break down of two output transistors can cause current to flow through the motor winding, resulting in a rotor movement for a maximum
angle of 180 degrees (electrically). Ensure this condition will not affect the safety of the application when using the Safe Disable
function. Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. The Safe Disable function can switch off the drive output, but does not cut the drive power supply
and cannot electrically isolate the drive output from the input. Always shut off the drive power supply when performing maintenance or
installations on the drive input side as well as the drive output side. Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. When using the Safe Disable inputs, make sure to remove the wire links between terminals
H1, H2, and HC that were installed prior to shipment. Failing to do so will keep the Safe Disable circuit from operating properly and can
cause injury or even death.
WARNING! All safety features (including Safe Disable) should be inspected daily and periodically. If the system is not operating
normally, there is a risk of serious personal injury.
WARNING! Only a qualified technician with a thorough understanding of the drive, the instruction manual, and safety standards should
be permitted to wire, inspect, and maintain the Safe Disable input. Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death.
NOTICE: From the moment terminal inputs H1 and H2 have opened, it takes up to 1 ms for drive output to shut off completely. The
sequence set up to trigger terminals H1 and H2 should make sure that both terminals remain open for at least 1 ms in order to properly
interrupt drive output. This may result in the Safe Disable Input not activating.
NOTICE: The Safe Disable Monitor (output terminals DM+ and DM–) should not be used for any other purpose than to monitor the
Safe Disable status or to discover a malfunction in the Safe Disable inputs. The monitor output is not considered a safe output.
NOTICE: When utilizing the Safe Disable function, use only the EMC filters recommended in EMC Filter Installation on page 192.
■ Using the Safe Disable Function

Safe Disable Circuit
The Safe Disable circuit consists of two independent input channels that can block the output transistors (terminals H1
and H2). The input can either use the drive internal power supply or an external power supply. Use jumper S3 on the
terminal board to select between Sink or Source mode with either internal or external power supply.
A photocoupler output is available to monitor the status of the Safe Disable terminals. Refer to Output Terminals on
page 39 for signal specifications when using this output.
Additionally a Safe Disable monitor function can be assigned to one of the digital outputs (H2- = 58).
Figure 89
Main Power
24 Vdc Control
Safety Relay or PLC HC Circuit
with safety functionality
Safety Jumper S3
Outputs Setting:
Feedback
SOURCE
H1 Gate Block 1
N Power Module P
H2 Gate Block 2
DM+
>=1
DM-
Drive
Figure 96 Safe Disable Function Wiring Example (Source Mode)

Disabling and Enabling the Drive Output (“Safe Torque Off”)
Figure 97 illustrates a Safe Disable input operation example.
Figure 90
Motor coasts
Output to stop
Frequency
Drive is ready for

operation
Up/Down Command Run Stop
H1, H2 Input ON (Safe Disable off) OFF (Safe Disable activated)
Drive Output Normal operation Safe Torque-Off Baseblock (Not Safe!)
Figure 97 Safe Disable Operation

Entering the “Safe Torque Off” State
Whenever either one Safe Disable input or both inputs open, the motor torque is shut off by switching off the drive output.
If the motor was running before the Safe Disable inputs opened, it will coast to stop, regardless of the stopping method set
in parameter b1-03.
Notice that the “Safe Torque Off” state can only be achieved using the Safe Disable function. Removing the Up/Down
command stops the drive and shuts the output off (baseblock), but does not create a “Safe Torque Off” status.
Note: To avoid an uncontrolled stop during normal operation, make sure that the Safe Disable inputs are opened first when the motor
has completely stopped.
Compliance
Standards
Returning to Normal Operation after Safe Disable

The Safe Torque-Off state can be left by simply closing both Safe-Disable inputs.
If the Up/Down command is issued before the Safe-Disable inputs are closed, then the drive operation depends on the
setting of parameter L8-88.
• If L8-88 is set to 0, the Up/Down command needs to be cycled in order to start the motor.
• If L8-88 is set to 1 (default), the drive will start the motor immediately when the Safe Torque-Off mode is left, i.e., the
Safe Disable inputs are enabled.
Additionally when L8-88 is set to 1, then parameter S6-16 (Restart after Baseblock Selection) can be used to determine
how the drive behaves when the Safe-Disable inputs are opened and closed while the Up/Down command is kept active.
When S6-16 is set to 0, the drive will not restart (default) and the Up/Down command needs to be cycled. When S6-16 is
set to 1, then the drive will restart as soon as the Safe-Disable inputs are closed.
Safe Disable Monitor Output Function and Digital Operator Display
The table below explains the drive output and Safe Disable monitor state depending on the Safe Disable inputs.
Safe Disable Input Status Safe Disable Status Safe Disable Status
Monitor, Monitor, Drive Output Status Digital Operator
Input 1, H1-HC Input 2, H2-HC DM+ - DM– H2- = 58 Display
Off Off Off On Safely disabled, “Safe Torque Off” Hbb (flashes)
On Off On On Safely disabled, “Safe Torque Off” HbbF (flashes)
Off On On On Safely disabled, “Safe Torque Off” HbbF (flashes)
On On On Off Baseblock, ready for operation Normal display
Safe Disable Status Monitor

With the Safe Disable monitor output (terminals DM+ and DM–), the drive provides a safety status feedback signal. This
signal should be read by the device that controls the Safe Disable inputs (PLC or a safety relay) in order to prohibit
leaving the “Safe Torque Off” status in case the safety circuit malfunctions. Refer to the instruction manual of the safety
device for details on this function.
Digital Operator Display
In contrast to terminals DM+/DM-, the safe disable monitor function that can be programmed for a digital output (H2-
 = 58) is a software function and can be used for EN81-1 conform one contactor solutions but not as an EDM signal
according to EN61800-5-1.
When both Safe Disable inputs are open, "Hbb" will flash in the digital operator display.
Should only one of the Safe Disable channels be on while the other is off, "HbbF" will flash in the display to indicate that
there is a problem in the safety circuit or in the drive. This display should not appear under normal conditions if the Safe
Disable circuit is utilized properly. Refer to Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions on page 114 to resolve
possible errors.
◆ EN81-1 Conform Circuit with one Motor Contactor

The safe disable circuit can be utilized to install the drive in an elevator system using only one motor contactor instead of
two. In such a system the following guidelines have to be followed for compliance to EN81-1:1998:
• The circuit must be designed so that the inputs H1 and H2 are opened and the drive output shuts off when the safety
chain is interrupted.
• A drive digital output must be programmed as Safe Disable feedback (H2- = 58). This feedback signal must be
implemented in the contactor supervision circuit of the controller that prevents a restart in case of a fault in the Safe
Disable circuit or the motor contactor.
• All contactors and wiring must be selected and installed in compliance with the EN81-1:1998.
• The safe disable inputs H1 and H2 must be used to enable/disable the drive. The input logic must be set to Source
Mode. Refer to Sinking/Sourcing Mode Selection for Safe Disable Inputs on page 45 for details on setting jumper S3.
The figure below shows a wiring example.
Safety Chain
Circuit
Elevator Controller
Contactor Close Contactor Check

Command (Restart Permission)
K01
24 Vdc
K1
Drive H1 H2 HC Up/Down;
Speed selection; ...
Safe Disable Monitor

(H2- = 58)
Yaskawa
CIMR-L
K2
M
Note: 1. The drive output will immediately shut off when either of the inputs H1 or H2 is opened. In this case the brake should apply
immediately in order to prevent uncontrolled movement of the elevator.
2. The drive output can only be activated when neither an Up nor a Down command is active, i.e., terminals H1 and H2 must be closed
prior to setting the Up/Down command.
Compliance
Standards
Revision History
The revision dates and the numbers of the revised manuals appear on the bottom of the back cover.
MANUAL NO. TM7349 rev 01ࠉ

Published in Japan September 2010 10-3 1
Revision number
Date of original publication
Date of publication
Date of Revision
Publication Number Section Revised Content
August 2012 4 All Addition: Smaller drive capacities added along with corresponding data
Three-phase 200 V: CIMR-LU2A0008 to 2A0014
Three-phase 400 V: CIMR-LU4A0005 to 4A0007
Back cover Revision: Address
February 2012 3 All Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation
Back cover Revision: Address
March 2011 2 Front cover Revision: Format
Preface & Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation
General Safety,
Chapter 2 to 5,
Appendix B
and C
Chapter 7 Revision: Option card installation procedure
Back cover Revision: Address, format
September 2010 1 All Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation
Chapter 7 Addition: Option Card Installation
Back Cover Revision: Address
March 2010 − − First Edition

Magnetek L1000A
AC Drive for Elevator Applications
Quick Start Guide
Magnetek (US)
N50 W13605 Overview Drive
Menomonee Falls, WI 53051
Toll-free 800.236.1705
p 262.252.6999
f 262.790.4142
email info@elevatordrives.com
Magnetek (UK) Ltd.

20 Drakes Mews, Crownhill
Milton Keynes, MK8 0ER UK
p +44 (0) 1908 261427
f +44 (0) 1908 261674
Magnetek Elevator
In the event that the end user of this product is to be in the military and said product is to be employed in any
weapons systems or the manufacture thereof, the export will fall under one of the relevant regulations as
stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Regulations. Therefore, be sure to follow all procedures
and submit all relevant documentation according to any and all rules, regulations and laws that may apply.
Specifications are subject to change without notices for ongoing product modifications and improvements.
© 2010-2012 MAGNETEK ELEVATOR. All rights reserved.
Manual NO. TM7349

© Magnetek Elevator 2012

L1000A AC Elevator Drive: Quick Start Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

L1000A AC Elevator Drive: Quick Start Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

L1000A AC Elevator Drive

Copyright © 2012 MAGNETEK.

2 Magnetek L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide

L1000A can operate synchronous PM motors. Flowchart C: Auto-Tuning for PM Motors on

Maintenance Check Using Drive Monitors

Fault Display and Troubleshooting

Magnetek L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide 3

This Page Intentionally Blank

4 Magnetek L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide

Magnetek L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide 5

Drive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

6 Magnetek L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide

i Preface & General Safety

i Preface & General Safety

L1000A Series AC Drive Quick Start Guide (this book)

L1000A Series AC Drive Technical Manual

between the drive and motor, entre le driver et le moteur, veuillez

MAGNETEK L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide 7

i Preface & General Safety

Electrical Shock Hazard

8 MAGNETEK L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide

i Preface & General Safety

MAGNETEK L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide 9

i Preface & General Safety

10 MAGNETEK L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide

i Preface & General Safety

■ General Application Precautions

MAGNETEK L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide 11

i Preface & General Safety

Inspection and Maintenance

12 MAGNETEK L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide

i Preface & General Safety

■ Motor Application Precautions

MAGNETEK L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide 13

i Preface & General Safety

■ Drive Label Warnings

WARNING AVERTISSMENT NPJT31470-1

Figure 2 Warning Information Position

14 MAGNETEK L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide

Description Drive Controller Power Supply Cable Quick Start Guide

AC drive model MODEL : CIMR-LU2A0018DAA REV: A

FILE NO : E131457 IP00

Figure 3 Nameplate Information

MAGNETEK L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide 15

YEA_common No. Voltage Class

16 MAGNETEK L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide

Orientation Install the drive vertically to maintain maximum cooling effects.

MAGNETEK L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide 17

■ Installation Orientation and Spacing

Figure 4 Correct Installation Orientation

Side Clearance Top/Bottom Clearance

A – 50 mm (1.97 in.) minimum C – 120 mm (4.72 in.) minimum

18 MAGNETEK L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide

■ Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

W D1 Max 0.31 W Max 0.31

Figure 1 YEA_common Figure 2

Table 3 Dimensions: 200 V Class

Drive Model Dimensions (in) Weight

MAGNETEK L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Quick Start Guide 19

Table 4 Dimensions: 400 V Class

Drive Model Dimensions (in) Weight

IP00 Enclosure Drive

Table 5 Dimensions: 200 V Class